Guideline

Subject: Life Insurance Capital Adequacy Test

No: A Issue Date: October 2018
Effective Date: January 1, 2019

Subsection 515(1), 992(1) and 608(1) of the Insurance Companies Act (ICA) requires federally
regulated life insurance companies and societies, holding companies and companies operating in
Canada on a branch basis, respectively, to maintain adequate capital or to maintain an adequate
margin of assets in Canada over liabilities in Canada. Guideline A: Life Insurance Capital
Adequacy Test is not made pursuant to subsections 515(2), 992(2) and 608(3) of the ICA.
However, the guideline along with Guideline A-4: Regulatory Capital and Internal Capital
Targets provide the framework within which the Superintendent assesses whether a life insurer1
maintains adequate capital or an adequate margin pursuant to subsection 515(1), 992(1) and
608(1). Notwithstanding that a life insurer may meet these standards; the Superintendent may
direct the life insurer to increase its capital under subsection 515(3), 992(3) or 608(4).

This guideline establishes standards, using a risk-based approach, for measuring specific life
insurer risks and for aggregating the results to calculate the amount of a life insurer’s regulatory
required capital to support these risks. The guideline also defines and establishes criteria for
determining the amount of qualifying regulatory available capital.

The Life Insurance Capital Adequacy Test is only one component of the required assets that
foreign life insurers must maintain in Canada. Foreign life insurers must also vest assets in
Canada per the ICA.

Life insurers are required to apply this guideline for reporting periods ending on or after
January 1, 2019. Early application is not permitted.

1
For purposes of this guideline, “life insurers” or “insurers” refer to all federally regulated insurers, including
Canadian branches of foreign life companies, fraternal benefit societies, regulated life insurance holding
companies and non-operating life insurance companies.

255 Albert Street

Ottawa, Canada
K1A 0H2

www.osfi-bsif.gc.ca
 Contents

Chapter 1 Overview and General Requirements ......................................5

1.1. Overview ...................................................................................................5
1.2. Minimum and Supervisory Target ratios ..................................................8
1.3. Accounting basis .......................................................................................8
1.4. General requirements ................................................................................9
1.5. Minimum amount of Available Capital ..................................................13
Chapter 2 Available Capital ......................................................................14
2.1. Tier 1 .......................................................................................................14
2.2. Tier 2 .......................................................................................................31
2.3. Capital Composition and Limitations .....................................................38
2.4. Transition ................................................................................................38
Appendix 2-A Information Requirements for Capital Confirmations ............40
Chapter 3 Credit Risk – On-Balance Sheet Items ...................................42
3.1. Credit Risk Required Capital for On-balance Sheet Assets ...................43
3.2. Collateral .................................................................................................52
3.3. Guarantees and credit derivatives ...........................................................59
3.4. Asset backed securities ...........................................................................64
3.5. Repurchase, reverse repurchase and securities lending agreements .......66
Appendix 3-A Rating Mappings ......................................................................68
Chapter 4 Credit Risk - Off-Balance Sheet Activities ............................69
4.1. Over-the-counter derivatives contracts ...................................................69
4.2. Netting of derivative contracts ................................................................72
4.3. Off-balance sheet instruments other than derivatives .............................76
4.4. Commitments ..........................................................................................78
Chapter 5 Market Risk ..............................................................................82
5.1 Interest rate risk ......................................................................................82
5.2 Equity risk .............................................................................................102
5.3 Real estate risk ......................................................................................109
5.4 Mutual funds .........................................................................................110
5.5 Index-linked products risk ....................................................................110
5.6 Currency risk.........................................................................................112
Appendix 5-A Rating Mappings ...................................................................119

Life A LICAT
October 2018 2
 Chapter 6 Insurance Risk ........................................................................120
6.1. Projection of insurance liability cash flows ..........................................121
6.2. Mortality risk ........................................................................................122
6.3. Longevity risk .......................................................................................128
6.4. Morbidity risk .......................................................................................129
6.5. Lapse risk ..............................................................................................132
6.6. Expense risk ..........................................................................................134
6.7 Property and casualty risk .....................................................................135
6.8 Credit for reinsurance and special policyholder arrangements .............135
Chapter 7 Segregated Fund Guarantee Risk .........................................139
7.1. Products ................................................................................................139
7.2. Documentation and reporting ...............................................................140
7.3. Total gross calculated requirement .......................................................143
7.4. Classifying the asset exposure ..............................................................148
7.5. Determining the risk attributes .............................................................153
7.6. Retrieving the appropriate nodes ..........................................................158
7.7. Use of supplied functions to determine the requirement ......................159
7.8. Margin Offset Adjustment ....................................................................167
7.9. Credit for reinsurance ceded or capital markets hedging .....................167
7.10. Custom factors and internal models .....................................................168
7.11. Analysis of results .................................................................................169
Chapter 8 Operational Risk ....................................................................170
8.1 Operational risk formula .......................................................................170
8.2 Operational risk exposures and factors .................................................170
Chapter 9 Participating and Adjustable Products ................................174
9.1. The participating product credit ............................................................174
9.2. The contractually adjustable product credit ..........................................178
9.3. Participating products that are contractually adjustable .......................181
Chapter 10 Credit for Reinsurance ............................................................183
10.1. Definitions ............................................................................................183
10.2. Valuation basis for ceded liabilities ......................................................185
10.3. Deductions from Available Capital for unregistered reinsurance.........185
10.4. Collateral and letters of credit ...............................................................187

Life A LICAT
October 2018 3
 10.5. Calculation of required capital/margin or eligible deposits ..................191
Chapter 11 Aggregation and Diversification of Risks ..............................197
11.1. Within-risk diversification ....................................................................197
11.2 Between-risk diversification .................................................................200
11.3 Base Solvency Buffer ...........................................................................204
Chapter 12 Life Insurers Operating in Canada on a Branch Basis ........205
12.1. LIMAT Ratios.......................................................................................205
12.2. Available Margin ..................................................................................206
12.3. Surplus Allowance and Eligible Deposits ............................................209
12.4. Required Margin ...................................................................................209

Life A LICAT
October 2018 4
Chapter 1 Overview and General Requirements
This chapter provides an overview of the Life Insurance Capital Adequacy Test (LICAT)
guideline and sets out general requirements. Details on specific components of the LICAT are
contained in subsequent chapters.

1.1. Overview
1.1.1. LICAT Ratios

The LICAT measures the capital adequacy of an insurer and is one of several indicators used by
OSFI to assess an insurer’s financial condition. The ratios should not be used in isolation for
ranking and rating insurers.

Capital considerations include elements that contribute to financial strength through periods
when an insurer is under stress as well as elements that contribute to policyholder and creditor
protection during wind-up.

The Total Ratio focuses on policyholder and creditor protection. The formula used to calculate
the Total Ratio is:

Available Capital + Surplus Allowance + Eligible Deposits

Base Solvency Buffer

The Core Ratio focuses on financial strength. The formula used to calculate the Core Ratio is:

Tier 1 Capital + 70% of Surplus Allowance + 70% of Eligible Deposits

Base Solvency Buffer

1.1.2. Available Capital

Available Capital comprises Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital, and involves certain deductions, limits and
restrictions. The definition encompasses Available Capital within all subsidiaries that are
consolidated for the purpose of calculating the Base Solvency Buffer, which is described below.
Available Capital is defined in Chapter 2.

1.1.3. Surplus Allowance

The amount of the Surplus Allowance included in the numerator of the Total and Core Ratios is
based on provisions for adverse deviations (PfADs) calculated under the Canadian Asset
Liability Method (CALM), or any other method prescribed under the Standards of Practice of
the Canadian Institute of Actuaries, that is used to determine insurance contract liabilities
reported on the insurer’s financial statements.2 Any PfAD included in the Surplus Allowance to
account for a specific risk must correspond to a PfAD included in the total liability reported in

2
If approximations are permitted by the CIA Standards of Practice and used to calculate the PfADs those
approximations should continue to be used for LICAT purposes.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 5
financial statements. The specific PfADs included in the Surplus Allowance used to calculate the
LICAT ratios are:
1) PfADs relating to scenario assumptions for risk-free interest rates associated with
insurance contracts other than segregated fund contracts, calculated net of all reinsurance;
and
2) PfADs for the following non-economic assumptions associated with insurance contracts
other than segregated fund contracts, calculated net of registered reinsurance only:
insured life mortality, annuitant mortality, morbidity, withdrawal and partial withdrawal,
anti-selective lapse, expense and policy owner options. 3 These PfADs are described in
the Standards of Practice of the Canadian Institute of Actuaries.

All other PfADs, including PfADs for economic assumptions other than those for risk-free
interest rates (e.g. credit spreads, foreign currencies, and investment expenses), PfADs for non-
economic assumptions other than those listed above (e.g. operational risk), and PfADs associated
with segregated fund contracts, are excluded from the Surplus Allowance.

1.1.4. Eligible Deposits

Subject to limits, excess deposits placed by unregistered reinsurers (qq.v. sections 6.8.1 and
10.5.4) and claims fluctuation reserves (q.v. section 6.8.4) may be recognized as Eligible
Deposits in the calculation of the Total Ratio and Core Ratio. Recognition of these amounts is
subject to the criteria for risk transfer described in section 10.5.

1.1.5. Base Solvency Buffer

Insurers’ capital requirements are set at a supervisory target level that, based on expert judgment,
aims to align with a conditional tail expectation (CTE) of 99% over a one-year time horizon
including a terminal provision. The risk capital requirements in this guideline are used to
compute capital requirements at the target level.

An insurer's Base Solvency Buffer (q.v. section 11.3) is equal to the sum of the aggregate capital
requirement net of credits, for each of six geographic regions, multiplied by a scalar of 1.05. An
aggregate capital requirement is calculated for:
1) Canada
2) The United States
3) The United Kingdom
4) Europe other than the United Kingdom
5) Japan
6) Other locations

3
The PfADs in the Surplus Allowance include insurance risk PfADs for all business that an insurer has assumed
under modified coinsurance arrangements, and exclude insurance risk PfADs for business that the insurer has
ceded under registered modified coinsurance arrangements.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 6
Liabilities and their associated risks are allocated to geographic regions based on where the
original policy underlying the liability was written directly. Assets backing liabilities are
allocated to the same region as the liabilities that they back. Assets backing surplus, if held in a
branch, are allocated to the region in which the branch is registered, otherwise they are allocated
to the region in which the legal entity holding the assets is incorporated.

The aggregate capital requirement within a geographic region comprises requirements for each
of the following five risk components:
1) credit risk (Chapters 3 and 4);
2) market risk (Chapter 5);
3) insurance risk (Chapter 6);
4) segregated funds guarantee risk (Chapter 7); and
5) operational risk (Chapter 8).

Aggregate requirements are reduced by credits for qualifying in-force participating and
adjustable products (Chapter 9), and risk diversification (Chapter 11). Additionally, it is possible
to obtain credit (via a reduction of specific risk components or an amount recognized in Eligible
Deposits) for the following risk mitigation arrangements:
1. reinsurance (insurance risk components, and other components where reinsurance is
explicitly recognized);
2. collateral, guarantees and credit derivatives (credit risk component for fixed-income and
reinsurance assets);
3. other derivatives serving as hedges (market risk components); and
4. asset securitization (credit risk component).

Any arrangement (including securitization) under which a third party assumes, or agrees to
indemnify an insurer for losses arising from insurance risk is treated as reinsurance for capital
purposes, and is subject to the requirements in Chapter 10.

Collateral, guarantees and credit derivatives may be used to reduce the credit risk requirements
for fixed-income financial assets and registered reinsurance assets. The conditions for their use
and the capital treatment are described in sections 3.2, 3.3 and 10.5.3. Collateral and letters of
credit may be used to reduce the deductions from available capital for unregistered reinsurance
as described in section 10.3, subject to the conditions in section 10.4. Derivatives serving as
equity hedges may be applied to reduce the market risk requirements for equities, as described in
section 5.2.4, and derivatives serving as foreign exchange risk hedges may be applied to reduce
the requirement as described in sections 5.6.2 and 5.6.4. Asset securitization may be used to
reduce credit risk requirements as provided for in Guideline B-5: Asset Securitization; guarantees
providing tranched protection are treated as synthetic securitizations, and fall within the scope of
the securitization guideline.

Reinsurance that is intended to mitigate credit or market risks associated with a ceding insurer’s
on-balance sheet assets (e.g. equity risk, real estate risk), irrespective of whether it mitigates

Life A LICAT
October 2018 7
other risks simultaneously, must meet the conditions and follow the capital treatment specified in
sections 10.5.3 and 10.5.4 in order for an insurer to reduce the requirements for these risks.

1.1.6. Foreign life insurers4

The Life Insurance Margin Adequacy Test (LIMAT) Ratios are designed to measure the
adequacy of assets in Canada of foreign insurers. These ratios and their components (Available
Margin, Surplus Allowance and Required Margin) are described in Chapter 12, “Life insurers
Operating in Canada on a Branch Basis”.

The LIMAT is only one element in the determination of the required assets that foreign insurers
must maintain in Canada. Foreign insurers must also vest assets in Canada pursuant to section
610 of the Insurance Companies Act.

1.2. Minimum and Supervisory Target ratios

OSFI has established a Supervisory Target Total Ratio of 100% and a Supervisory Target Core
Ratio of 70%. The Supervisory Targets provide cushions above the minimum requirements,
provide a margin for other risks, and facilitate OSFI’s early intervention process.5 The
Superintendent may, on a case by case basis, establish alternative targets in consultation with an
insurer based on that insurer’s individual risk profile.

Insurers are required, at minimum, to maintain a Total Ratio of 90% and a Core Ratio of 55%6.
Insurers should refer to Guideline A4 - Regulatory Capital and Internal Capital Targets for
OSFI’s definitions and expectations around the Minimum and Supervisory Target ratios and
expectations regarding internal capital targets and capital management policies.

1.3. Accounting basis

Unless indicated otherwise, the starting basis for the amounts used in calculating Available
Capital, Available Margin, Surplus Allowance, Base Solvency Buffer, Required Margin and any
of their components are those reported in, or used to calculate the amounts reported in, the
insurer’s financial statements and other financial information contained in the Life Quarterly
Return and Life Annual Supplement, all of which have been prepared in accordance with
Canadian GAAP7 in conjunction with OSFI instructions and accounting guidelines.

These financial statements and information are required to be adjusted as specified below to
determine the carrying amounts that are subject to capital charges or are otherwise used in
4
Within this guideline, the term “foreign life insurer” has the same meaning as life insurance “foreign company”
in section 2 of the Insurance Companies Act.
5
Industry-wide Supervisory Targets are not applicable to regulated insurance holding companies and non-
operating insurance companies.
6
Regulated insurance holding companies and non-operating insurance companies are required to maintain a
minimum Core Ratio of 50%.
7
The Canadian Accounting Standards Board has adopted International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as
Canadian GAAP for publicly accountable enterprises, including insurers. The primary source of Canadian
GAAP is the Chartered Professional Accountants of Canada Handbook.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 8
LICAT calculations. The Canadian GAAP financial statements and information should be
restated for LICAT purposes and reported in accordance with the following specifications:
1) Only subsidiaries (whether held directly or indirectly) that carry on a business that an
insurer could carry on directly (e.g., life insurance, real estate and ancillary business
subsidiaries) are reported on a consolidated basis.8
2) Consolidated equity investments in non-life solvency regulated financial corporations9
that are controlled should be deconsolidated and reported using the equity method of
accounting.

1.4. General requirements

1.4.1. Opinion of the Appointed Actuary

The Appointed Actuary is required to sign, on the front page of the LICAT Quarterly Return10,
an opinion in accordance with the Standards of Practice of the Canadian Institute of Actuaries.
The text of the required opinion is:
“I have reviewed the calculation of the LICAT Ratios of [Company name] as at [Date].
In my opinion, the calculations of the components of Available Capital, Surplus
Allowance, Eligible Deposits and Base Solvency Buffer have been determined in
accordance with the Life Insurance Capital Adequacy Test guideline and the
components of the calculation requiring discretion were determined using
methodologies and judgment appropriate to the circumstances of the company.”
[Note: For a foreign insurer “LICAT Ratios”, “Available Capital” and “Base Solvency
Buffer” are replaced by “LIMAT Ratios”, “Available Margin” and “Required
Margin”.]

The memorandum that the Appointed Actuary is required to prepare under the Standards of
Practice (LICAT Memorandum) to support this certification must be available to OSFI upon
request.

1.4.2. Authorized official signature

Each life insurer is required to have an authorized Officer endorse the following statement on the
LICAT Quarterly Return:
“I confirm that I have read the Life Insurance Capital Adequacy Test guideline and related
instructions issued by the Office of the Superintendent of Financial Institutions and that this
form is completed in accordance with them.”

8
Composite insurance subsidiaries that write both life insurance and property and casualty insurance are included
within the scope of consolidation.
9
Non-life solvency regulated financial corporations include entities engaged in the business of banking, trust and
loan business, property and casualty insurance business, the business of cooperative credit societies or that are
primarily engaged in the business of dealing in securities, including portfolio management and investment
counselling.
10
The Appointed Actuary is only required to sign the front page of the LICAT Quarterly Return for submissions
made at year end.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 9
The Officer attesting to the validity of this statement on the LICAT Quarterly Return at year end
must be different from the insurer’s Appointed Actuary.

1.4.3. Audit requirement

Life insurers are required to retain an Auditor appointed pursuant to section 337 or 633 of the
ICA to report on the year-end LICAT Quarterly Return in accordance with the relevant standards
for such assurance engagements, as promulgated by the Canadian Auditing and Assurance
Standards Board (AASB).

1.4.4. Best Estimate Assumptions

Best Estimate Assumptions used to calculate the capital requirements for insurance and market
risks are the assumptions used in the CALM base scenario, and consist of:
1) base scenario assumptions for interest rates as specified in the Standards of Practice of
the Canadian Institute of Actuaries; and
2) best estimates for all other assumptions, where these assumptions are consistent with the
base scenario for interest rates.

1.4.5 Use of Approximations

Insurers should adhere to the Standards of Practice of the Canadian Institute of Actuaries on
materiality and approximations with respect to approximations permitted within the LICAT. All
approximations used, along with the vetting completed to measure the effectiveness of
approximations, and the steps taken to refine and correct ineffective approximations, should be
reported in the LICAT Memorandum.

In addition, insurers should adhere to the following specifications:

Approximations of LICAT calculations are not permitted if most of the data or information is
available from other internal processes and this data or information is used to calculate liabilities
for financial statement purposes. For example, if an insurer performs its CALM testing in real
time, it should not use in-arrears asset and liability cash flows for LICAT purposes. In this case,
approximations for LICAT should only be used if the actual calculation cannot be performed in
real time (i.e. it is done in-arrears for valuation).

Insurers should use approximations consistently from quarter to quarter, unless reviews of their
effectiveness require a modification to improve accuracy, or an improvement in the insurer’s
processes renders the approximation unnecessary.

The following approximations may be used in the calculation of the relevant LICAT
components:11

11
Only the approximations listed below may be used for LICAT components that affect the LICAT ratios
materially. Other immaterial approximations may be used in the determination of the LICAT ratios.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 10
1) Sections 2.1.1.5, 2.1.2.6 and 2.2.1.4: Insurers may approximate marginal capital
requirements by using quarter-in-arrears data to determine the ratio of the marginal
solvency buffer to the standalone solvency buffer, and then multiplying this ratio by the
current standalone solvency buffer. Additionally, the marginal requirements in sections
2.1.1.5 and 2.2.1.4 may be approximated using quarter-in-arrears data if the amount of
capital held by third-party investors or attributable to non-controlling interests remains
well below the applicable limit.
2) Section 2.1.2.9.2: An insurer may use quarter-in-arrears data to determine the individual
and total policy requirements 𝑟𝑐vol, 𝑟𝑐cat, 𝑅𝐶vol, and 𝑅𝐶cat.
3) Section 3.1.2: Quarter-in-arrears cash flows may be used to approximate the effective
maturities of credit exposures subject to this section. If this approximation is used, an
insurer should make appropriate adjustments for significant changes in asset inventory,
disposals, maturities, etc. that have occurred since the last quarter-end.
In low-interest rate environments where an insurer is using the weighted average
approach to calculate the effective maturity of exposures to a connected group, an insurer
may apply weights based on market value instead of undiscounted cash flows to the
individual exposures.
4) Sections 3.1.7 and 3.1.8: An insurer may estimate the proportions of reinsurance
receivables and premium receivables that have been outstanding less than 60 days and
more than 60 days using quarter-in-arrears data.
5) Section 3.1.7: An insurer may approximate reinsurance assets by reinsurer for the purpose
of applying the zero floor by using quarter-in-arrears data to determine the percentage of
reserves ceded to each reinsurer, and multiplying these percentages by total current ceded
liabilities.
6) Sections 5.1.2 and 5.1.3: Quarter-in-arrears cash flows, in combination with roll-forwards
and true-ups that an insurer uses for its in-arrears CALM cash flow testing, may be used
to determine the most adverse scenario and project all cash flows.
7) Section 5.1.3.3: Second-order impacts of restating dividends on paid-up additions may be
ignored.
8) Sections 5.1.3.17 and 6.1: Investment income taxes and tax timing differences may be
projected under the CALM worst interest rate scenario instead of the base scenario.
9) Section 5.6.1: The maximum amount of the offsetting short position for a currency within
a geographic region may be approximated as:
𝐵𝐶𝑅currency
120% × × 𝐵𝑆𝐵
∑ 𝐵𝐶𝑅
where:

 𝐵𝐶𝑅currency is the basic capital requirement for business denominated in the

currency under consideration, defined below;
 ∑ 𝐵𝐶𝑅 is the sum of all basic capital requirements for all currencies within the
region;

Life A LICAT
October 2018 11
  𝐵𝑆𝐵 is the Base Solvency Buffer for the region, with all requirements for
currency risk excluded, the requirement for insurance risk calculated net of all
reinsurance, and all credits for within-risk diversification, between-risk
diversification, and participating and adjustable products applicable to the
aggregated requirements taken into account.

The basic capital requirement 𝐵𝐶𝑅currency is the sum of the following amounts that are
denominated in the currency under consideration:
a) 2.8% of all liabilities;
b) 0.24% of the net amount at risk for term products and other life products that do
not have significant cash values;
c) 2.4% of liabilities for:
i. life products that have significant cash values;
ii. participating contracts; and
iii. accident, health and disability coverage;
d) 4.8% of annuity liabilities;
e) 4.4% of liabilities for GICs, or of notional value for synthetic GICs (e.g. wraps);
and
f) 4.8% of guaranteed value for segregated funds.
Insurance liabilities, net amounts at risk, and segregated fund guarantee values in the
above sum should be based on Best Estimate Assumptions, and should be measured net
of all reinsurance. The guaranteed value of segregated funds is defined to be the actuarial
present value of all benefits due to policyholders assuming that all account values are
zero, and remain at zero for the life of the policies.
Up to and including year-end 2020, the maximum amount of the offsetting short position
for a currency within a geography may also be approximated as:
𝐿currency
120% × × 𝐵𝑆𝐵
∑𝐿
where 𝐿currency is the amount of liabilities in the currency under consideration, and ∑ 𝐿 is
the total amount of liabilities in all currencies in the geography.
10) Sections 6.2.1 and 6.5.1: Insurers may use cash flows with a lag of up to one year when
conducting the tests used to determine which products are life supported and death
supported, or lapse supported and lapse sensitive.
11) Sections 6.2.2.1: Insurers may use a lag of up to one year when calculating the ratio of the
individual life volatility risk component to the following year’s expected claims.
12) Sections 6.4.3, 6.4.4, 6.5.3, 6.5.4, 6.6.1: For the volatility and catastrophe components of
morbidity and lapse risks, the shocks applied to best estimate assumptions are for the first
year only, and zero thereafter. If an insurer, for example due to software limitations, is
unable to apply shocks for partial calendar years, it may instead apply the LICAT

Life A LICAT
October 2018 12
 insurance risk shock for the remaining portion of the calendar year, and a different shock
for the entirety of the following calendar year. The second shock should be equal to the
LICAT shock multiplied by the proportion of the current calendar year that has elapsed.
For example, if the insurer is preparing a LICAT filing for the end of Q1 20x1, and
LICAT specifies an insurance risk shock of 30%, then the insurer may use a shock of
30% for the remainder of 20x1, and a 7.5% shock for all of 20x2.
If this approximation is used for expense risk, the second shock representing the
carryover from the first year should be added to the 10% shock in the second year.
13) Section 6.5.3: An insurer may approximate the requirement for lapse volatility by
determining the present value of cash flows for a shock of +/- 30% in the first year, and
subtracting the present value of best estimate cash flows.
14) Sections 6.8.1, 6.8.4, and 9.2: In order to determine a marginal insurance risk solvency
buffer, insurers may use quarter-in-arrears data to determine the ratio of the marginal
insurance risk solvency buffer to the standalone insurance risk solvency buffer, and then
apply this ratio to the current standalone insurance risk solvency buffer. An insurer may
use this approximation if changes from the previous quarter (e.g. diversification credit or
the relative weights of different risks) do not have a material impact on the results.

1.5. Minimum amount of Available Capital

Notwithstanding the minimum and target Total and Core Ratios described in the Guideline,
Canadian life insurance companies are required to maintain a minimum amount of Available
Capital, as calculated in this Guideline, of $5 million or such amount as specified by the
Superintendent.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 13
Chapter 2 Available Capital
This chapter defines the elements included in Available Capital, establishes criteria for assessing
capital instruments, and sets capital composition limits.

The primary considerations for assessing the capital elements of an insurer include:
1) availability: whether the capital element is fully paid in, and the extent to which it is
available to absorb losses;
2) permanence: the period for which the capital element is available to absorb losses;
3) absence of encumbrances and mandatory servicing costs: the extent to which the capital
element is free from mandatory payments or encumbrances; and
4) subordination: the extent to, and the circumstances under which the capital element is
subordinated to the rights of policyholders and general creditors of the insurer in an
insolvency or winding-up.

Total available capital comprises Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital, which are defined in sections 2.1 and
2.2 below.

2.1. Tier 1
2.1.1. Gross Tier 1

Gross Tier 1 is equal to the sum of:

Tier 1 Capital Instruments
1) Common shares issued by the insurer, other than those issued by consolidated
subsidiaries and held by third party investors, that meet the criteria specified in section
2.1.1.1;
2) Tier 1 Capital Instruments other than Common Shares issued by the insurer, other than
those issued by consolidated subsidiaries and held by third party investors:
a. that meet the criteria specified in sections 2.1.1.2 to 2.1.1.4; or
b. that were issued prior to August 7, 2014, do not meet the criteria specified in
sections 2.1.1.2 to 2.1.1.4, but meet the Tier 1 criteria specified in Appendix 2-B
and Appendix 2-C of the OSFI guideline Minimum Continuing Capital and
Surplus Requirements effective January 1, 2016 (these instruments are subject to
the transition measures in section 2.4.1);
3) Instruments issued by consolidated subsidiaries of the insurer and held by third party
investors:
a. that meet the criteria for classification as Common Shares as specified in section
2.1.1.1, or as Tier 1 Capital Instruments other than Common Shares as specified
in sections 2.1.1.2 to 2.1.1.4 (these instruments are subject to the conditions in
section 2.1.1.5 and the transition measures in section 2.4.2); or

Life A LICAT
October 2018 14
 b. that were issued prior to August 7, 2014, do not meet the criteria specified in
sections 2.1.1.2 to 2.1.1.4, but meet the Tier 1 criteria specified in Appendix 2-B
and Appendix 2-C of the OSFI guideline Minimum Continuing Capital and
Surplus Requirements effective January 1, 2016 (these instruments are subject to
transition measures in sections 2.4.1 and 2.4.2).
Tier 1 Elements other than Capital Instruments
4) Contributed Surplus, comprising:
a. Share premium resulting from the issuance of capital instruments included in
Gross Tier 112; and
b. Other contributed surplus, resulting from sources other than profits (e.g.,
members’ contributions and initial funds for mutual companies and other
contributions by shareholders in excess of amounts allocated to share capital for
joint stock companies), excluding any share premium resulting from the issuance
of capital instruments included in Tier 2;
5) Adjusted Retained Earnings;
6) Adjusted Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (AOCI);
7) Participating account;
8) Non-participating account (mutual companies); and
9) Tier 1 elements, other than capital instruments, attributable to non-controlling interests
that satisfy the conditions in section 2.1.1.5.

To determine Adjusted Retained Earnings, the following items are reversed from retained
earnings13:
1) Changes to own credit risk: Accumulated after-tax gains or losses on fair-valued
liabilities that arise from changes to the insurer’s own credit risk;
2) Real estate:
a. After-tax fair value gains or losses on owner-occupied property upon conversion
to IFRS (cost model)14;
b. Accumulated after-tax revaluation loss on owner-occupied property (revaluation
model);
c. Gains or losses up to the transfer date on owner-occupied property that was
previously classified as investment property15;

12
Where repayment of the premium is subject to the Superintendent’s approval.
13
The amount of retained earnings reported by fraternal benefit societies for LICAT purposes should be the lower
of the insurance fund surplus or the total surplus.
14
The amount reversed should equal the difference between deemed cost on transition to IFRS, and the moving
average market value immediately prior to conversion to IFRS.
15
The amount of the reversal is the difference between the property’s deemed cost on the date of transfer into
owner-occupied property, and either the moving average market value immediately prior to conversion to IFRS
net of subsequent depreciation if the property was acquired before conversion to IFRS, or the original acquisition
cost net of subsequent depreciation if the property was acquired after conversion to IFRS.
Life A LICAT
October 2018 15
 3) Discretionary participation features reported in a component of equity that is included in
Gross Tier 1.
To determine Adjusted AOCI, the following items are reversed from total reported AOCI:
1) Changes to own credit risk: Accumulated after-tax gains and losses on fair-valued
liabilities that arise from changes to an insurer’s own credit risk;
2) Cash flow hedge reserve: Accumulated fair value gains and losses on derivatives held as
cash flow hedges relating to the hedging of items that are not fair-valued on the balance
sheet (e.g., loans and debt obligations); and
3) Owner-occupied property: Accumulated after tax fair value revaluation gains on own-use
property (revaluation method).

2.1.1.1 Qualifying Criteria for Common Shares

Capital instruments classified as common shares must meet all of the following criteria:
1) The shares represent the most subordinated claim in liquidation of the insurer.
2) The investor is entitled to a claim on the residual assets that is proportional with its share
of issued capital, after all senior claims have been paid in liquidation (i.e., has an
unlimited and variable claim, not a fixed or capped claim).
3) The principal is perpetual and never repaid outside of liquidation (setting aside
discretionary repurchases or other means of effectively reducing capital in a discretionary
manner that are allowable under relevant law and subject to the prior approval of the
Superintendent).
4) The insurer does not, in the sale or marketing of the instrument, create an expectation at
issuance that the instrument will be bought back, redeemed or cancelled, nor do the
statutory or contractual terms provide any feature that might give rise to such expectation.
5) Distributions are paid out of distributable items (retained earnings included). The level of
distributions is not in any way tied or linked to the amount paid in at issuance, and is not
subject to a contractual cap (except to the extent that an insurer is unable to pay
distributions that exceed the level of distributable items or to the extent that distributions
on senior ranking capital must be paid first).
6) There are no circumstances under which the distributions are obligatory. Non-payment is
therefore not an event of default.
7) Distributions are paid only after all legal and contractual obligations have been met and
payments on more senior capital instruments have been made. This means that there are
no preferential distributions, including in respect of other elements classified as the
highest quality issued capital.
8) It is in the form of issued capital that takes the first and proportionately greatest share of
any losses as they occur. Within the highest quality capital, each instrument absorbs
losses on a going-concern basis proportionately and pari passu with all the others.
9) The paid-in amount is recognized as equity capital (i.e., not recognized as a liability) for
determining balance sheet solvency.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 16
 10) It is directly issued and paid-in16 and the insurer cannot directly or indirectly have funded
the purchase of the instrument. Where the consideration for the shares is given in a form
other than cash, the issuance of the common shares is subject to the prior approval of the
Superintendent.
11) The paid-in amount is neither secured nor covered by a guarantee of the issuer or a
related entity17, and is not subject to any other arrangement that legally or economically
enhances the seniority of the claim.
12) It is only issued with the approval of the owners of the issuing insurer, either given
directly by the owners or, if permitted by applicable law, given by the Board of Directors
or by other persons duly authorised by the owners.
13) It is clearly and separately disclosed as equity on the insurer’s balance sheet, prepared in
accordance with relevant accounting standards.

The criteria for common shares also apply to instruments issued by non-joint stock companies,
such as mutual insurance companies and fraternal benefit societies, taking into account their
specific constitutions and legal structures. The application of the criteria should preserve the
quality of the instruments by requiring that they be deemed fully equivalent to common shares in
terms of their capital quality, including their loss absorption capacity, and do not possess features
that could cause the condition of the insurer to be weakened as a going concern during periods
when the insurer is under stress.

2.1.1.2 Qualifying Criteria for Tier 1 Capital Instruments Other than Common Shares18
Instruments, other than common shares, qualify as Tier 1 if all of the following criteria are met:
1) The instrument is issued and paid-in in cash or, subject to the prior approval of the
Superintendent, in property.
2) The instrument is subordinated to policyholders, general creditors, and subordinated debt
holders of the insurer.
3) The instrument is neither secured nor covered by a guarantee made by the issuer or a
related entity, and there is no other arrangement that legally or economically enhances the
seniority of the claim vis-à-vis the insurer’s policyholders and general creditors19.

16
Paid-in capital generally refers to capital that has been received with finality by the insurer, is reliably valued,
fully under the insurer’s control and does not directly or indirectly expose the insurer to the credit risk of the
investor.
17
A related entity can include a parent company, a sister company, a subsidiary or any other affiliate. A holding
company is a related entity irrespective of whether it forms part of the consolidated insurance group.
18
OSFI continues to explore the applicability of non-viability contingent capital (NVCC) to insurers. In the event
insurers become subject to this requirement, the qualifying criteria for Tier 1 capital instruments, other than
common shares, and Tier 2 capital instruments will be revised accordingly and further transitioning arrangements
may be established for non-qualifying instruments.
19
Further, where an issuer uses a Special Purpose Vehicle to issue capital to investors and provides support (including
overcollateralization) to the vehicle, such support would constitute enhancement in breach of this criterion.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 17
 4) The instrument is perpetual, i.e., there is no maturity date, and there are no step-ups20 or
other incentives to redeem21.
5) The instrument may be callable at the initiative of the issuer only after a minimum of five
years:
a. To exercise a call option an insurer must receive prior approval of the
Superintendent; and
b. An insurer’s actions and the terms of the instrument must not create an
expectation that the call will be exercised; and
c. An insurer must not exercise the call unless:
i. It replaces the called instrument with capital of the same or better quality,
including through an increase in retained earnings, and the replacement of
this capital is made on terms that are sustainable for the income capacity
of the insurer22; or
ii. The insurer demonstrates that its capital position is well above the
supervisory target capital requirements after the call option is exercised23.
6) Any repayment of principal (e.g. through repurchase or redemption) requires
Superintendent approval and insurers must not assume or create market expectations that
such approval will be given.
7) Dividend / coupon discretion:
a. The insurer must have full discretion at all times to cancel distributions/
payments24.
b. Cancellation of discretionary payments must not be an event of default or credit
event.
c. Insurers must have full access to cancelled payments to meet obligations as they
fall due.
d. Cancellation of distributions/payments must not impose restrictions on the insurer
except in relation to distributions to common shareholders.

20
A step-up is defined as a call option combined with a pre-set increase in the initial credit spread of the instrument
at a future date over the initial dividend (or distribution) rate after taking into account any swap spread between
the original reference index and the new reference index. Conversion from a fixed rate to a floating rate (or vice
versa) in combination with a call option without any increase in credit spread does not constitute a step-up.
21
A call option combined with a requirement or an investor option to convert the instrument into common shares if
the call is not exercised constitutes an incentive to redeem.
22
Replacement issuances may be made concurrently when the instrument is called, but not subsequently.
23
For the definition of the Supervisory Target, refer to Guideline A-4 Regulatory Capital and Internal Capital
Targets.
24
A consequence of full discretion at all times to cancel distributions/payments is that “dividend pushers” are
prohibited. An instrument with a dividend pusher obliges the issuing insurer to make a dividend/coupon payment
on the instrument if it has made a payment on another (typically, more junior) capital instrument or share. This
obligation is inconsistent with the requirement for full discretion at all times. Furthermore, the term “cancel
distributions/payments” means to forever extinguish these payments. It does not permit features that require the
insurer to make distributions/payments in kind at any time.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 18
 8) Dividends/coupons must be paid out of distributable items.
9) The instrument cannot have a credit sensitive dividend feature, i.e., a dividend/coupon
that is reset periodically based in whole or in part on the insurer’s credit standing25.
10) The instrument cannot contribute to liabilities exceeding assets if such a balance sheet
test forms part of insolvency law.
11) Other than preferred shares, instruments included in Tier 1 Capital must be classified as
equity per relevant accounting standards.
12) Neither the insurer nor a related party over which the insurer exercises control or
significant influence can have purchased the instrument, nor can the insurer directly or
indirectly have funded the purchase of the instrument.
13) The instrument cannot have any features that hinder recapitalisation, such as provisions
that require the issuer to compensate investors if a new instrument is issued at a lower
price during a specified timeframe.
14) If the instrument is not issued out of an operating entity or the holding company in the
consolidated group (e.g. it is issued out of a special purpose vehicle (SPV)), proceeds
must be immediately available without limitation to an operating entity26 or the holding
company in the consolidated group in a form which meets or exceeds all of the other
criteria for inclusion in Tier 127.

Purchase for cancellation of Tier 1 Capital instruments Other than Common Shares is permitted
at any time with the prior approval of the Superintendent. For further clarity, a purchase for
cancellation does not constitute a call option as described in the above qualifying criteria.

Tax and regulatory event calls are permitted during an instrument’s life subject to the prior
approval of the Superintendent, and provided the insurer was not in a position to anticipate such
an event at the time of issuance. Where an insurer elects to include a regulatory event call in an
instrument, the regulatory event call date should be defined as “the date specified in a letter from
the Superintendent to the Company on which the instrument will no longer be recognized in full
as eligible Tier 1 capital of the insurer on a consolidated basis”.

Dividend stopper arrangements that stop payments on Common Shares or Tier 1 Capital
Instruments Other than Common Shares are permissible provided the stopper does not impede
the full discretion the insurer must have at all times to cancel distributions or dividends on the

25
Insurers may use a broad index as a reference rate in which the issuing insurer is a reference entity; however, the
reference rate should not exhibit significant correlation with the insurer’s credit standing. If an insurer plans to
issue a capital instrument where the margin is linked to a broad index in which the insurer is a reference entity,
the insurer should ensure that the dividend/coupon is not credit-sensitive.
26
An operating entity is an entity set up to conduct business with clients with the intention of earning a profit in its
own right.
27
For greater certainty, the only assets the SPV may hold are intercompany instruments issued by the insurer or a
related entity with terms and conditions that meet or exceed the Tier 1 criteria. Put differently, instruments issued
to the SPV have to fully meet or exceed all of the eligibility criteria for Tier 1 Capital as if the SPV itself was an
end investor – i.e., the insurer cannot issue a lower quality capital or senior debt instrument to an SPV and have
the SPV issue higher quality capital instruments to third-party investors so as to receive recognition as Tier 1
Capital.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 19
Tier 1 Capital Instrument Other than Common Shares, nor must it act in a way that could hinder
the recapitalization of the insurer pursuant to criterion # 13 above. For example, it would not be
permitted for a stopper on Tier 1 Capital Instruments Other than Common Shares to:
a. attempt to stop payment on another instrument where the payments on the other
instrument were not also fully discretionary;
b. prevent distributions to shareholders for a period that extends beyond the point in time
that dividends or distributions on the Tier 1 Capital Instruments Other than Common
Shares are resumed; or
c. impede the normal operation of the insurer or any restructuring activity, including
acquisitions or disposals.

A dividend stopper may also act to prohibit actions that are equivalent to the payment of a
dividend, such as the insurer undertaking discretionary share buybacks.

Where an amendment or variance of a Tier 1 instrument’s terms and conditions affects its
recognition as Available Capital, such an amendment or variance will only be permitted with the
prior approval of the Superintendent28.

An insurer is permitted to “re-open” offerings of capital instruments to increase the principal

amount of the original issuance subject to the following:
a. the insurer may not re-open an offering if the initial issue date for the offering was on or
before August 7, 2014 and the offering does not meet the criteria in section 2.1.1.2; and
b. call options may only be exercised, with the prior approval of the Superintendent, on or
after the fifth anniversary of the closing date of the latest re-opened tranche of securities.

Defeasance options may only be exercised on or after the fifth anniversary of the closing date
with the prior approval of the Superintendent.

2.1.1.3 Tier 1 Capital Instruments Other than Common Shares issued to a Parent

In addition to the qualifying criteria and minimum requirements specified in this Guideline,
Tier 1 Capital Instruments Other than Common Shares issued by an insurer to a parent, either
directly or indirectly, can be included in Available Capital subject to the insurer providing prior
written notification of the intercompany issuance to OSFI’s Capital Division, together with the
following:
1) a copy of the instrument’s terms and conditions;
2) the intended classification of the instrument for Available Capital purposes;
3) the rationale for not issuing common shares in lieu of the subject capital instrument;

28
Any modification of, addition to, or renewal of an instrument issued to a related party is subject to the legislative
requirement that transactions with a related party be at terms and conditions that are at least as favourable to the
insurer as market terms and conditions.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 20
 4) confirmation that the rate and terms of the instrument are at least as favourable to the
insurer as market terms and conditions;
5) confirmation that the failure to make dividend or interest payments, as applicable, on the
subject instrument would neither result in the parent, now or in the future, being unable to
meet its own debt servicing obligations, nor would it trigger cross-default clauses or
credit events under the terms of any agreements or contracts of either the insurer or the
parent.

2.1.1.4 Tier 1 Capital Instruments Other than Common Shares issued out of Branches
and Subsidiaries outside Canada

In addition to any other requirements prescribed in this Guideline, where an insurer wishes to
include, in its consolidated Available Capital, Tier 1 Capital Instruments Other than Common
Shares issued out of a branch or subsidiary of the insurer outside Canada, it should provide
OSFI’s Capital Division with the following documentation:
1) a copy of the instrument’s terms and conditions;
2) certification from a senior executive of the insurer, together with the insurer’s supporting
analysis, that confirms that the instrument meets the qualifying criteria for the tier of
Available Capital in which the insurer intends to include the instrument on a consolidated
basis; and
3) an undertaking whereby both the insurer and the subsidiary confirm that the instrument
will not be redeemed, purchased for cancellation, or amended without the prior approval
of the Superintendent. Such an undertaking will not be required where the prior approval
of the Superintendent is incorporated into the terms and conditions of the instrument.

2.1.1.5 Consolidated Subsidiaries having Tier 1 Third Party Investors / Non-Controlling

Interests
Both:
i. Common Shares, and Tier 1 Capital Instruments other than Common Shares, issued by a
consolidated subsidiary of the insurer and held by third party investors, and
ii. Tier 1 elements, other than capital instruments, attributable to non-controlling interests29
are subject to limited recognition in the consolidated Tier 1 capital of the parent insurer30.

Tier 1 capital instruments issued by a subsidiary and held by third party investors are included in
consolidated Tier 1 capital if:

29
Tier 1 elements, other than capital instruments, attributable to non-controlling interests associated with a
consolidated subsidiary is the amount of Tier 1 elements of non-controlling interest related to the subsidiary that
meet Tier 1 eligibility criteria and are reported as equity on the balance sheet of an insurer, less any amount of
Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments issued by the subsidiary and held by third party investors included therein.
30
If an insurer’s consolidated financial statements include an unleveraged mutual fund entity that is not subject to
deduction from Available Capital, and a portion of the fund’s units are exempt from the requirements of section
5.4, all non-controlling interests in the mutual fund entity should be excluded from the insurer’s Available
Capital.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 21
 1) They are issued for the funding of the parent insurer and meet all of the following
criteria:
a) The subsidiary uses the proceeds of the issue to purchase a similar instrument
from the parent insurer that meets the criteria in section 2.1.1.1, or sections 2.1.1.2
to 2.1.1.4;
b) The terms and conditions of the issue, as well as the intercompany transfer, place
the investors in the same position as if the instrument were issued by the parent
insurer; and
c) The instrument held by third party investors is not effectively secured by other
assets, such as cash, held by the subsidiary.
or:

2) They were issued prior to September 13, 2016 and qualify for recognition in consolidated
Available Capital under section 2.4.2.

Tier 1 capital instruments issued by a subsidiary and held by third party investors that do not meet
the above criteria, and Tier 1 elements, other than capital instruments, attributable to non-
controlling interests, may be included in the consolidated Tier 1 capital of the parent insurer
subject to the following Third Party Share limit:

Third Party Share Percentage

× (Marginal capital requirement for the subsidiary
+ Total deductions from the subsidiary’s Available Capital)

where:

1. Third Party Share Percentage is equal to the total amount of all Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital
instruments issued by a subsidiary and held by third party investors that do not meet the
above criteria, plus Tier 1 elements, other than capital instruments, attributable to non-
controlling interests, divided by the sum of Available Capital and the Surplus Allowance
of the subsidiary.
2. Marginal capital requirement for the subsidiary31 is equal to:
a) the difference between the Base Solvency Buffer (q.v. section 11.3) of the insurer,
and the Base Solvency Buffer of the insurer excluding the subsidiary, with both
requirements calculated net of all reinsurance, if the sum of Tier 1 and Tier 2
capital instruments issued by a subsidiary and held by third parties and of Tier 1
elements, other than capital instruments, attributable to non-controlling interests is
equal to or greater than 1% of Gross Tier 1, or
b) the capital requirement of the subsidiary calculated based on local regulatory
requirements at the equivalent local level of the LICAT supervisory target,32 if the
sum of Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments issued by a subsidiary and held by

31
An approximation may be used under section 1.4.5.
32
Insurers should contact OSFI to determine the equivalence for a subsidiary’s local jurisdiction if that jurisdiction
has not established a CTE99 or Var99.5 supervisory target level of confidence measure.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 22
 third parties and Tier 1 elements, other than capital instruments, attributable to
non-controlling interests is less than 1% of Gross Tier 1.

2.1.2. Deductions from Gross Tier 1 Capital

The items below are deducted from Gross Tier 1 to determine Net Tier 1. Credit risk factors are
not applied to items that are deducted from Gross Tier 1.

2.1.2.1. Goodwill and other intangible assets

Goodwill related to consolidated subsidiaries33 and goodwill included in the carrying amount of
equity accounted substantial investments34 is deducted from Gross Tier 1. The amount deducted
is net of any associated deferred tax liabilities (DTLs) that would be extinguished if the goodwill
were to become impaired or otherwise derecognized.

Additionally, all other intangible assets (including software intangibles) are deducted from Gross
Tier 1, including intangible assets related to consolidated subsidiaries and intangible assets
included in the carrying amount of equity-accounted substantial investments. The amount
deducted is net of any associated DTLs that would be extinguished if the intangible assets were
to become impaired or otherwise derecognized.

2.1.2.2. Investments in own Tier 1 Capital

An insurer’s investments in its own common shares (e.g. treasury stock) and its own Tier 1
Capital Instruments other than Common Shares, whether held directly or indirectly, are deducted
from Gross Tier 1 unless they are already derecognized under IFRS.

In addition, any Tier 1 capital instrument that the insurer could be contractually obliged to
purchase is deducted from Gross Tier 1.

2.1.2.3. Reciprocal Cross Holdings of Tier 1 Capital of banking, insurance and financial
entities
Reciprocal cross holdings in Tier 1 capital instruments (e.g. Insurer A holds investments in
Tier 1 capital instruments of Insurer B, and in return, Insurer B holds investments in Tier 1
capital instruments of Insurer A), whether arranged directly or indirectly, that are designed to
artificially inflate the capital position of insurers are deducted from Gross Tier 1.

2.1.2.4. Net Defined Benefit Pension Plan Assets

Each net defined benefit pension plan asset (DB pension plan), inclusive of the impact of any
asset ceiling limitation, is deducted from Gross Tier 1, net of any associated DTLs that would be
extinguished if the asset were to become impaired or derecognized35.

33
The amounts of goodwill and other intangible assets relating to controlled investments in non-life financial
corporations that are deconsolidated per section 1.3 and then deducted from Gross Tier 1 are included in the
equity-accounted amount of the investment on the balance sheet, and are already included in the deduction for
non-life financial corporations. These amounts are therefore excluded from this deduction.
34
As defined in section 10 of the Insurance Companies Act.
35
DB pension plans of controlled investments in non-life financial corporations that are deconsolidated per section

Life A LICAT
October 2018 23
An insurer may reduce this deduction by the amount of available refunds of surplus assets in the
plan to which the insurer has unrestricted and unfettered access, provided it obtains prior written
OSFI supervisory approval36.

2.1.2.5. Deferred tax assets

The regulatory adjustments described in this section are based on non-discounted deferred tax
amounts as reported on the insurer’s balance sheet, and on the deferred tax position of each legal
entity that is consolidated for LICAT purposes.

Deferred tax assets (DTA) must be classified as either DTA arising from temporary differences
(DTA Temporary) or DTA other than those arising from temporary differences (DTA Non-
Temporary). For example, DTA relating to tax credits and DTA relating to carry forwards of
operating losses are classified as DTA Non-Temporary.

No regulatory adjustments are required under this section for legal entities in a net Deferred Tax
Liability (DTL) position. Regulatory adjustments associated with legal entities in net DTA
positions are set out in sections 2.1.2.5.1 and 2.1.2.5.2 below.

Eligible DTL, in this section, are limited to those permitted to offset DTA for balance sheet
reporting purposes at the legal entity level, excluding DTL that have been netted against the
deductions for goodwill, intangible assets and defined benefit pension plan assets. Eligible DTL
are allocated on a pro rata basis between DTA Temporary and DTA Non-Temporary.

2.1.2.5.1 DTA – other than those arising from temporary differences

Insurers should deduct 100% of DTA Non-Temporary, net of eligible DTL, from Gross Tier 1.

2.1.2.5.2 DTA – arising from temporary differences

The amount that insurers should deduct from Gross Tier 1 is:

max[𝐷𝑇𝐴𝑇net − 0.1 × (𝑇1gross − 𝑇1deductions), 0]

0.9

where:

 DTATnet is equal to DTA Temporary net of eligible DTL

 T1gross is equal to Gross Tier 1
 T1deductions is equal to the sum of all deductions from Gross Tier 1 in sections 2.1.2.1 to
2.1.2.5.1, and sections 2.1.2.6 to 2.1.2.10.

1.3 and then deducted from Gross Tier 1 are included in the equity-accounted amount of the investment on the
balance sheet, and are already deducted along with the non-life financial corporation. These DB pension plans
are therefore excluded from this deduction.
36
To obtain supervisory approval, an insurer must demonstrate to the Superintendent’s satisfaction that it has clear
entitlement to the surplus and that it has unrestricted and unfettered access to the surplus pension assets.
Evidence required may include, among other things, an acceptable independent legal opinion and the prior
Life A LICAT
October 2018 24
authorization from the pension plan members and the pension regulator.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 25
DTA Temporary included in Available Capital is limited to 10% of Net Tier 1, and is subject to a
25% credit risk factor (q.v. section 3.1.8).

Example: Deferred Tax Assets

The following is an example for a single legal entity reporting LICAT results:

Item Amount
Gross Tier 1 4,075
All deductions from Gross Tier 1 except 2,000
those relating to both types of DTA
DTA Non-Temporary 100
DTA Temporary 300
DTL associated with goodwill 50
DTL other 100
Net DTA position (100 + 300 − 50 − 100) = 250
DTL allocated to DTA Non-Temporary 100 × 100 = 25 (excludes DTL associated with goodwill)
400
DTL allocated to DTA Temporary 300 × 100 = 75 (excludes DTL associated with goodwill)
400
DTA Non-Temporary, net of eligible DTL 100 − 25 = 75
DTA Temporary, net of eligible DTL 300 − 75 = 225
Gross Tier 1, net of 2.1.2.1 to 2.1.2.5.1
4,075 − 2,000 − 75 = 2,000
and 2.1.2.6 to 2.1.2.10 deductions
DTA deducted from Gross Tier 1 1) 𝟕𝟓 (DTA Non-Temporary)
225 − (10% × 2 000)
2) = 28 (DTA Temporary)
0.9
Validation: Amount included in 2,000 − 28 = 1,972
Available Capital does not exceed 10% 197 / 1,972 = 10%
of Tier 1
Capital charged on DTA Temporary
(250 + 50) − (75 + 28) = 197 × 25% = 49
included in Available Capital

Life A LICAT
October 2018 26
 2.1.2.6. Encumbered Assets
Encumbered assets in excess of the allowable amount are deducted from Gross Tier 137. The
allowable amount, which is calculated for each pool of encumbered assets and the liabilities they
secure38, is equal to the sum of:
1) the value of on-balance sheet liabilities secured by the encumbered assets; and
2) the marginal capital requirement31, floored at zero, for the encumbered assets and the
liabilities they secure.

The deduction is reduced by the following amount:

3) 50% of the calculated deduction amount relating to real property pledged to secure
mortgage borrowing activities.
For the purpose of calculating the allowable amount, the marginal capital requirement is equal to
the difference between the Base Solvency Buffer (q.v. section 11.3) of the insurer, and the Base
Solvency Buffer of the insurer excluding the encumbered assets and the liabilities they secure39,
where both requirements are calculated net of all reinsurance.

The balance sheet amount of liabilities secured by encumbered assets not in excess of the
allowable amount and not deducted from Available Capital is subject to section 3.5 of this
guideline.

The following encumbered assets are exempt and should not be included in the calculation of the
encumbered assets deduction above:
1) assets relating to off-balance sheet securities financing transactions (i.e., securities
lending and borrowing, repos and reverse repos) that do not give rise to any liability on
the balance sheet; and
2) assets pledged to secure centrally cleared and non-centrally cleared derivatives liabilities.

Encumbered assets relating to off-balance sheet securities financing transactions that are exempt
under 1) above are subject to section 3.5 of this guideline.

2.1.2.7. Investments in Tier 1 Capital of controlled non-life financial corporations

Investments in financial instruments of controlled (as defined in the Insurance Companies Act)
non-life solvency regulated financial corporations are deducted40 from the tier of capital for

37
Encumbered assets are still subject to the requirements for credit and market risk in chapters 3 and 5, as these
requirements offset the deduction from Gross Tier 1.
38
The defining characteristic of a pool is that any asset in the pool is available to pay any of the corresponding
liabilities.
39
Encumbered assets of controlled investments in non-life financial corporations that are deconsolidated per
section 1.3 and then deducted from Gross Tier 1 are included in the equity-accounted amount of the investment
on the balance sheet and are already deducted along with the non-life financial corporations. These encumbered
asset amounts are therefore excluded from this deduction.
40
Investments in non-life solvency regulated corporations are deducted where an insurer cannot carry on the
business directly. Non-life solvency regulated financial corporations include those that are engaged in the

Life A LICAT
October 2018 27
which the instrument would qualify if it were issued by the insurer itself. Where an instrument
issued by a controlled non-life financial corporation meets the criteria outlined in section 2.1.1.1
or 2.1.1.2, it is deducted from Gross Tier 1. If the instrument in which the insurer has invested
does not meet the qualifying criteria for either Tier 1 or Tier 2, the instrument is deducted from
Gross Tier 1.

The amount deducted is the carrying amount of the deconsolidated subsidiary reported as an
investment using the equity method of accounting, as specified in section 1.3. The deduction of
this amount therefore includes the goodwill, all other intangible assets, net DB pension plan
assets, DTAs, encumbered assets, AOCI and all other net assets of the deconsolidated subsidiary,
as the de-consolidation should reverse these amounts prior to their respective Gross Tier 1
deductions.

Where the insurer provides a facility such as a letter of credit or guarantee that is treated as
capital41 by the controlled non-life financial corporation, the full amount of the facility is
deducted from Gross Tier 142.

A credit risk factor will not be applied to equity investments, letters of credit and guarantees or
other facilities provided to controlled non-life financial corporations where these have been
deducted from Available Capital. Where letters of credit or guarantees are provided to controlled
non-life financial corporations and are not deducted from Available Capital, they are treated as
direct credit substitutes in accordance with this guideline (refer to Chapters 3 and 4).

2.1.2.8. Cash surrender value deficiencies calculated on an aggregate grouped basis

Cash surrender value (CSV) deficiencies are calculated net of all reinsurance on an aggregate
basis within groupings by product type. The deduction from Gross Tier 1 is the sum of the
positive deficiencies taken over each grouping of policies, where the positive deficiency for a
group is the higher of the group’s aggregate deficiency or zero. All of the policies in an
aggregated group must be within the same line of business (as defined in the LIFE return), must
be contractually similar, and must eventually offer a meaningful cash surrender value. Policies
that never pay CSVs may not be used to offset deficiencies in policies that do. The CSVs used in
the calculation of deficiencies should be net of all surrender charges, market value adjustments
and other deductions that an insurer could reasonably expect to apply in the event the policy
were to be surrendered. The policy liabilities used in calculating CSV deficiencies include future
income tax cash flows under valuation assumptions as required by the Standards of Practice of
the Canadian Institute of Actuaries, prior to any accounting adjustment for balance sheet
presentation.

business of banking, trust and loan business, or the business of co-operative credit societies. They also include
corporations that are primarily engaged in the business of dealing in securities, including portfolio management
and investment counselling. Investments in corporations that are engaged exclusively in property and casualty
insurance business are deducted, but investments in composite insurance subsidiaries (q.v. section 1.3) are not.
41
That is, the facility is available for drawdown in the event of impairment of the non-life corporation's capital and
is subordinated to the non-life financial corporation's customer obligations.
42
Although the facility has not been called upon, if it were drawn, the resources would not be available to cover the
capital requirements of the insurer.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 28
 2.1.2.9. Negative reserves calculated on a policy-by-policy basis
Insurers are required to calculate negative reserves on a policy-by-policy basis net of all
reinsurance43. Policy-by-policy negative reserves are adjusted by a percentage factor and then
reduced for amounts that may be recovered on surrender. The deduction from Gross Tier 1 or the
amount included in Assets Required is the total amount, calculated policy-by-policy, of adjusted
negative reserves net of a reduction for amounts recoverable on surrender, with the net amount
for each policy subject to a minimum of zero. Policy liabilities used in calculating policy-by-
policy negative reserves include future income tax cash flows under valuation assumptions as
required under CALM, prior to any accounting adjustment for balance sheet presentation of
deferred taxes.

Policy-by-policy negative reserves should be calculated for all products and lines of business,
including group and accident and sickness business. The calculation should include:
1) the negative reserve for each certificate under group policies for which premiums or
reserves are based on individual insured characteristics, such as group association or
creditor insurance;
2) the excess, if positive, of the deferred acquisition costs for any policy over its termination
or surrender charges; and
3) negative group refund provisions where recovery is not completely assured, calculated
policy by policy.

The negative reserve for a policy may be adjusted by multiplying it by a factor of 70%, if it
arises from either of the following:
a. active life reserves for individually underwritten Canadian health business, or
b. Individually underwritten Canadian life business.

No adjustment is made to negative reserves relating to any other type of business. The adjusted
negative reserve for a policy may then be further reduced, to a minimum of zero, by the sum of
the following amounts recoverable on surrender:
1) 85% of the net commission chargeback for the policy;
2) The product of 𝛾, 1 + 𝑓, and 70% of the policy’s marginal insurance risk requirement,
where 𝛾 is the scalar defined in section 1.1.5, and 𝑓 is the operational risk factor applied
to required capital for insurance risk in section 8.2.3; and
3) a specified amount if the policy is part of a yearly renewable term (YRT) reinsurance
treaty.

43
Negative reserves include those that an insurer has assumed under modified coinsurance arrangements, and
exclude those that the insurer has ceded under registered modified coinsurance arrangements.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 29
However, the maximum total amount by which the deduction from Gross Tier 1 of adjusted
policy-by-policy negative reserves for a Canadian insurer may be reduced for amounts
recoverable on surrender is limited to 25% of:
1) Gross Tier 1; less
2) All deductions from Gross Tier 1 used to determine Net Tier 1 as specified in section
2.1.2, excluding negative reserves; less
3) Total adjusted policy-by-policy negative reserves calculated without any reduction for
amounts recoverable on surrender.

For a foreign insurer, the maximum amount by which adjusted policy-by-policy negative
reserves included in Assets Required may be reduced for amounts recoverable on surrender is
limited to 25% of:
1) admitted assets vested in trust; plus
2) investment income due and accrued on admitted vested assets; less
3) the portion of Deductions/Adjustments (q.v. section 12.2.4) that is subtracted directly in
the determination of Assets Available (q.v. section 12.2.1); less
4) Assets Required excluding negative reserves; less
5) total adjusted policy-by-policy negative reserves calculated without any reduction for
amounts recoverable on surrender.

In order to use any amount recoverable on surrender to offset a policy’s adjusted negative
reserve, the amount must be calculated for that policy alone. The following provides additional
detail on the calculation of each amount.

2.1.2.9.1. Commission chargebacks

The net commission chargeback for a policy is equal to 𝑆 × 𝐶, where S is the factor used to
adjust the policy negative reserve (either 70% or 100%), and C is the policy’s commission
chargeback that the insurer could reasonably expect to recover in the event the policy were to
lapse. The chargeback amount used should be based on the policy’s chargeback schedule, and
should be calculated net of all ceded reinsurance allowances and commissions.

2.1.2.9.2. Marginal insurance risk requirements

The marginal insurance risk requirement for a policy is equal to the sum of the marginal policy
requirements for each of the seven insurance risks as specified below. In determining the offset
to a policy’s adjusted negative reserve, the policy’s marginal insurance risk requirement should
be reduced by the amount of any credits that an insurer has taken on account of policyholder
deposits and group business adjustments (qq.v. sections 6.8.2 and 6.8.3). Each marginal policy
requirement should be calculated net of all reinsurance. All marginal policy requirements for
qualifying participating and adjustable products should be multiplied by 30%. The adjusted
negative reserve for a policy may not be offset by any marginal insurance risk component if an
insurer has taken a reduction in required capital on account of a reinsurance claims fluctuation
reserve covering the policy.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 30
For a policy within a specific geographic region, the marginal policy requirement for mortality
risk is equal to:
𝑟𝑐2 + 2 × 𝑟𝑐𝑐𝑎𝑡 × 𝑅𝐶𝑐𝑎𝑡 − 𝑟𝑐2
𝑣𝑜𝑙 𝑐𝑎𝑡
0.4 × ( + 𝑟𝑐 𝑙 + 𝑟𝑐𝑡)
√𝑅𝐶2 + 𝑅𝐶2
𝑣𝑜𝑙 𝑐𝑎𝑡
where31:

 rcvol is the mortality volatility risk component for the policy

 rccat is the mortality catastrophe risk component for the policy
 RCvol is the mortality volatility risk component for all business in the policy’s
geographic region
 RCcat is the mortality catastrophe risk component for all business in the policy’s
geographic region
 rcl is the policy’s level component for mortality risk
 rct is the policy’s trend component for mortality risk

The marginal policy requirement for expense risk is equal to 40% of the policy’s total
requirement for the risk. For all other insurance risks, the marginal policy requirement is equal
to:
2 × 𝑟𝑐𝑣𝑜𝑙 × 𝑅𝐶𝑣𝑜𝑙 + 2 × 𝑟𝑐𝑐𝑎𝑡 × 𝑅𝐶𝑐𝑎𝑡 − 𝑟𝑐2 − 𝑟𝑐2
𝑣𝑜𝑙 𝑐𝑎𝑡
0.4 × ( + 𝑟𝑐 𝑙 + 𝑟𝑐𝑡)
√𝑅𝐶2 + 𝑅𝐶2
𝑣𝑜𝑙 𝑐𝑎𝑡
where31:

 rcvol is the volatility component of the particular insurance risk for the policy (multiplied
by the statistical fluctuation factor of the policy’s geographic region if applicable)
 rccat is the catastrophe component of the particular insurance risk for the policy
 RCvol is the volatility component of the particular insurance risk for all business in the
policy’s geographic region
 RCcat is the catastrophe component of the particular insurance risk for all business in the
geographic region
 rcl is the policy’s level component for the particular insurance risk, multiplied by the
statistical fluctuation factor of the policy’s geographic region if applicable
 rct is the policy’s trend component for the particular insurance risk

2.1.2.9.3. Policies assumed under YRT treaties

If a policy has been assumed under an eligible YRT reinsurance treaty (defined as a treaty that
Life A LICAT
October 2018 31
has fully guaranteed premiums and does not provide for profit sharing), the adjustment that may
be used to reduce the policy’s negative reserve is:

Life A LICAT
October 2018 32
  A B 
NR  min , 0.25 

 
 A 


where:
 NR is the policy’s adjusted negative reserve;
 A is the total of adjusted negative reserves for all policies within the insurer’s eligible
YRT reinsurance treaties calculated policy-by-policy; and
 B is the total of adjusted negative reserves for all of the insurer’s eligible YRT
reinsurance treaties, calculated treaty by treaty.

2.1.2.10. Other items deducted from Gross Tier 1

Insurers are also required to deduct the following from Gross Tier 1:
1) all requirements for liabilities ceded under unregistered reinsurance arrangements, net
of any applicable credits (qq.v. sections 10.3 and 10.4);
2) purchased options for which the insurer elects deduction under section 5.2.3.3.

2.1.3 Net Tier 1 and Tier 1

Net Tier 1 is defined as Gross Tier 1 less deductions from Gross Tier 1.

An insurer that does not have sufficient Gross Tier 2 Capital from which to make required
deductions from Gross Tier 2 Capital must deduct the shortfall from Net Tier 1 Capital.
Consequently, Tier 1 capital is defined as Net Tier 1 Capital less deductions from Gross Tier 2
Capital that are in excess of Gross Tier 2 Capital (q.v. section 2.2).

2.2. Tier 2
2.2.1 Gross Tier 2

Gross Tier 2 is equal to the sum of the following:

1) Tier 2 Capital instruments issued by the insurer, other than those issued by consolidated
subsidiaries and held by third party investors:
a) that meet the qualifying criteria specified in sections 2.2.1.1 to 2.2.1.3; or
b) that were issued prior to August 7, 2014, do not meet the criteria specified in
sections 2.2.1.1 to 2.2.1.3, but meet the Tier 2 criteria specified in Appendix 2-B
of the OSFI guideline Minimum Continuing Capital and Surplus Requirements
effective January 1, 2016 (these instruments are subject to transition measures in
section 2.4.1);
2) Instruments issued by consolidated subsidiaries of the insurer and held by third party
investors:

Life A LICAT
October 2018 33
 a) that meet the criteria for classification as Tier 2, as specified in sections 2.2.1.1 to
2.2.1.3 (these instruments are subject to the conditions in section 2.2.1.4 and the
transition measures in section 2.4.2); or
b) that were issued prior to August 7, 2014, do not meet the criteria specified in
sections 2.2.1.1 to 2.2.1.3, but meet the Tier 2 criteria specified in Appendix 2-B
of the OSFI guideline Minimum Continuing Capital and Surplus Requirements
effective January 1, 2016 (these instruments are subject to the transition measures
in sections 2.4.1 and 2.4.2);
3) Tier 2 capital elements other than capital instruments, per section 2.2.1.5.

2.2.1.1 Qualifying Criteria for Tier 2 Capital Instruments

Instruments qualify as Tier 2 if all of the following criteria are met:18
1) The instrument is issued and paid-in in cash or, with the prior approval of the
Superintendent, in property.
2) The instrument is subordinated to policyholders and general creditors of the insurer.
3) The instrument is neither secured nor covered by a guarantee of the issuer or related
entity or other arrangement that legally or economically enhances the seniority of the
claim vis-à-vis the insurer’s policyholders and/or general creditors.
4) Maturity:
a. At issuance, the minimum original maturity is at least five years.
b. Recognition in Available Capital in the remaining five years before maturity must
be amortized on a straight line basis.
c. There are no step-ups20 or other incentives to redeem.
5) The instrument may be callable at the initiative of the issuer only after a minimum of five
years:
a. To exercise a call option an insurer must receive the prior approval of the
Superintendent; and
b. An insurer must not do anything that creates an expectation that the call will be
exercised44; and
c. An insurer must not exercise the call unless:
i. It replaces the called instrument with capital of the same or better quality,
including through an increase in retained earnings, and the replacement of
this capital is done at conditions which are sustainable for the income
capacity of the insurer22; or
ii. The insurer demonstrates that its capital position is well above the
supervisory target capital requirements after the call option is exercised23.

44
An option to call the instrument after five years but prior to the start of the amortization period will not be
viewed as an incentive to redeem as long as the insurer does not act in any way to create an expectation that the
call will be exercised at this point.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 34
 6) The investor must have no rights to accelerate the repayment of future scheduled
principal or interest payments, except in bankruptcy, insolvency, wind-up or liquidation.
7) The instrument cannot have a credit sensitive dividend feature; that is, a dividend or
coupon that is reset periodically based in whole or in part on the insurer’s credit
standing25.
8) Neither the insurer nor a related party over which the insurer exercises control or
significant influence can have purchased the instrument, nor can the insurer directly or
indirectly have funded the purchase of the instrument.
9) If the instrument is not issued out of an operating entity or the holding company in the
consolidated group (e.g. it is issued out of an SPV), proceeds must be immediately
available without limitation to an operating entity26 or the holding company in the
consolidated group in a form which meets or exceeds all of the other criteria for inclusion
in Tier 245.

Tier 2 capital instruments must not contain restrictive covenants or default clauses that would
allow the holder to trigger acceleration of repayment in circumstances other than the liquidation,
insolvency, bankruptcy or winding-up of the issuer.

Purchase for cancellation of Tier 2 capital instruments is permitted at any time with the prior
approval of the Superintendent. For further clarity, a purchase for cancellation does not
constitute a call option as described in the above Tier 2 qualifying criteria.

Tax and regulatory event calls are permitted during an instrument’s life subject to the prior
approval of the Superintendent, and provided the insurer was not in a position to anticipate such
an event at the time of issuance. Where an insurer elects to include a regulatory event call in an
instrument, the regulatory event call date should be defined as “the date specified in a letter from
the Superintendent to the Company on which the instrument will no longer be recognized in full
as eligible Tier 2 capital of the insurer or included as risk-based Total Available Capital on a
consolidated basis”.

Where an amendment or variance of a Tier 2 instrument’s terms and conditions affects its
recognition as Available Capital, such an amendment or variance will only be permitted with the
prior approval of the Superintendent28.

An insurer is permitted to “re-open” offerings of capital instruments to increase the principal

amount of the original issuance subject to the following:
1) the insurer may not re-open an offering if the initial issue date for the offering was on or
before August 7, 2014 and the offering does not meet the criteria in section 2.2.1.1; and
2) call options may only be exercised, with the prior approval of the Superintendent, on or
after the fifth anniversary of the closing date of the latest re-opened tranche of securities.
45
For greater certainty, the only assets the SPV may hold are intercompany instruments issued by the insurer or a
related entity with terms and conditions that meet or exceed the Tier 2 qualifying criteria. Put differently,
instruments issued to the SPV have to fully meet or exceed all of the eligibility criteria for Tier 2 capital as if the
SPV itself was an end investor – i.e., the insurer cannot issue a senior debt instrument to an SPV and have the
SPV issue qualifying capital instruments to third-party investors so as to receive recognition as Tier 2 capital.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 35
Defeasance options may only be exercised on or after the fifth anniversary of the closing date
with the prior approval of the Superintendent.

Debt obligations, as defined in the Insurance Companies Act, made by life insurers that do not
qualify as Available Capital by virtue of their characteristics are subject to an interest rate risk
charge (q.v. section 5.1).

2.2.1.2 Tier 2 Capital Instruments Issued to a Parent

In addition to the qualifying criteria and minimum requirements specified in this Guideline,
Tier 2 capital instruments issued by an insurer to a parent, either directly or indirectly, can be
included in Tier 2 subject to the insurer providing prior written notification of the intercompany
issuance to OSFI's Capital Division, together with the following:
1) a copy of the instrument’s term and conditions;
2) the intended classification of the instrument for Available Capital purposes;
3) the rationale for not issuing common shares in lieu of the subject capital instrument;
4) confirmation that the rate and terms of the instrument are at least as favourable to the
insurer as market terms and conditions;
5) confirmation that the failure to make dividend or interest payments, as applicable, on the
subject instrument would neither result in the parent, now or in the future, being unable to
meet its own debt servicing obligations, nor would it trigger cross-default clauses or
credit events under the terms of any agreements or contracts of either the insurer or the
parent.

2.2.1.3. Tier 2 Capital Instruments Issued out of Branches and Subsidiaries outside
Canada
Debt instruments issued out of an insurer’s branches or subsidiaries outside Canada must be
governed by Canadian law. However, the Superintendent may waive this requirement where the
insurer can demonstrate that an equivalent degree of subordination can be achieved as under
Canadian law. Instruments issued prior to year-end 1994 are not subject to this requirement.

In addition to any other requirements prescribed in this Guideline, where an insurer wishes to
include, in its consolidated available capital, a capital instrument issued out of a branch or a
subsidiary of the insurer outside Canada, it should provide OSFI’s Capital Division with the
following documentation:
1) a copy of the instrument’s term and conditions;
2) certification from a senior executive of the insurer, together with the insurer’s supporting
analysis, that confirms that the instrument meets the qualifying criteria for the tier of
Available Capital in which the insurer intends to include the instrument on a consolidated
basis; and
3) an undertaking whereby both the insurer and the subsidiary confirm that the instrument
will not be redeemed, purchased for cancellation, or amended without the prior approval

Life A LICAT
October 2018 36
 of the Superintendent. Such an undertaking will not be required where the prior approval
of the Superintendent is incorporated into the terms and conditions of the instrument.

2.2.1.4. Consolidated Subsidiaries having Tier 2 Third Party Investors

Tier 2 capital instruments issued by a consolidated subsidiary of the insurer and held by third
party investors may receive limited recognition in the consolidated Tier 2 capital of the parent
insurer.

Tier 2 capital instruments issued by a subsidiary and held by third party investors are included in
consolidated Tier 2 capital if:
1) They are issued for the funding of the parent insurer and meet all of the following
criteria:
a) The subsidiary uses the proceeds of the issue to purchase a similar instrument
from the parent insurer that meets the criteria in sections 2.2.1.1 to 2.2.1.3;
b) The terms and conditions of the issue, as well as the intercompany transfer, place
the investors in the same position as if the instrument were issued by the parent
insurer; and
c) The instrument held by third party investors is not effectively secured by other
assets, such as cash, held by the subsidiary.
or:

2) They were issued prior to September 13, 2016 and qualify for recognition in consolidated
Available Capital under section 2.4.2.

The amount of Tier 2 capital instruments issued by a subsidiary and held by third party investors
that do not meet the above criteria that may be included in the consolidated Tier 2 capital of the
parent insurer is equal to the lowest of:
a. The value of Tier 2 instruments issued by the subsidiary and held by third party investors
that do not meet the above criteria;
b. The difference between the Third Party Share limit calculated in section 2.1.1.5, and the
amount of capital instruments and Tier 1 elements, other than capital instruments,
attributable to non-controlling interests, included in consolidated Tier 1 capital that are
issued by the subsidiary and held by third party investors; and
c. 50% of the Third Party Share limit calculated in section 2.1.1.5.

2.2.1.5. Tier 2 capital elements other than capital instruments

Tier 2 capital elements other than capital instruments include:
1) all amounts deducted from Gross Tier 1 for negative reserves, offsetting policy-by-policy
liabilities ceded under unregistered reinsurance arrangements, and aggregate negative
reserves ceded under unregistered reinsurance arrangements;
2) 75% of cash surrender value deficiencies deducted from Gross Tier 1;

Life A LICAT
October 2018 37
 3) 50% of the amount deducted from Gross Tier 1 (per section 2.1.2.4) on account of each
net DB pension plan asset
4) the adjustment amount to amortize the impact in the current period on Available Capital
on account of the net defined benefit pension plan liability (asset);
5) share premium resulting from the issuance of capital instruments included in Tier 2
capital46.

For those insurers that made a one-time election to amortize the impact on Available Capital on
account of the net DB pension plan liability (asset), the amounts subject to amortization in each
period include the change, in each period, of the:
a) accumulated net defined benefit pension plan OCI remeasurements included in Gross
Tier 1;
b) amount of the Pension Asset Deduction from Gross Tier 1 (section 2.1.2.4); and
c) Pension Asset Add-back to Tier 2.

The amount subject to amortization in each period is the sum of a), b) and c) above. The
amortization is made on a straight-line basis over the amortization period. The amortization period
is twelve quarters and begins in the current quarter. The election will be irrevocable and the insurer
will continue, in each quarter, to amortize the new impact on Available Capital in subsequent
periods. The adjustment amount is reflected in Tier 2.

2.2.2 Amortization of Tier 2 Capital Instruments

Tier 2 capital instruments are subject to straight-line amortization in the final five years prior to
maturity. As these instruments approach maturity, the outstanding balances are to be amortized
based on the following schedule:

Years to Maturity Included in Capital

5 years or more 100%

4 years and less than 5 years 80%
3 years and less than 4 years 60%
2 years and less than 3 years 40%
1 year and less than 2 years 20%
Less than 1 year 0%

Amortization should be computed at the end of each fiscal quarter based on the "years to
maturity" schedule (above). Thus amortization begins during the first quarter that ends within
five calendar years of maturity. For example, if an instrument matures on October 31, 2025, 20%
amortization of the issue occurs on November 1, 2020, and is reflected in the December 31, 2020

46
Share premium that is not eligible for inclusion in Tier 1 will only be permitted to be included in Tier 2 if the
shares giving rise to the share premium are permitted to be included in Tier 2.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 38
LICAT Quarterly Return and LICAT Annual Supplement. An additional 20% amortization is
reflected in each subsequent December 31 return.

2.2.3. Deductions from Gross Tier 2

The items below are deducted from Gross Tier 2. A credit risk factor is not applied to items that
are deducted from Gross Tier 2.

2.2.3.1 Investments in own Tier 2

An insurer’s investments in its own Tier 2 capital, whether held directly or indirectly, are
deducted from Gross Tier 2 unless they are already derecognized under IFRS.

In addition, any Tier 2 capital instrument that the insurer could be contractually obliged to
purchase is deducted from Gross Tier 2.

2.2.3.2 Investments in Tier 2 Capital of controlled non-life financial corporations

Investments in financial instruments of controlled (as defined in the Insurance Companies Act)
non-life solvency regulated financial corporations are deducted40 from the tier of capital for
which the instrument would qualify if it were issued by the insurer itself. Where an instrument
issued by a controlled non-life financial corporation meets the criteria outlined in section 2.2.1.1,
it is deducted from Gross Tier 2. If the instrument in which the insurer has invested does not
meet the qualifying criteria for Tier 2, the instrument is deducted from Gross Tier 1 (q.v. section
2.1.2.7).

A credit risk factor will not be applied to equity investments or other facilities provided to
controlled non-life financial corporations where these have been deducted from Available
Capital.

2.2.3.3 Reciprocal cross holdings in Tier 2 capital of banking, financial and insurance
entities
Reciprocal cross holdings in Tier 2 capital (e.g. Insurer A holds investments in Tier 2
instruments of Insurer B and, in return, Insurer B holds investments in Tier 2 instruments of
Insurer A), whether arranged directly or indirectly, that are designed to artificially inflate the
capital position of insurers are fully deducted from Gross Tier 2.

2.2.4. Net Tier 2 and Tier 2

Net Tier 2 is equal to Gross Tier 2 minus the deductions from Gross Tier 2 set out in section
2.2.3. However, Net Tier 2 capital may not be lower than zero. If the total of all Gross Tier 2
deductions exceeds Gross Tier 2, the excess is deducted from Net Tier 1 capital (q.v. section
2.1.3).

Since Tier 2 capital may not exceed Net Tier 1 capital, Tier 2 Capital is defined to be the lower
of Net Tier 2 or Net Tier 1.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 39
2.3. Capital Composition and Limitations
The following capital composition requirements and limitations apply to capital elements after
all specified deductions and adjustments. In addition, for purposes of calculating the limitations set
out below, Tier 1 Capital Instruments Other than Common Shares and Tier 2 instruments should
exclude instruments subject to transition set out in sections 2.4.1 and 2.4.2.

1. Common shareholders’ equity and policyholders’ equity (mutual companies) should be

the predominant form of an insurer’s Tier 1 capital. As a result, the aggregate of the
following should equal or exceed 75% of Net Tier 1 capital:
a) Common shares issued by the insurer that meet the criteria specified in section
2.1.1.1;
b) Instruments issued by consolidated subsidiaries of the insurer and held by third
party investors that meet the criteria for classification as Common Shares as
specified in section 2.1.1.1, subject to section 2.1.1.5;
c) Contributed Surplus:
i. Share premium resulting from the issuance of Tier 1 capital instruments
included within this limit;
ii. Other contributed surplus, resulting from sources other than profits (e.g.,
members’ contributions and initial funds for mutual companies and other
contributions by shareholders in excess of amounts allocated to share
capital for joint stock companies) excluding any share premium resulting
from the issuance of capital instruments not included within this limit;
d) Adjusted Retained Earnings;
e) Adjusted Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (AOCI);
f) Participating account;
g) Non-participating account (mutual companies);
h) Tier 1 elements, other than capital instruments, attributable to non-controlling
interests, subject to section 2.1.1.5.
2. An insurer’s Tier 2 capital (net of amortization) shall not exceed 100% of Net Tier 1
capital.
3. The amount of Tier 1 Capital Instruments Other than Common Shares recognized in Net
Tier 1 capital is limited to 25% of Net Tier 1. Tier 1 Capital Instruments Other than
Common Shares in excess of 25% of Net Tier 1 may be included in Tier 2 capital, subject
to the Tier 2 limit in the preceding item.

2.4. Transition
2.4.1 Instruments issued prior to August 7, 2014

Capital instruments issued prior to August 7, 2014 that do not meet the qualifying criteria specified
in sections 2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.2 to 2.1.1.4 and 2.2.1.1 to 2.2.1.3 but meet the Tier 1 or Tier 2 criteria

Life A LICAT
October 2018 40
specified in Appendix 2-B and Appendix 2-C of the OSFI guideline Minimum Continuing Capital
and Surplus Requirements effective January 1, 2016, will be treated as follows:
1) Instruments will continue to be recognized as Available Capital until the earlier of the
instrument’s first par call date or the effective date of any feature constituting an
incentive to redeem (i.e., the effective maturity date).
2) Regulatory event calls, if any, will not be permitted to be exercised until the end of the
recognition period for the instrument.
3) If a Tier 2 instrument has an effective maturity date within the recognition period and the
issuer elects not to exercise the call option despite the incentive to redeem, that
instrument will continue to be recognized as Available Capital, provided it meets the
qualifying criteria specified in sections 2.2.1.1 to 2.2.1.3.
4) Tier 2 amortization rules will continue to apply to Tier 2 instruments in their final 5 years
to maturity.
5) During the recognition period, SPVs associated with Tier 1 and Tier 2B innovative
instruments should continue to not, at any time, hold assets that materially exceed the
aggregate amount of the innovative instruments. For Asset-Based Structures, OSFI will
consider the excess to be material if it exceeds 25% of the innovative instrument(s) and,
for Loan-Based Structures, the excess will be considered to be material if it exceeds 3%
of the innovative instrument(s). Amounts in excess of these thresholds require
Superintendent approval.

The above provisions apply equally to instruments issued directly by insurers as well as those
issued by consolidated subsidiaries to third party investors.

2.4.2 Consolidated subsidiaries having third party investors

Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments issued by a subsidiary of the insurer and held by third party
investors:
1. prior to August 7, 2014 and that meet the Tier 1 or Tier 2 criteria specified in
Appendix 2-B and Appendix 2-C of the OSFI guideline Minimum Continuing Capital
and Surplus Requirements effective January 1, 2016, subject to the treatment outlined
in section 2.4.1; or
2. prior to September 13, 2016 and that meet the qualifying criteria specified in sections
2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.2 to 2.1.1.4 and 2.2.1.1 to 2.2.1.3
qualify for recognition in consolidated Available Capital, subject to the following conditions:
1. The instrument has not matured or been redeemed.
2. The instrument’s first par call date on or after September 13, 2016 has not passed.
3. For instruments that do not mature and that do not have par call dates, the reporting
date is prior to January 1, 2028.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 41
Appendix 2-A Information Requirements for Capital Confirmations
Given the potential impact of OSFI finding that a capital instrument does not meet certain criteria,
insurers are encouraged to seek confirmations of capital quality from OSFI prior to issuing
instruments. In conjunction with such requests, the institution is expected to provide the following
information to the Capital Division.
1. An indicative term sheet specifying indicative dates, rates and amounts and summarizing
key provisions should be provided in respect of all proposed instruments.
2. The draft and final terms and conditions of the proposed instrument supported by relevant
documents (e.g., Prospectus, Offering Memorandum, Debt Agreement, and Share Terms).
3. A copy of the institution’s current by-laws or other constating documents relevant to the
capital to be issued as well as any material agreements, including shareholders’
agreements, which may affect the capital quality of the instrument.
4. Where applicable, for all debt instruments only:
a) the draft and final Trust Indenture and supplemental indentures; and
b) the terms of any guarantee relating to the instrument.
5. Where the terms of the instrument include a redemption option or similar feature upon a
tax event, an external tax opinion confirming the availability of such deduction in respect
of interest or distributions payable on the instrument for income tax purposes47.
6. An accounting opinion describing the proposed treatment and disclosure of the Tier 1
Capital Instrument Other than Common Shares) or the Tier 2 capital instrument on the
institution’s financial statements48.
7. Where the initial interest or coupon rate payable on the instrument resets periodically or
the basis of the interest rate changes from fixed to floating (or vice versa) at a pre-
determined future date, calculations demonstrating that no incentive to redeem, or step-
up, will arise upon the change in the initial rate. Where applicable, a step-up calculation
should be provided according to the swap-spread methodology which confirms there is
no step-up upon the change in interest rate and supported by screenshots of the applicable
reference index rate(s).
8. Capital projections that demonstrate that the insurer will be in compliance with its
supervisory target capital ratios as well as the capital composition requirements specified
in section 2.3 at the end of the quarter in which the instrument is expected to be issued.
9. An assessment of the features of the proposed capital instrument against the minimum
criteria for inclusion as a Tier 1 Capital Instrument Other than Common Shares or Tier 2
capital, as applicable, specified in this Guideline. For greater certainty, this assessment
would only be required for an initial issuance or precedent and is not required for
subsequent issuances provided the terms of the instrument are not materially altered.

47
OSFI may require a Canada Revenue Agency advance tax ruling to confirm the tax opinion if the tax
consequences are subject to material uncertainty.
48
OSFI may require the accounting opinion to be an external opinion of a firm acceptable to OSFI if the
accounting consequences are subject to material uncertainty.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 42
10. A written attestation from a senior officer of the insurer confirming that the insurer has
not provided financing to any person for the express purpose of investing in the proposed
capital instrument.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 43
Chapter 3 Credit Risk – On-Balance Sheet Items
Credit risk is the risk of loss arising from the potential default of parties having a financial
obligation to the insurer. Required capital takes account of the risk of actual default as well the risk
of an insurer incurring losses due to deterioration in an obligor’s creditworthiness. The financial
obligations to which credit risk factors apply include loans, debt instruments, reinsurance assets
and receivables, derivatives, amounts due from policyholders, agents and brokers and other assets.

Required capital for on-balance sheet assets is calculated by applying credit risk factors to the
balance sheet values of these assets. The same factors apply to assets backing qualifying
participating and adjustable products. A reduction in required capital for the potential risk-
mitigating effect of dividend reductions or contractual adjustability is calculated separately for
participating and adjustable products (q.v. Chapter 9). Collateral, guarantees, and credit
derivatives may be used to reduce capital required for credit risk49. A credit risk factor of zero is
applied to assets deducted from Available Capital. Investment income due and accrued is
reported with, and receives the same factor as, the asset to which it relates.

Additionally, the credit risk factor relating to certain types of asset risks is calculated using
techniques that are different from applying the regular factors:
1) Required capital for asset backed securities is described in section 3.4;
2) Required capital for repurchase, reverse repurchase and securities lending agreements is
described in section 3.5;
3) Assets backing index-linked products do not receive credit risk factors. They are instead
considered as part of the correlation calculation described in section 5.5;
4) Assets held in segregated funds by an insurer’s policyholders are not subject to the
requirements of this chapter50; and
5) Assets held in composite insurance subsidiaries may be subject to the credit risk
requirements of either the LICAT guideline or the OSFI guideline: Minimum Capital Test
(MCT).51
The calculation of required capital for off-balance sheet items is described in Chapter 4.

49
The requirement for credit risk may also be reduced under certain registered reinsurance arrangements, as
described in section 10.5.3.
50
Refer to section 5.4 for the treatment of assets within consolidated mutual fund entities.
51
Assets that have been specifically designated as supporting a composite subsidiary’s life insurance liabilities
under CALM are subject to the asset risk requirements of the LICAT Guideline. The capital requirements for all
other assets in the subsidiary are determined using either the LICAT or the MCT Guideline exclusively,
depending on whether the subsidiary has a larger insurance risk capital requirement for life business under
LICAT, or for P&C business under MCT. An insurer should use the same guideline from year to year until the
relative portion of that guideline’s insurance risk requirement falls below 40%. The capital requirements for
assets, based on either the LICAT or the MCT Guideline, are included within A in the calculation of the
diversified risk requirement (q.v. section 11.2.2). Asset risk requirements based on MCT are at the MCT target
level, and are not divided by 1.5.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 44
3.1. Credit Risk Required Capital for On-balance Sheet Assets
For the purpose of calculating the credit risk charge, balance sheet assets are valued at their
balance sheet carrying amounts.

3.1.1. Use of ratings

Many of the factors in this chapter depend on the rating assigned to an asset or an obligor. In
order to use a factor that is based on a rating, an insurer should meet all of the conditions
specified in this section. Insurers may recognize credit ratings from the following rating
agencies:
 DBRS;
 Fitch Rating Services;
 Moody’s Investors Service;
 Standard and Poor’s (S&P);
 Kroll Bond Rating Agency (KBRA);
 Japan Credit Rating Agency (JCR); or
 Rating and Investment Information (R&I).
Refer to appendix 3-A for the correspondence between the rating categories used in this
guideline and individual agency ratings. Note that LICAT rating categories do not contain
modifiers.

An insurer should choose the rating agencies it intends to rely on and then use their ratings
consistently for each type of claim. Insurers may not selectively choose assessments provided by
different rating agencies.

Any rating used to determine a factor must be publicly available, i.e., the rating must be
published in an accessible form and included in the rating agency’s transition matrix. Ratings
that are made available only to the parties to a transaction or to a limited number of parties do
not satisfy this requirement.

If an insurer uses multiple rating agencies and there is only one assessment for a particular claim,
that assessment is used to determine the required capital for the claim. If there are two
assessments from the rating agencies used by an insurer and these assessments differ, the insurer
should apply the credit risk factor corresponding to the lower of the two ratings. If there are three
or more assessments for a claim, the insurer should exclude one of the ratings that corresponds to
the lowest credit risk factor, and then use the rating that corresponds to the lowest credit risk
factor of those that remain (i.e., the insurer should use the second-highest rating from those
available, allowing for multiple occurrences of the highest rating).

Where an insurer holds a particular securities issue that carries one or more issue-specific
assessments, the credit risk factor for the claim is based on these assessments. Where an insurer’s
claim is not an investment in a specifically rated security, the following principles apply:

Life A LICAT
October 2018 45
 1) In circumstances where the issuer has a specific rating for an issued debt security, but the
insurer’s claim is not an investment in this particular security, a rating of BBB or better
on the rated security may only be applied to the insurer’s unrated claim if this unrated
claim ranks pari passu or senior to the rated claim in all respects. If not, the credit rating
of the rated claim cannot be used and the insurer’s unrated claim must be treated as an
unrated obligation.
2) In circumstances where the issuer has an issuer rating, this assessment typically applies to
senior unsecured claims on that issuer. Consequently, only senior unrated claims on that
issuer will benefit from an investment-grade (BBB or better) issuer assessment; other
unassessed claims on the issuer will be treated as unrated. If either the issuer or one of its
issues has a rating of BB or lower, this equivalent rating should be used to determine the
capital charge for an unrated claim on the issuer.
3) Short-term assessments are deemed to be issue specific. They can only be used to
determine the credit risk factor applied to claims arising from the rated facility. They
cannot be generalized to other short-term claims, and in no event can a short-term rating
be used to support a capital charge for an unrated long-term claim.
4) Where the credit risk factor for an unrated exposure is based on the rating of an
equivalent exposure to the issuer, foreign currency ratings must be used for exposures in
foreign currency. Canadian currency ratings, if separate, are only to be used to determine
the risk factor for claims denominated in Canadian currency.

The following additional conditions apply to the use of ratings:

1) External assessments for one entity within a corporate group may not be used to
determine the credit risk factors for other entities within the same group.
2) No rating may be inferred for an unrated entity based on assets that the entity possesses.
3) In order to avoid the double counting of credit enhancement factors, insurers may not
recognize credit risk mitigation under sections 3.2 and 3.3 if the credit enhancement has
already been reflected in the issue-specific rating.
4) An insurer may not recognize a rating if the rating is at least partly based on unfunded
support (e.g., guarantees, credit enhancement and liquidity facilities) provided by the
insurer itself or one of its affiliates.
5) Any assessment used must take into account and reflect the entire amount of credit risk
exposure an insurer has with regard to all payments owed to it. In particular, if an insurer
is owed both principal and interest, the assessment must fully take into account and
reflect the credit risk associated with repayment of both principal and interest.

Insurers may not use unsolicited ratings in determining the risk factor for an asset, except where
the asset is a sovereign exposure and a solicited rating is not available.

3.1.2. Credit risk factors based on external ratings

The credit risk factors in the table below apply to rated credit exposures that meet the criteria set
out in section 3.1.1. The exposures for which these factors may be used include bonds, loans,
mortgages, guarantees, and off-balance sheet exposures. However, these factors may not be used
Life A LICAT
October 2018 46
for reinsurance exposures (q.v. section 3.1.7), asset-backed securities (q.v. section 3.4), and
capital instruments (including subordinated debt) issued by domestic or foreign financial
institutions that qualify as regulatory capital to the issuer (q.v. section 5.2.2). The factors depend
on the rating and effective maturity of the exposure.

Rating Effective Maturity In Years

Category52
1 2 3 4 5 10
AAA 0.25% 0.25% 0.50% 0.50% 1.00% 1.25%
AA 0.25% 0.50% 0.75% 1.00% 1.25% 1.75%
A 0.75% 1.00% 1.50% 1.75% 2.00% 3.00%
BBB 1.50% 2.75% 3.25% 3.75% 4.00% 4.75%
BB 3.75% 6.00% 7.25% 7.75% 8.00% 8.00%
B 7.50% 10.00% 10.50% 10.50% 10.50% 10.50%
Lower than B 15.50% 18.00% 18.00% 18.00% 18.00% 18.00%

For effective maturities of 1 to 10 years, the factor is determined using linear interpolation
between the nearest effective maturities in the above table. For effective maturities greater than
10 years, the factors for 10-year maturity are used. For effective maturities less than 1 year, the
factors for 1-year maturity are used.

For an instrument subject to a determined cash flow schedule, effective maturity53 is defined as:
∑𝑡 𝑡 × 𝐶𝐹𝑡
Effective Maturity (M) = ∑ 𝐶𝐹
𝑡 𝑡

where CFt denotes the cash flows (principal, interest payments and fees) contractually payable
by the borrower in period t.

If an insurer is not in a position to calculate the effective maturity of the contracted payments as
noted above, it may use the maximum remaining time (in years) that the borrower is permitted to
take to fully discharge its contractual obligation (principal, interest, and fees) under the terms of
the loan agreement as the effective maturity. Normally, this will correspond to the nominal
maturity of the instrument.

If a traded bond has an embedded put option for the benefit of the bondholder, an insurer may
use the cash flows up to the put date to calculate effective maturity if, at the bond’s current
market price, the yield to the put date is greater than the yield to maturity. For any debt
obligation, the presence of an obligor prepayment option or call option does not affect the
calculation of effective maturity.

For derivatives subject to a master netting agreement, the weighted average maturity of the
transactions should be used when calculating the effective maturity. Further, the notional amount
of each transaction should be used for weighting the maturity.
52
Refer to Appendix 3-A for a table showing equivalent ratings from the rating agencies listed in section 3.1.1.
53
An approximation may be used under section 1.4.5.
Life A LICAT
October 2018 47
When an insurer has multiple exposures to an entity or a connected group54, it should aggregate the
exposures within each rating grade and asset type (e.g. A-rated mortgages, BBB-rated bonds and
loans) before calculating the effective maturity for the exposures.55,53

3.1.3. Short-term investments

Rating Category52
0.3% Demand deposits, checks, acceptances and similar obligations that are
drawn on regulated deposit-taking institutions subject to the solvency
requirements of the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS)
and that have an original maturity of less than three months
0.3% S1
0.6% S2
2.5% S3
10% All other short-term ratings

3.1.4. Entities eligible for a 0% factor

Bonds, notes and other obligations of the following entities are eligible for a 0% credit risk
factor:
1. The Government of Canada;
2. Sovereigns rated AA or better and their central banks, provided that the rating applies to
the currency in which an obligation is issued56;
3. Unrated sovereigns with a country risk classification of 0 or 1, as assigned by Export
Credit Agencies participating in the “Arrangement on Officially Supported Export
Credits”57, for obligations denominated in the sovereign’s domestic currency;
4. Canadian provincial and territorial governments;
5. Agents of the Canadian Government or a Canadian provincial or territorial government
whose debts are, by virtue of their enabling legislation, direct obligations of the Crown in
right of such federal or provincial government;
6. The Bank for International Settlements;
7. The International Monetary Fund;
8. The European Community and the European Central Bank;

54
As defined in Guideline B-2: Large Exposure Limits.
55
The effective maturity for the exposures to a connected group within a rating grade can equivalently be
calculated as a weighted average of the effective maturities of the individual exposures. The weight to apply to
each exposure’s maturity is equal to the exposure’s total non-discounted cash flows divided by total non-
discounted cash flows for all exposures to the group.
56
Sovereign obligations rated lower than AA may not receive a factor of 0%, and are instead subject to the factor
requirements in section 3.1.2.
57
The consensus country risk classification is available on the OECD’s web site (http://www.oecd.org) in the
Export Credit Arrangement web page of the Trade Directorate.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 48
 9. The following multilateral development banks:
a. International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD);
b. International Finance Corporation (IFC);
c. Asian Development Bank (ADB);
d. African Development Bank (AfDB);
e. European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (EBRD);
f. Inter-American Development Bank (IADB);
g. European Investment Bank (EIB);
h. European Investment Fund (EIF);
i. Nordic Investment Bank (NIB);
j. Caribbean Development Bank (CDB);
k. Islamic Development Bank (IDB);
l. Council of Europe Development Bank (CEDB);
m. The International Finance Facility for Immunisation (IFFIm);
n. Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency.
10. Public sector entities in jurisdictions outside Canada where:
a. The jurisdiction’s sovereign rating is AA or better, and
b. The national bank supervisor in the jurisdiction of origin permits banks under its
supervision to use a risk weight of 0% for the public sector entity under the Basel
Framework
11. Qualifying central counterparties58 to derivatives and securities financing transactions.

3.1.5. Unrated claims

For unrated commercial paper and similar short-term facilities having an original maturity of less
than one year, a credit risk factor corresponding to rating category S3 should be used, unless the
issuer has a rated short-term facility outstanding with an assessment that warrants a capital
58
A central counterparty (CCP) is an entity that interposes itself between counterparties to contracts traded within
one or more financial markets, becoming the legal counterparty so that it is the buyer to every seller and the
seller to every buyer. A qualifying central counterparty (QCCP) is an entity that is licensed to operate as a
central counterparty (including a licence granted by way of confirming and exemption), and is permitted by the
appropriate regulator/overseer to operate as such with respect to the products offered. This is subject to the
provision that the CCP is based and prudentially supervised in a jurisdiction where the relevant
regulator/overseer has established, and publicly indicated that it applies to the CCP on an on-going basis,
domestic rules and regulations that are consistent with the CPSS-IOSCO Principles for Financial Market
Infrastructures. In order to qualify for a 0% factor, the CCP must mitigate its own exposure to credit risk by
requiring all participants in its arrangements to fully collateralize their obligations to the CCP on a daily basis.
The 0% factor may not be used in respect of transactions that have been rejected by the CCP, nor in respect of
equity investments, guarantee fund or default fund obligations an insurer may have to a CCP. Where the CCP is
in a jurisdiction that does not have a CCP regulator applying the Principles to the CCP, OSFI may make the
determination of whether the CCP meets this definition.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 49
charge of 10%. If an issuer has such a short-term facility outstanding, a credit risk factor of 10%
should be used for all unrated debt claims on the issuer, whether long term or short term, unless
recognized credit risk mitigation techniques (qq.v. sections 3.2 and 3.3) are being used for such
claims.

If it is not possible to infer a rating for a bond or loan using the rules in section 3.1.1, the risk
factor to be used is 6%. This factor also applies to derivative contracts or other capital markets
transactions for which a rating cannot be inferred.

3.1.6. Mortgages59

An insurer may use a ratings-based factor from section 3.1.2 for a mortgage if the mortgage
meets the criteria for use of a rating set out in section 3.1.1. For other mortgages the following
factors apply:

Factor Mortgage Category

0% Mortgages that are guaranteed by Canada Mortgage and Housing Corporation (CMHC), or that
are otherwise insured under the NHA or equivalent provincial mortgage insurance program
See below Mortgages guaranteed by private sector mortgage insurers
2% Qualifying residential mortgage loans and qualifying home equity lines of credit
6% Commercial mortgage loans (office, retail stores, industrial, hotel, other)
6% Non-qualifying residential mortgage loans, and non-qualifying home equity lines of credit
10% Mortgages secured by undeveloped land (e.g., construction financing), other than land used for
agricultural purposes or the production of minerals. A property recently constructed or renovated
is considered as under construction until it is completed and at least 80% leased.
10% The portion of a mortgage that is based on an increase in value occasioned by a change in use
18% Impaired and restructured mortgages, net of write-downs and individual allowances

Where a mortgage is comprehensively insured by a private sector mortgage insurer that has a
backstop guarantee provided by the Government of Canada (for example, a guarantee made
pursuant to the Protection of Residential Mortgage or Hypothecary Insurance Act), insurers should
recognize the risk-mitigating effect of the counter-guarantee by reporting the portion of the
exposure that is covered by the Government of Canada backstop as if this portion were directly
guaranteed by the Government of Canada. The remainder of the exposure is treated as an
exposure to the mortgage guarantor in accordance with the rules set out in section 3.3.

Residential mortgage loans and home equity lines of credit must meet one of the following
criteria in order to qualify for a 2% factor:
1. the loan or line of credit is secured by a first mortgage on an individual condominium
residence or one- to four-unit residential dwelling, is made to a person(s) or guaranteed
by a person(s), is not more than 90 days past due, and does not exceed a loan-to-value
ratio of 80%; or

59
Mortgage-backed securities, collateralized mortgage obligations and other asset backed securities are not subject
to this section and are covered in section 3.4.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 50
 2. the loan or line of credit is a first or junior collateral mortgage on an individual
condominium residence or one- to four-unit residential dwelling, is made to a person(s)
or guaranteed by a person(s), and no party other than the insurer holds a senior or
intervening lien on the property to which the collateral mortgage applies. Further, the
loan or line of credit is no more than 90 days past due, and all of the mortgages held by
the insurer and secured by the same property do not, collectively, exceed a loan-to-value
ratio of 80%;
Investments in hotels, time-shares or similar shared properties do not qualify for a 2% factor.

3.1.7. Reinsurance assets and receivables

Factor Reinsurance assets and receivables

0.7% Registered reinsurance receivables
0.7% Reinsurance premiums due from federally or provincially regulated insurers
2.5% Reinsurance assets arising from registered reinsurance
Receivables outstanding less than 60 days53, including receivables arising from unregistered
5%
reinsurance
Receivables outstanding 60 days or more53, including receivables arising from unregistered
10%
reinsurance

Refer to section 10.1 for the definitions of registered and unregistered reinsurance. The 2.5%
requirement for a registered reinsurance asset may be reduced under specific circumstances (q.v.
section 10.5.3).

Positive reinsurance assets may be offset by negative reinsurance assets for each reinsurer.
Within each homogeneous participating block of business within a geographic region (q.v.
chapter 9) and each non-participating block of business within a geographic region, total
reinsurance assets by reinsurer are floored at zero53. Collateral and letters of credit posted by
reinsurers under registered reinsurance arrangements may be recognized provided the conditions
outlined in sections 3.2 and 3.3 are met.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 51
3.1.8. Other items

Factor Other Items

0% Cash held on the insurer’s own premises
0% Unrealized gains and accrued receivables on forwards, swaps, purchased options and similar
derivative contracts where they have been included in the off-balance sheet calculation
0% Any assets deducted from Available Capital, including investments in controlled non-life
financial corporations reported using the equity method of accounting per section 1.3,
goodwill, intangible assets, and deferred tax assets
0% Instalment premiums receivable (not yet due)
5% Premiums outstanding less than 60 days 53, including instalment premiums receivable
10% Premiums outstanding more than 60 days53, including instalment premiums receivable
10% Balance sheet value of miscellaneous items (e.g., agent's debit balances and prepaid
expenses)
10% The amount of available refunds from defined benefit pension plan surplus assets included in
Tier 1
10% Instruments or investments that are not specifically identified in sections 3.1, 5.2, 5.3 or 5.4.
20% Assets classified as held for sale (HFS)60
25% Deferred tax assets not deducted from Available Capital

3.1.9. Leases

3.1.9.1. Lessee
Where a life insurer is the lessee, the capital requirement for the associated asset held on the
balance sheet is based on the underlying property leased per section 5.3.

3.1.9.2. Lessor
A credit risk factor of 0% is applied to any lease that is a direct obligation of an entity listed in
section 3.1.4 that is eligible for a 0% credit risk factor. A 0% factor may also be used for a lease
that is guaranteed by such an entity if the guarantee meets the criteria for recognition under
section 3.3. The 0% factor may not be used for leases where an insurer does not have direct

60
An insurer may use the 20% factor, or it may alternatively use a look-through approach. If the insurer elects to
use the 20% factor, the associated liabilities that are held for sale must be included in the determination of
required capital. Under the alternative look-through approach, assets held for sale are reclassified on the balance
sheet according to their nature. For example, real estate held for sale may be reclassified as a real estate
investment or a disposal group classified as held for sale may be re-consolidated. If the alternate method is
elected, any write-down made as a result of re-measuring the assets at the lower of carrying amount and fair
value less costs to sell should not be reversed upon reclassification or re-consolidation; the write-down should
continue to be reflected in the retained earnings used to determine Available Capital. The write-down amount
should be applied to the reclassified/re-consolidated assets in a manner consistent with the basis for the write-
down of the HFS assets. If the insurer applies this alternate method for a disposal group, OSFI Lead Supervisor
may request a pro-forma LICAT Quarterly Return that includes the impact of the sale. The pro-forma LICAT
calculation should include all items affecting the results (e.g. the projected profit or loss on sale, and the
projected impact of other related transactions and agreements that may occur in parallel) irrespective of whether
they have been recognized at period-end. The insurer may also be requested to provide OSFI with an impact
analysis identifying the significant drivers of the LICAT differences with and without the disposal group,
including the impact of sale-related subsequent agreements and transactions.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 52
recourse to an entity eligible for a 0% factor under the terms of the obligation, even if such an
entity is the underlying lessee.

For finance leases, if the lease is secured only by equipment, a 6% credit risk factor applies. If
the lease is also secured by the general credit of the lessee and the lease is rated or a rating for
the lease can be inferred under section 3.1.1, the credit risk factor for the lease is the same as the
credit risk factor in section 3.1.2 for a bond having the same rating and effective maturity as the
lease. Any rating used must be applicable to the direct obligor of the instrument held by the
insurer (or the direct guarantor, if recognition is permitted under section 3.3), which may be
different from the underlying lessee. If no rating can be inferred, the credit risk factor is 6%.

3.1.10. Impaired and restructured obligations

The charges for impaired and restructured obligations in this section replace the charges that
would otherwise apply to a performing asset. They are to be applied instead of (not in addition
to) the charge that was required for the asset before it became impaired or was restructured.

A factor of 18% applies to the unsecured portion of any asset (i.e., the portion not secured by
collateral or guarantees) that is impaired, has been restructured, or for which there is reasonable
doubt about the timely collection of the full amount of principal or interest (including any asset
that is contractually more than 90 days in arrears), and that does not carry an external rating from
an agency listed in section 3.1.1. This factor is applied to the net carrying amount of the asset on
the balance sheet, defined as the principal balance of the obligation net of write-downs and
individual allowances. For the purpose of defining the secured portion of a past due obligation,
eligible collateral and guarantees are the same as in sections 3.2 and 3.3.

An asset is considered to have been restructured when the insurer, for economic or legal reasons
related to the obligor's financial difficulties, grants a concession that it would not otherwise have
considered. The 18% factor will continue to apply to restructured obligations until cash flows
have been collected for a period of at least one year in accordance with the terms of the
restructuring.

3.1.11. Credit protection provided

If an insurer has guaranteed a debt security (e.g. through the sale of a credit derivative) or
synthetically replicated the cash flows from a debt security (e.g. through reinsurance), it should
hold the same amount of capital as if it held the security directly. Such exposures should be
reported as off-balance sheet instruments according to Chapter 4.

Where an insurer provides credit protection on a securitisation tranche rated BBB or higher via a
first-to-default credit derivative on a basket of assets, required capital is determined as the
notional amount of the derivative times the credit risk factor corresponding to the tranche’s
rating, provided that this rating represents an assessment of the underlying tranche that does not
take account of any credit protection provided by the insurer. If the underlying product does not
have an external rating, the insurer may either 1) treat the full notional amount of the derivative
as a first-loss position within a tranched structure and apply a 60% credit risk factor (q.v. section
3.4.3), or it may 2) calculate the required capital as the notional amount times the sum of the
credit risk factors for each asset in the basket. In the case of a second-to-default credit derivative
Life A LICAT
October 2018 53
where the underlying product does not have an external rating and the insurer is using the second
summation approach, the insurer may exclude the asset in the basket having the lowest credit risk
factor.

3.2. Collateral
A collateralized transaction is one in which:
1. an insurer has a credit exposure or potential credit exposure; and
2. that credit exposure or potential credit exposure is hedged in whole or in part by collateral
posted by a counterparty61 or by a third party on behalf of the counterparty.

The following criteria must be met before capital relief will be granted in respect of any form of
collateral:
1. The effects of collateral may not be double counted. Therefore, insurers may not
recognize collateral on claims for which an issue-specific rating is used that already
reflects that collateral. All criteria in section 3.1.1 around the use of ratings apply to
collateral.
2. All documentation used in collateralized transactions must be binding on all parties and
legally enforceable in all relevant jurisdictions. Insurers should have conducted sufficient
legal review to verify this and have a well-founded legal basis to reach this conclusion,
and undertake such further review as necessary to ensure continuing enforceability.
3. The legal mechanism by which collateral is pledged or transferred must provide the
insurer the right to liquidate or take legal possession of it in a timely manner in the event
of the default, insolvency or bankruptcy (or one or more otherwise-defined credit events
set out in the transaction documentation) of the counterparty (and, where applicable, of
the custodian holding the collateral). Furthermore, insurers should take all necessary
steps to fulfil those requirements under the law applicable to the insurer’s interest in the
collateral for obtaining and maintaining an enforceable security interest (e.g. by
registering it with a registrar) or for exercising a right to net or set off in relation to title
transfer collateral.
4. The credit quality of the counterparty and the value of the collateral must not have a
material positive correlation. For example, securities issued by the counterparty or by any
of its affiliates are ineligible.
5. Insurers should have clear and robust procedures for the timely liquidation of collateral to
ensure that any legal conditions required for declaring the default of the counterparty and
liquidating the collateral are observed, and that collateral can be liquidated promptly.
6. Where collateral is held by a custodian, insurers should take reasonable steps to ensure
that the custodian segregates the collateral from its own assets.

61
In this section, “counterparty” is used to denote a party to whom an insurer has an on- or off-balance sheet credit
exposure or a potential credit exposure. That exposure may, for example, take the form of a loan of cash or
securities (where the counterparty would traditionally be called the borrower), of securities posted as collateral,
of a commitment, or of an exposure under an OTC derivatives contract.
Life A LICAT
October 2018 54
Collateralized transactions are classified according to whether they are 1) policy loans, 2) capital
markets transactions, or 3) other secured lending arrangements. The category of capital markets
transactions includes repo-style transactions (e.g., repos and reverse repos, securities lending and
borrowing) and other capital markets driven transactions (e.g., OTC derivatives and margin
lending).

3.2.1. Policy loans

Loans for which insurance policies are provided as collateral will receive a 0% credit risk factor
if all of the following conditions are met:
1. Both the loan and the policy provided as collateral are issued by and remain held by the
insurer;
2. The term of the loan does not exceed the term of the policy provided as collateral;
3. The insurer has the legal right and intention of offset in the event the loan goes into
default or the policy is cancelled;
4. Amounts owing under the loan, including any unpaid interest, are never greater than the
proceeds available under the collateral; and
5. The policy will be surrendered if the loan balance exceeds the proceeds available under
the collateral.

If any of these conditions are not met, a credit risk factor of 10% will be applied to the loan.

3.2.2. Eligible financial collateral

The following collateral instruments may be recognized for secured lending and capital markets
transactions:
1. Debt securities rated by a recognized rating agency (section 3.1.1) where these securities
are:
a. rated BB or better and issued by an entity eligible for a 0% bond factor;
b. rated BBB or better and issued by other entities (including banks, insurance
companies, and securities firms); or
c. short-term and rated S3 or better.
2. Debt securities not rated by a recognized rating agency where:
a. the securities are issued by a Canadian bank whose equity is listed on a
recognized exchange; and
b. the original maturity of the securities is less than one year; and
c. the securities are classified as senior debt; and
d. all debt issues by the issuing bank having the same seniority as the securities and
that have been rated by a recognized rating agency are rated at least BBB or S3.
3. Equities and convertible bonds that are included in a main index.
4. Gold.
Life A LICAT
October 2018 55
 5. Mutual funds where:
a. a price for the units is publicly quoted daily; and
b. the mutual fund is limited to investing in the instruments listed above62.

Additionally, the following collateral instruments may be recognized for capital markets
transactions:
6. Equities and convertible bonds that are not included in a main index but that are listed on
a recognized exchange, and mutual funds that include such equities and bonds.

For collateral to be recognized in a secured lending transaction, it must be pledged for at least the
life of the loan. For collateral to be recognized in a capital markets transaction, it must be
secured in a manner that precludes release of the collateral unless warranted by market
movements, the transaction is settled, or the collateral is replaced by new collateral of equal or
greater value.

3.2.3. Secured lending

Collateral received in secured lending must be re-valued on a mark-to-market basis at least every
six months. The market value of collateral that is denominated in a currency different from that
of the loan must be reduced by 30%. The portion of a loan that is collateralized by the market
value of eligible financial collateral will receive the credit risk factor applicable to the collateral
instrument, subject to a minimum of 0.375% with the exception noted below. The remainder of
the loan will be assigned the risk factor appropriate to the counterparty.

A credit risk factor of 0% may be used for a secured lending transaction if:
1. the loan and the collateral are denominated in the same currency; and
2. the collateral consists entirely of securities eligible for a 0% credit risk factor; and
3. the market value of the collateral is at least 25% greater than the balance sheet value of
the loan.

3.2.4. Capital markets transactions

3.2.4.1. Introduction
When taking collateral for a capital markets transaction, insurers should calculate an adjusted
exposure amount to a counterparty for capital adequacy purposes in order to take account of the
effects of that collateral. Using haircuts, insurers adjust both the amount of 1) the exposure to the
counterparty and 2) the value of any collateral received in support of the counterparty’s
obligations. Such adjustments are made to take into account possible future fluctuations in the
value of the exposure or the collateral received63 resulting from market movements. This will
produce volatility-adjusted amounts for both the exposure and the collateral. Unless either side of

62
However, the use of derivative instruments by a mutual fund solely to hedge investments listed as eligible
financial collateral shall not prevent units in that mutual fund from being recognized as eligible financial
collateral.
63
The exposure amount may vary where, for example, securities are being lent.
Life A LICAT
October 2018 56
 the transaction is in cash, the volatility-adjusted amount for the exposure will be higher than the
exposure itself, and for the collateral it will be lower. Additionally, where the exposure and
collateral are held in different currencies, an additional downwards adjustment must be made to
the volatility-adjusted collateral amount to take account of possible future fluctuations in
exchange rates.

Where the volatility-adjusted exposure amount is greater than the volatility-adjusted collateral
amount (including any further adjustment for foreign exchange risk), required capital is
calculated as the difference between the two multiplied by the credit risk factor appropriate to the
counterparty.

Section 3.2.4.2 describes the size of the individual haircuts used. These haircuts depend on the type
of instrument and the type of transaction. The haircut amounts are then scaled using a square root
of time formula depending on the frequency of remargining. Section 3.2.4.3 sets out conditions
under which insurers may use zero haircuts for certain types of repo-style transactions involving
government bonds. Section 3.2.4.4 describes the treatment of master netting agreements.

3.2.4.2. Calculation of the capital requirement

For a collateralized capital markets transaction, the exposure amount after risk mitigation is
calculated as follows:

 
E*  max 0, E  (1eH )  C  (1c H fxH ) 

where:
 E* is the exposure value after risk mitigation
 E is the current value of the exposure
 He is the haircut appropriate to the exposure
 C is the current value of the collateral received
 Hc is the haircut appropriate to the collateral
 Hfx is the haircut appropriate for currency mismatch between the collateral and the
exposure

The exposure amount after risk mitigation is multiplied by the credit risk factor appropriate to
the counterparty to obtain the charge for the collateralized transaction.

When the collateral consists of a basket of assets, the haircut to be used on the basket is the
average of the haircuts applicable to the assets in the basket, where the average is weighted
according to the market values of the assets in the basket.

The following are the standard haircuts, expressed as percentages:

Life A LICAT
October 2018 57
 Securities
Issue rating for
Residual Maturity eligible for a 0% Other issuers Securitizations
debt securities
credit risk factor
 1 year 0.5 1 2
AAA to AA >1 year,  3 years 3
2 8
> 3 years,  5 years 4
S1 > 5 years,  10 years 6
4 16
> 10 years 12
A to BBB  1 year 1 2 4
> 1 year,  3 years 4
S2 and S3 3 12
> 3 years,  5 years 6
> 5 years,  10 years 12
Unrated bank 6 24
debt securities > 10 years 20
BB All 15 Not eligible Not eligible
Main index equities and convertible
20
bonds, and gold
Other equities and convertible bonds
30
listed on a recognized exchange
Mutual funds Highest haircut applicable to any security in which the
fund can invest

The standard haircut for currency risk where the exposure and collateral are denominated in
different currencies is 8%.

For transactions in which an insurer lends cash, the haircut applied to the exposure will be zero64.
For transactions in which an insurer lends non-eligible instruments (e.g. non-investment grade
corporate debt securities), the haircut applied to the exposure will be the same as that applied to
an equity that is traded on a recognized exchange but not part of a main index.

For collateralized OTC derivatives transactions, the E* component term E  (1 He ) ,

representing the volatility-adjusted exposure amount before risk mitigation, will be replaced by
the exposure amount for the derivatives transaction calculated using the current exposure method
as described in section 4.1. This is either the positive replacement cost of the transaction plus the
add-on for potential future exposure, or, for a series of contracts eligible for netting, the net
replacement cost of the contracts plus ANet (q.v. section 4.2.2 for definition). The haircut for
currency risk will be applied when there is a mismatch between the collateral currency and the
settlement currency, but no additional adjustments beyond a single haircut for currency risk will
be required if there are more than two currencies involved in collateral, settlement and exposure
measurement.

64
An insurer may use a haircut of zero for cash received as collateral if the cash is held in Canada in the form of a
deposit at one of the insurer’s banking subsidiaries.
Life A LICAT
October 2018 58
 All of the standard haircuts listed above must be scaled by a square root of time factor according
to the following formula:

H  S 


where:
 H represents any of the haircuts used in calculating the exposure amount after risk
mitigation;
 S is the standard haircut specified above for the exposure or collateral;
 N is the actual number of business days between remargining under the transaction;
and
 T is equal to 5 for repo-style transactions, and 10 for all other capital markets
transactions.

3.2.4.3. Conditions for using zero haircuts

For repo-style transactions that satisfy the following conditions, and for which the counterparty
is a core market participant as defined below, insurers may apply haircuts of zero to both the
exposure and collateral:
1. Both the exposure and the collateral are cash or securities issued by the Government of
Canada or a provincial or territorial government in Canada;
2. Both the exposure and the collateral are denominated in the same currency;
3. Either the transaction is overnight or both the exposure and the collateral are marked to
market daily and are subject to daily remargining;
4. Following a counterparty’s failure to remargin, the time that is required between the last
mark to market before the failure to remargin and the liquidation65 of the collateral is
considered to be no more than four business days;
5. The transaction is settled across a settlement system proven for that type of transaction;
6. The documentation covering the agreement is standard market documentation for repo-
style transactions in the securities concerned;
7. The transaction is governed by documentation specifying that if the counterparty fails to
satisfy an obligation to deliver cash or securities or to deliver margin or otherwise
defaults, then the transaction is immediately terminable; and
8. Upon any default event, regardless of whether the counterparty is insolvent or bankrupt,
the insurer has the unfettered, legally enforceable right to immediately seize and liquidate
the collateral for its benefit.

Core market participants include the following entities:

65
This does not require an insurer to always liquidate the collateral but rather to have the capability to do so within
the given time frame.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 59
 1. Sovereigns, central banks and public sector entities;
2. Banks and securities firms;
3. Other financial companies (including insurance companies) rated AA- or better;
4. Regulated mutual funds that are subject to capital or leverage requirements;
5. Regulated pension funds; or
6. Recognized clearing organizations.

3.2.4.4. Treatment of repo-style transactions covered under master netting agreements

The effects of bilateral netting agreements covering repo-style transactions will be recognized on
a counterparty-by-counterparty basis if the agreements are legally enforceable in each relevant
jurisdiction upon the occurrence of an event of default and regardless of whether the
counterparty is insolvent or bankrupt. In addition, netting agreements must:
1. provide the non-defaulting party the right to terminate and close out in a timely manner
all transactions under the agreement upon an event of default, including in the event of
insolvency or bankruptcy of the counterparty;
2. provide for the netting of gains and losses on transactions (including the value of any
collateral) terminated and closed out under it so that a single net amount is owed by one
party to the other;
3. allow for the prompt liquidation or setoff of collateral upon the event of default; and
4. be, together with the rights arising from the provisions required above, legally
enforceable in each relevant jurisdiction upon the occurrence of an event of default and
regardless of the counterparty’s insolvency or bankruptcy.

For repo-style transactions included within a master netting agreement, the exposure amount
after risk mitigation will be calculated as follows:

E *  max 0, E  C  (E  H )  (E

s s fx  H fx) 

where:
 E* is the exposure value after risk mitigation;
 E is the current value of the exposure;
 C is the current value of the collateral received;
 Es is the absolute value of the net position in each security covered under the
agreement;
 Hs is the haircut appropriate to Es;
 Efx is the absolute value of the net position in each currency under the agreement
that is different from the settlement currency; and
 Hfx is the haircut appropriate for currency mismatch.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 60
All other rules regarding the calculation of haircuts in section 3.2.4.2 equivalently apply for
insurers using bilateral netting agreements for repo-style transactions.

3.3. Guarantees and credit derivatives

Where guarantees66 or credit derivatives are direct, explicit, irrevocable and unconditional, and
insurers fulfil certain minimum operational conditions relating to risk management processes,
they are allowed to take account of such credit protection in calculating capital requirements. A
substitution approach is used: the protected portion of a counterparty exposure is assigned the
credit risk factor of the guarantor or protection provider, while the uncovered portion retains the
credit risk factor of the underlying counterparty. Thus, only guarantees issued by or protection
provided by entities with a lower risk factor than the counterparty will lead to reduced capital
requirements. A range of guarantors and protection providers is recognized.

3.3.1. Operational requirements common to guarantees and credit derivatives

The effects of credit protection may not be double counted. Therefore, no capital recognition will
be given to credit protection on claims for which an issue-specific rating is used that already
reflects that protection. All criteria in section 3.1.1 around the use of ratings remain applicable to
guarantees and credit derivatives.

The following conditions must be satisfied in order for a guarantee (counter-guarantee) or credit
derivative to be recognized in calculating required capital:
1. It represents a direct claim on the protection provider and explicitly refers to a specific
exposure or a pool of exposures, so that the extent of the cover is clearly defined and
incontrovertible;
2. Other than non-payment by a protection purchaser of money due in respect of the credit
protection contract, it is irrevocable; there must be no clause in the contract that allows
the protection provider to unilaterally cancel the credit cover or that increases the
effective cost of cover as a result of deteriorating credit quality in the hedged exposure67;
3. It is unconditional; there is no clause in the protection contract outside the direct control
of the insurer that could prevent the protection provider from being obliged to pay out in
a timely manner in the event that the original counterparty fails to make the payment(s)
due; and
4. All documentation used for documenting guarantees and credit derivatives is binding on
all parties and legally enforceable in all relevant jurisdictions. Insurers should have
conducted sufficient legal review, documented in a legal opinion supporting this
conclusion, to establish this and undertake such further review as necessary to ensure
continuing enforceability68.

66
Letters of credit for which an insurer is the beneficiary are included within the definition of guarantees, and
receive the same capital treatment.
67
The irrevocability condition does not require that the credit protection and the exposure be maturity matched.
However, it does require that the maturity agreed ex ante cannot be reduced ex post by the protection provider.
68
The documented legal opinion must be available for review by OSFI, upon request.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 61
3.3.2. Additional operational requirements for guarantees

The following conditions must be satisfied in order for a guarantee to be recognized:

a) On the qualifying default/non-payment of the counterparty, the insurer may in a timely
manner pursue the guarantor for any monies outstanding under the documentation
governing the transaction. The guarantor may make one lump sum payment of all monies
under such documentation to the insurer, or the guarantor may assume the future payment
obligations of the counterparty covered by the guarantee. The insurer should have the
right to receive any such payments from the guarantor without first having to take legal
action in order to pursue the counterparty for payment;
b) The guarantee is an explicitly documented obligation assumed by the guarantor; and
c) Except as noted in the following sentence, the guarantee covers all types of payments the
underlying obligor is expected to make under the documentation governing the
transaction (e.g. notional amount and margin payments). Where a guarantee covers
payment of principal only, interest and other uncovered payments will be treated as an
unsecured amount in accordance with section 3.3.5.

3.3.3. Additional operational requirements for credit derivatives

The following conditions must be satisfied in order for a credit derivative contract to be
recognized:
a) The credit events specified by the contracting parties must, at a minimum, cover:
1) failure to pay the amounts due under terms of the underlying obligation that are in
effect at the time of such failure (with a grace period that is closely in line with
the grace period in the underlying obligation);
2) bankruptcy, insolvency or inability of the obligor to pay its debts, or its failure or
admission in writing of its inability generally to pay its debts as they become due,
and analogous events; and
3) restructuring of the underlying obligation involving forgiveness or postponement
of principal, interest or fees that results in a credit loss event (i.e., charge-off,
specific provision or other similar debit to the profit and loss account).
b) If the credit derivative covers obligations that do not include the underlying obligation,
section g) below governs whether the asset mismatch is permissible.
c) The credit derivative shall not terminate prior to expiration of any grace period required
for a default on the underlying obligation to occur as a result of a failure to pay.
d) Credit derivatives allowing for cash settlement are recognized for capital purposes insofar
as a robust valuation process is in place in order to estimate loss reliably. There must be a
clearly specified period for obtaining post-credit event valuations of the underlying
obligation. If the reference obligation specified in the credit derivative for purposes of
cash settlement is different than the underlying obligation, section g) below governs
whether the asset mismatch is permissible.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 62
 e) If the protection purchaser’s right/ability to transfer the underlying obligation to the
protection provider is required for settlement, the terms of the underlying obligation must
provide that any required consent to such transfer may not be unreasonably withheld.
f) The identity of the parties responsible for determining whether a credit event has
occurred must be clearly defined. This determination must not be the sole responsibility
of the protection seller. The protection buyer must have the right/ability to inform the
protection provider of the occurrence of a credit event.
g) A mismatch between the underlying obligation and the reference obligation under the
credit derivative (i.e., the obligation used for purposes of determining cash settlement
value or the deliverable obligation) is permissible if (1) the reference obligation ranks
pari passu with or is junior to the underlying obligation, and (2) the underlying obligation
and reference obligation share the same obligor (i.e., the same legal entity) and legally
enforceable cross-default or cross-acceleration clauses are in place.
h) A mismatch between the underlying obligation and the obligation used for purposes of
determining whether a credit event has occurred is permissible if (1) the latter obligation
ranks pari passu with or is junior to the underlying obligation, and (2) the underlying
obligation and reference obligation share the same obligor (i.e., the same legal entity) and
legally enforceable cross-default or cross-acceleration clauses are in place.

Only credit default swaps and total return swaps that provide credit protection equivalent to
guarantees will be eligible for recognition. Where an insurer buys credit protection through a
total return swap and records the net payments received on the swap as net income, but does not
record offsetting deterioration in the value of the asset that is protected (either through reductions
in fair value or by increasing provisions), the credit protection will not be recognized.

Other types of credit derivatives are not eligible for recognition.

3.3.4. Eligible guarantors and protection providers

Insurers may recognize credit protection given by the following entities:

1) entities eligible for a 0% credit risk factor under section 3.1.4;
2) externally rated public sector entities, banks and securities firms with a lower credit risk
factor than that of the counterparty; and
3) other entities that currently are externally rated BBB or better, and that were externally
rated A or better at the time the credit protection was provided. This includes credit
protection provided by affiliates of an obligor when they have a lower credit risk factor
than that of the obligor.

However, an insurer may not recognize a guarantee or credit protection on an exposure to a third
party when the guarantee or credit protection is provided by an affiliate of the insurer. This
treatment follows the principle that guarantees within a corporate group are not a substitute for
capital.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 63
3.3.5. Capital treatment

The protected portion of a counterparty exposure is assigned the capital factor of the protection
provider. The uncovered portion of the exposure is assigned the factor of the underlying
counterparty.

Where the amount guaranteed, or against which credit protection is held, is less than the amount
of the exposure, and the secured and unsecured portions are of equal seniority (i.e., the insurer
and the guarantor share losses on a pro-rata basis), capital relief will be afforded on a
proportional basis, so that the protected portion of the exposure will receive the treatment
applicable to eligible guarantees and credit derivatives, and the remainder will be treated as
unsecured. Where an insurer transfers a portion of the risk of an exposure in one or more
tranches to a protection seller or sellers and retains some level of risk, and the risk transferred
and the risk retained are of different seniority, insurers may obtain credit protection for the senior
tranches (e.g. second-loss position) or the junior tranches (e.g. first-loss position). In this case,
the rules as set out in Guideline B-5: Asset Securitization will apply.

Materiality thresholds on payments below which no payment is made in the event of loss are
treated as first-loss positions in a tranched structure, and receive a credit risk factor of 60% in
accordance with section 3.4.3.

3.3.6. Currency mismatches

Where the credit protection is denominated in a currency different from that in which the
exposure is denominated, the amount of the exposure deemed to be protected is 70% of the
nominal amount of the credit protection, converted at current exchange rates.

3.3.7. Maturity mismatches

A maturity mismatch occurs when the residual maturity of the credit protection is less than that
of the underlying exposure. If there is a maturity mismatch and the credit protection has an
original maturity shorter than one year, the protection may not be recognized. As a result, the
maturity of protection for exposures with original maturities less than one year must be matched
to be recognized. Additionally, credit protection with a residual maturity of three months or less
may not be recognized if there is a maturity mismatch. Credit protection will be partially
recognized in other cases where there is a maturity mismatch.

The maturity of the underlying exposure and the maturity of the credit protection should both be
measured conservatively. The effective maturity of the underlying exposure is measured as the
longest possible remaining time before the counterparty is scheduled to fulfil its obligation,
taking into account any applicable grace period. For the credit protection, embedded options that
may reduce the term of the protection will be taken into account so that the shortest possible
effective maturity is used. Where a call is at the discretion of the protection seller, the maturity
will always be at the first call date. If the call is at the discretion of the insurer buying protection
but the terms of the arrangement at origination contain a positive incentive for the insurer to call
the transaction before contractual maturity, the remaining time to the first call date will be
deemed to be the effective maturity. For example, where there is a step-up cost in conjunction

Life A LICAT
October 2018 64
with a call feature or where the effective cost of cover increases over time even if credit quality
remains the same or improves, the effective maturity will be the remaining time to the first call.

When there is a maturity mismatch, the following adjustment will be applied:

t  0.25
Pa  P 
T  0.25
where:
 Pa is the value of the credit protection adjusted for maturity mismatch;
 P is the nominal amount of the credit protection, adjusted for currency mismatch if
applicable;
 T is the lower of 5 or the residual maturity of the exposure expressed in years; and
 t is the lower of T or the residual maturity of the credit protection arrangement
expressed in years.

3.3.8. Sovereign counter-guarantees

Some claims may be covered by a guarantee that is indirectly counter-guaranteed by a sovereign.

Such claims may be treated as covered by a sovereign guarantee provided that:
1) the sovereign providing the counter-guarantee is eligible for a 0% credit risk factor;
2) the sovereign counter-guarantee covers all credit risk elements of the claim;
3) both the original guarantee and the counter-guarantee meet all the operational
requirements for guarantees, except that the counter-guarantee need not be direct and
explicit to the original claim; and
4) the cover is robust , and there is no historical evidence suggesting that the coverage of the
counter-guarantee is less than effectively equivalent to that of a direct sovereign
guarantee.

3.3.9. Public sector entities in competition

Insurers may not recognize guarantees made by public sector entities, including provincial and
territorial governments in Canada, that would disadvantage private sector competition. Insurers
should look to the host (sovereign) government to confirm whether a public sector entity is in
competition with the private sector.

3.3.10. Other items related to the treatment of credit risk mitigation

In the case where an insurer has multiple types of mitigation covering a single exposure (e.g.,
both collateral and a guarantee partially cover an exposure), the insurer will be required to
subdivide the exposure into portions covered by each type of mitigation (e.g. the portion covered
by collateral and the portion covered by a guarantee) and the required capital for each portion
must be calculated separately. When credit protection provided by a single protection provider
has differing maturities, they must be subdivided into separate protection as well.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 65
There are cases where an insurer obtains credit protection for a basket of reference names and
where the first default among the reference names triggers the credit protection and the credit
event also terminates the contract. In this case, the insurer may recognize credit protection for the
asset within the basket having the lowest capital charge, but only if the notional amount of the
asset is less than or equal to the notional amount of the credit derivative. In the case where the
second default among the assets within the basket triggers the credit protection, the insurer
obtaining credit protection through such a product will only be able to recognize credit protection
on the asset in the basket having the lowest capital charge if first-to-default protection has also
been obtained, or if one of the assets within the basket has already defaulted.

3.4. Asset backed securities

The category of asset backed securities encompasses all securitizations, including collateralized
mortgage obligations and mortgage backed securities, as well as other exposures that result from
stratifying or tranching an underlying credit exposure. For exposures that arise as a result of asset
securitization transactions, insurers should refer to Guideline B-5: Asset Securitization to
determine whether there are functions provided (e.g., credit enhancement and liquidity facilities)
that require capital for credit risk.

3.4.1. NHA mortgage-backed securities

NHA mortgage-backed securities that are guaranteed by CMHC receive a factor of 0% to

recognize the fact that obligations incurred by CMHC are legal obligations of the Government of
Canada.

3.4.2. Pass-through type mortgage-backed securities

Mortgage-backed securities that are of pass-through type and are effectively a direct holding of
the underlying mortgages receive the capital charge of the underlying mortgages provided that
all of the following conditions are met:
1. the underlying mortgage pool contains only mortgages that were fully performing when
the mortgage-backed security was created;
2. the securities absorb their pro rata share of any losses incurred;
3. a special-purpose vehicle has been established for securitization and administration of the
pooled mortgage loans;
4. the underlying mortgages are assigned to an independent third party for the benefit of the
investors in the securities who will then own the underlying mortgages;
5. the arrangements for the special-purpose vehicle and trustee provide that the following
obligations are observed:
a. if a mortgage administrator or mortgage servicer is employed to carry out
administration functions, the vehicle and trustee must monitor the performance of
the administrator or servicer;
b. the vehicle and/or trustee must provide detailed and regular information on
structure and performance of the pooled mortgage loans;

Life A LICAT
October 2018 66
 c. the vehicle and trustee must be legally separate from the originator of the pooled
mortgage loans;
d. the vehicle and trustee must be responsible for any damage or loss to investors
created by their own or their servicer's mismanagement of the pooled mortgages;
e. the trustee must have a first-priority security interest on the underlying mortgages
on behalf of the securities holders;
f. the agreement must provide for the trustee to take clearly specified steps in cases
when a mortgagor defaults;
g. the holder of the security must have a pro rata share in the underlying mortgages
or the vehicle that issues the security must only have liabilities related to issuing
the mortgage-backed security;
h. the cash flows of the underlying mortgages must meet the cash flow requirements
of the security without undue reliance on any reinvestment income; and
i. the vehicle or trustee may invest cash flows pending distribution to investors only
in short-term money market instruments (without any material reinvestment risk)
or in new fully performing mortgage loans.

Pass-through mortgage-backed securities that do not meet all of the above conditions receive a
factor of 12%. Stripped mortgage-backed securities, issuances having different classes of
securities (senior/junior debt, residual tranches) that bear more than their pro-rata share of losses,
and mortgage-backed securities that are issued in tranches are subject to the capital treatment
described in Guideline B-5: Asset Securitization.

Where the underlying pool of assets contains mortgages having different capital charges, the
charge for the security is the average charge associated with the pool of assets. Where the
underlying pool contains mortgages that have become impaired, that portion of the instrument
should be treated as a past due investment in accordance with section 3.1.10.

3.4.3 Other asset-backed securities

The capital requirements for all other asset backed securities are based on their external ratings.
In order for an insurer to use external ratings to determine a capital requirement, the insurer must
comply with all of the operational requirements for the use of ratings in Guideline B-5: Asset
Securitization.

For asset-backed securities (other than resecuritizations) rated BBB or higher, the capital
requirement is the same as the requirement specified in section 3.1.2 for a bond having the same
rating and maturity as the asset-backed security. If an asset-backed security is rated BB, an
insurer may recognize the rating only if it is a third-party investor in the security, as opposed to
being an originator of the security. The credit risk factor for an asset-backed security (other than
a resecuritization) rated BB in which a company is a third-party investor is 300% of the
requirement for a bond rated BB having the same maturity as the security.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 67
The credit risk factors for short-term asset-backed securities (other than resecuritizations) rated
S3 or higher are the same as those in section 3.1.3 for short-term obligations having the same
rating.

The credit risk factor for any resecuritization rated BBB or higher, or S3 or higher, is 200% of
the risk factor applicable to an asset-backed security having the same rating and maturity as the
resecuritization.

The credit risk factor for any securitization exposure that falls within the highest risk category
under Guideline B-5: Asset Securitization is 60%. This category includes securitizations carrying
ratings for which a factor is not specified above, and all unrated securitizations, with the
exception of unrated senior exposures that are eligible for the look-through approach under
Guideline B-5.

Refer to Guideline B-5: Asset Securitization for additional capital requirements that may arise
from securitization exposures.

3.5. Repurchase, reverse repurchase and securities lending agreements

A securities repurchase is an agreement whereby a transferor agrees to sell securities at a
specified price and repurchase the securities on a specified date and at a specified price. Since
the transaction is regarded as a financing for accounting purposes, the securities remain on the
balance sheet. Given that these securities are temporarily assigned to another party, the credit
risk factor associated with this exposure is the higher of:
a. the factor for the securities to be repurchased; or
b. the factor for an exposure to the counterparty to the transaction, recognizing any eligible
collateral (q.v. section 3.2).

A reverse repurchase agreement is the opposite of a repurchase agreement, and involves the
purchase and subsequent resale of a security. Reverse repos are treated as collateralised loans,
reflecting the economic reality of the transaction. The risk is therefore measured as an exposure
to the counterparty. If the asset temporarily acquired is a security that qualifies as eligible
collateral per section 3.2, the exposure amount may be reduced accordingly.

In securities lending, insurers can act as a principal to the transaction by lending their own
securities, or as an agent by lending securities on behalf of their clients. When an insurer lends
its own securities, required capital is the higher of:
a. the required capital for the instruments lent; or
b. the required capital for an exposure to the borrower of the securities. The exposure to the
borrower may be reduced if the insurer holds eligible collateral (section 3.2). Where the
insurer lends securities through an agent and receives an explicit guarantee of the return
of the securities, the insurer may treat the agent as the borrower, subject to the conditions
in section 3.3.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 68
When an insurer, acting as agent, lends securities on behalf of a client and guarantees that the
securities lent will be returned or the insurer will reimburse the client for the current market
value, the insurer should calculate the required capital as if it were the principal to the
transaction. The required capital is that for an exposure to the borrower of the securities, where
the exposure amount may be reduced if the insurer holds eligible collateral (q.v. section 3.2).

The methodologies described above do not apply to repurchases or loans of securities backing an
insurer’s index-linked products, as defined in section 5.5. If an insurer enters into a repurchase or
loan agreement involving such assets, the capital charge is equal to the charge for the exposure to
the counterparty or borrower (taking account of qualifying collateral), plus the charge applicable
under section 5.5.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 69
Appendix 3-A Rating Mappings

Long-term rating
Rating
Category DBRS Fitch Moody’s S&P KBRA JCR R&I
AAA AAA AAA Aaa AAA AAA AAA AAA
AA(high) AA+ to Aa1 to AA+ to AA+ to AA+ to AA+ to
AA
to AA(low) AA- Aa3 AA- AA- AA- AA-
A(high) to
A A+ to A- A1 to A3 A+ to A- A+ to A- A+ to A- A+ to A-
A(low)
BBB(high)
BBB+ to Baa1 to BBB+ to BBB+ to BBB+ to BBB+ to
BBB to
BBB- Baa3 BBB- BBB- BBB- BBB-
BBB(low)
BB(high) to BB+ to Ba1 to BB+ to BB+ to BB+ to BB+ to
BB
BB(low) BB- Ba3 BB- BB- BB- BB-
B(high) to
B B+ to B- B1 to B3 B+ to B- B+ to B- B+ to B- B+ to B-
B(low)
Lower CCC or
Below B- Below B3 Below B- Below B- Below B- Below B-
than B lower

Short-term rating
Rating
Category DBRS Fitch Moody’s S&P KBRA JCR R&I
S1 R-1(high)
to F1+, F1 P-1 A-1+, A-1 K1+, K1 J-1 a-1
R-1(low)
S2 R-2(high)
to F2 P-2 A-2 K2 J-2 a-2
R-2(low)
S3 R-3 F3 P-3 A-3 K3 J-3 a-3
All other Below Below
Below R-3 NP Below K3 NJ Below a-3
F3 A-3

Life A LICAT
October 2018 70
Chapter 4 Credit Risk - Off-Balance Sheet Activities
The term “off-balance sheet activities”, as used in this guideline, encompasses derivatives,
guarantees, commitments, and similar contractual arrangements whose full notional principal
amount may not necessarily be reflected on the balance sheet. Such instruments are subject to a
capital charge under this section irrespective of whether they have been recorded on the balance
sheet at fair value.

The major risk to insurers associated with off-balance sheet activities is the default of the
counterparty to a transaction (i.e., counterparty credit risk). The face amount of an off-balance
sheet instrument does not always reflect the exposure to the credit risk in the instrument. Credit
equivalent amounts are used to determine the potential credit exposure of off-balance sheet
instruments. The process for determining the credit equivalent amounts of derivative instruments
is covered in sections 4.1 and 4.2. For off-balance sheet activities not covered in sections 4.1 and
4.2, to approximate the potential credit exposure, the face amount of the instrument must be
multiplied by a credit conversion factor to derive a credit equivalent amount (qq.v. sections 4.3
and 4.4). The resulting credit equivalent amounts are then assigned the credit risk factor
appropriate to the counterparty (q.v. section 3.1) or, if relevant, the factor for the collateral (q.v.
section 3.2) or the guarantor (q.v. section 3.3). A reduction in required capital for the potential
risk-mitigating effect of dividend reductions or contractual adjustability is calculated separately
for participating and adjustable products (q.v. Chapter 9).

Insurers should also refer to OSFI’s Guideline B-5: Asset Securitization, which outlines the
regulatory framework for asset securitization transactions, including transactions that give rise to
off-balance sheet exposures.

4.1. Over-the-counter derivatives contracts

The treatment of forwards, swaps, purchased options and similar over-the-counter derivatives
contracts is given specific consideration because insurers may not be exposed to credit risk on
the full face value of their contracts (notional principal amount), but only to the potential cost of
replacing the cash flow (on contracts showing a positive value) if the counterparty defaults. The
credit equivalent amounts are calculated using the current exposure method and are assigned the
asset default factor appropriate to the counterparty. Per section 3.1.4, derivatives transactions
with qualifying central counterparties receive an asset default factor of 0%.

The add-on applied in calculating the credit equivalent amount depends on the maturity of the
contract and on the volatility of the rates and prices underlying that type of instrument. Options
purchased over the counter are included with the same conversion factors as other instruments.

A. Interest rate contracts include:

1. single currency interest rate swaps;
2. basis swaps;
3. forward rate agreements and products with similar characteristics;
4. interest rate futures; and

Life A LICAT
October 2018 71
 5. interest rate options purchased.

B. Exchange rate contracts include:

1. gold contracts69;
2. cross-currency swaps;
3. cross-currency interest rate swaps;
4. forward foreign exchange contracts;
5. currency futures; and
6. currency options purchased.

C. Equity contracts include:

1. futures;
2. forwards;
3. swaps;
4. purchased options; and
5. similar derivative contracts based on both individual equities as well as on equity
indices.

D. Precious metals (e.g., silver, platinum and palladium) contracts, except gold contracts,
include:
1. futures;
2. forwards;
3. swaps;
4. purchased options; and
5. similar contracts based on precious metals.

E. Contracts on other commodities include:

1. futures;
2. forwards;
3. swaps;
4. purchased options;
5. similar derivatives contracts based on energy contracts, agricultural contracts,
base metals (e.g., aluminum, copper and zinc); and
6. other non-precious metal commodity contract.

An insurer should calculate the credit equivalent amount of these contracts using the current
exposure method. Under this method, the insurer adds:
1) the total replacement cost (obtained by "marking to market") of all its contracts with
positive value; and

69
Gold contracts are treated the same as exchange rate contracts for the purpose of calculating credit risk.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 72
 2) an amount for potential future credit exposure (or "add-on"). This is calculated by
multiplying the notional principal amounts by the following factors:

Residual Interest Exchange Equity Precious Other

Maturity Rate Rate and Metals Commodities
Gold Except Gold
One year or 0.0% 1.0% 6.0% 7.0% 10.0%
less
Over one year 0.5% 5.0% 8.0% 7.0% 12.0%
to five years
Over five 1.5% 7.5% 10.0% 8.0% 15.0%
years

Additional considerations:

1) For contracts with multiple exchanges of principal, the factors are multiplied by the
number of remaining payments in the contract.
2) For contracts that are structured to settle outstanding exposure following specified
payment dates and where the terms are reset so that the market value of the contract is
zero on these specified dates, the residual maturity is considered to be the time until the
next reset date. In the case of interest rate contracts with remaining maturities of more
than one year and that meet these criteria, the add-on factor is subject to a floor of 0.5%.
3) Contracts not covered by any of the columns of this matrix are to be treated as "other
commodities".
4) No add-on factor should be calculated for single currency floating/floating interest rate
swaps; the credit exposure on these contracts is evaluated solely on the basis of their
mark-to-market value.
5) The add-ons are based on effective rather than stated notional amounts. In the event that
the stated notional amount is leveraged or enhanced by the structure of the transaction,
insurers should use the actual or effective notional amount when determining potential
future exposure. For example, a stated notional amount of $1 million with payments
calculated at two times LIBOR has an effective notional amount of $2 million.
6) Add-ons for potential future credit exposure are to be calculated for all over the counter
(OTC) contracts (with the exception of single currency floating/floating interest rate
swaps), regardless of whether the replacement cost is positive or negative.
7) No add-on for potential future exposure is required for credit derivatives. The credit
equivalent amount for a credit derivative is equal to the greater of its mark-to-market
value or zero.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 73
4.2. Netting of derivative contracts
4.2.1. Conditions for netting

Insurers may net contracts that are subject to novation or any other legally valid form of netting.
Novation refers to a written bilateral contract between two counterparties under which any
obligation to each other to deliver a given currency on a given date is automatically amalgamated
with all other obligations for the same currency and value date, legally substituting one single
amount for the previous gross obligations.

Insurers who wish to net transactions under either novation or another form of bilateral netting
will need to satisfy OSFI that the following conditions are met:
1) The insurer has executed a written bilateral netting contract or agreement with each
counterparty that creates a single legal obligation covering all included bilateral
transactions subject to netting. The result of such an arrangement is that the insurer only
has one obligation for payment or one claim to receive funds based on the net sum of the
positive and negative mark-to-market values of all the transactions with that counterparty
in the event that counterparty fails to perform due to default, bankruptcy, liquidation or
similar circumstances.
2) The insurer has written and reasoned legal opinions that, in the event of any legal
challenge, the relevant courts or administrative authorities would find the exposure under
the netting agreement to be the net amount under the laws of all relevant jurisdictions. In
reaching this conclusion, legal opinions must address the validity and enforceability of
the entire netting agreement under its terms.
a. The laws of “all relevant jurisdictions” are: a) the law of the jurisdictions where
the counterparties are incorporated and, if the foreign branch of a counterparty is
involved, the laws of the jurisdiction in which the branch is located; b) the law
governing the individual transactions; and c) the law governing any contracts or
agreements required to effect netting.
b. A legal opinion must be generally recognized as such by the legal community in
the firm’s home country or by a memorandum of law that addresses all relevant
issues in a reasoned manner.
3) The insurer has internal procedures to verify that, prior to recognizing a transaction as
being subject to netting for capital purposes, the transaction is covered by legal opinions
that meet the above criteria.
4) The insurer has procedures in place to update legal opinions as necessary to ensure
continuing enforceability of the netting arrangements in light of possible changes in
relevant law.
5) The insurer maintains all required documentation and makes it available to OSFI upon
request.

Any contract containing a walkaway clause will not be eligible to qualify for netting for the
purpose of calculating capital requirements. A walkaway clause is a provision within the contract

Life A LICAT
October 2018 74
that permits a non-defaulting counterparty to make only limited payments, or no payments, to the
defaulter.

4.2.2. Calculation of exposure

Credit exposure on bilaterally netted forwards, swaps, purchased options and similar derivatives
transactions is calculated as the sum of the net mark-to-market replacement cost, if positive, plus
a potential future credit exposure (an “add-on”) based on the notional principal of the individual
underlying contracts. However, for purposes of calculating potential future credit exposure of
contracts subject to legally enforceable netting agreements in which notional principal is
equivalent to cash flows, notional principal is defined as the net receipts falling due on each
value date in each currency.

These contracts are treated as a single contract because offsetting contracts in the same currency
maturing on the same date will have lower replacement cost as well as lower potential future
credit exposure. For multilateral netting schemes, current exposure (i.e., replacement cost) is a
function of the loss allocation rules of the clearing house.

The calculation of the gross add-ons is based on the legal cash flow obligations in all currencies.
This is calculated by netting all receivable and payable amounts in the same currency for each
value date. The netted cash flow obligations are converted to the reporting currency using the
current forward rates for each value date. Once converted the amounts receivable for the value
date are added together and the gross add-on is calculated by multiplying the receivable amount
by the appropriate add-on factor.

The potential future credit exposure for netted transactions (ANet) is equal to the sum of:
(i) 40% of the add-on as presently calculated (AGross)70; and
(ii) 60% of AGross multiplied by NPR, where NPR is the level of net replacement cost divided
by the level of positive replacement cost for transactions subject to legally enforceable
netting agreements.

The calculation of NPR can be made on a counterparty-by-counterparty basis or on an aggregate

basis for all transactions subject to legally enforceable netting agreements. On a counterparty-by-
counterparty basis a unique NPR is calculated for each counterparty. On an aggregate basis, one
NPR is calculated and applied to all counterparties.

Steps for determining the credit equivalent amount of netted contracts

1) For each counterparty subject to bilateral netting, determine the add-ons and replacement
costs of each transaction. A worksheet similar to that set out below could be used for this
purpose:

70 Agross equals the sum of the potential future credit exposures (i.e., notional principal amount of each transaction
times the appropriate add-on factors from section 4.1) for all transactions subject to legally enforceable netting
agreements.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 75
 Counterparty

Transaction Notional Add-on Potential Future Positive Negative

Principal X Factor = Credit Replacement Replacement
Amount (ref. 4.1) Exposure Cost Cost
1
2
3
etc.
Total Agross R+ R-

2) Calculate the net replacement cost for each counterparty.

This is equal to the greater of:
a. zero; or
b. the sum of the positive and negative replacement costs (R+ + R-).

Negative replacement costs for one counterparty cannot be used to offset positive
replacement costs for another counterparty.

3) Calculate the NPR.

For companies using the counterparty by counterparty basis, the NPR is the net
replacement cost (from step 2) divided by the positive replacement cost (amount R+
calculated in step 1).

For companies using the aggregate basis, the NPR is the sum of the net replacement costs
of all counterparties subject to bilateral netting divided by the sum of the positive
replacement costs for all counterparties subject to bilateral netting.

Example: NPR Ratio Calculation

Transaction Counterparty 1 Counterparty 2 Counterparty 3

Notional Mark to Notional Mark to Notional Mark to
amount Market amount market amount market
Value value value
Transaction 1 100 10 50 8 30 -3
Transaction 2 100 -5 50 2 30 1
+
Positive replacement cost (R ) 10 10 1
Net replacement cost (NR) 5 10 0
NPR (per counterparty) 0.5 1 0
NPR (aggregate) NR/R = 15/21 = 0.71
+

Life A LICAT
October 2018 76
 4) Calculate ANet.

ANet must be calculated for each counterparty subject to bilateral netting; however, the
NPR applied will depend on whether the insurer is using the counterparty by counterparty
basis or the aggregate basis. The insurer should choose which basis it will use and then
use it consistently for all netted transactions.

ANet is given by: 


(0.4  Agross)  (0.6  NPR  Agross) for netted contracts where

 the net replacemen t cost is  0
ANet  

 0.4  Agross for netted contracts where


 the net replacemen t cost  0

5) Calculate the credit equivalent amount for each counterparty by adding the net
replacement cost (step 2) and ANet (step 4).

Note: Contracts may be subject to netting among different types of derivative instruments
(e.g., interest rate, foreign exchange and equity). If this is the case, allocate the net
replacement cost to the types of derivative instrument by pro-rating the net
replacement cost among those instrument types which have a gross positive
replacement cost.

Example: Netting for Potential Future Credit Exposure with Contracts Subject to
Novation

Assume an institution has 6 contracts with the same counterparty and has a legally enforceable
netting agreement with that counterparty:

Contract Notional Principal Marked to

Amount Market
A 10 1
B 20 -2
C 10 -1
D 40 4
E 30 3
F 20 -2

Contracts A and B are subject to novation, as are contracts C and D. Under novation, the two
contracts are replaced by one new contract. Therefore, to calculate the capital requirements,
the institution would replace contracts A and B for contract A+ and contracts C and D for
contract C+, netting the notional amounts and calculating a new marked to market amount.LICAT
Life A
October 2018 77
 Contract Notional Principal Marked to
Amount Market
A+ 10 -1
C+ 30 3
E 30 3
F 20 -2

Assume the add-on factor for all contracts is 5%. The potential future credit exposure is
calculated for each contract. AGross is the sum of the potential future credit exposures:

Contract Notional Add-on Potential Positive Negative

Principal Factor Credit Replacement Replacement
Amount (5%) Exposure Cost Cost
A+ 10 .05 0.5 0 -1
C+ 30 .05 1.5 3 0
E 30 .05 1.5 3 0
F 20 .05 1.0 0 -2
Total 4.5 6 -3

The net replacement cost is (6 – 3 =) 3; the greater of zero or the sum of the positive and
negative replacement costs.

The NPR is (3 / 6 =) 0.5; the net replacement cost divided by the positive replacement cost.

ANet is then ((0.4*4.5) + (0.6*0.5*4.5) =) 3.15.

The credit equivalent amount is (3 + 3.15 =) 6.15; the net replacement cost plus ANet.

4.3. Off-balance sheet instruments other than derivatives

The definitions in this section apply to off-balance sheet exposures other than derivatives
included in section 4.1.

4.3.1. Direct credit substitutes (100% conversion factor)

Direct credit substitutes include guarantees or equivalent instruments backing financial claims.
With a direct credit substitute, the risk of loss to the insurer is directly dependent on the
creditworthiness of the counterparty.

Examples of direct credit substitutes include:

1) guarantees given on behalf of customers to stand behind the financial obligations of the
customer and to satisfy these obligations should the customer fail to do so; for example,
guarantees of:

Life A LICAT
October 2018 78
 a. payment for existing indebtedness for services,
b. payment with respect to a purchase agreement,
c. lease, loan or mortgage payments,
d. payment of uncertified cheques,
e. remittance of (sales) tax to the government,
f. payment of existing indebtedness for merchandise purchased,
g. payment of an unfunded pension liability, and
h. financial obligations undertaken through reinsurance;
2) standby letters of credit or other equivalent irrevocable obligations, serving as financial
guarantees, such as letters of credit supporting the issue of commercial paper;
3) risk participations in bankers' acceptances and financial letters of credit. Risk
participations constitute a guarantee by the participating institutions such that, if there is a
default by the underlying obligor, they will indemnify the creditor for the full principal
and interest attributable to them;
4) securities lending transactions, where an insurer acting as an agent lends securities on
behalf of a client and is liable for any failure to recover the securities lent.

4.3.2. Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements (100% conversion factor)

A repurchase agreement is a transaction that involves the sale of a security or other asset with the
simultaneous commitment by the seller that after a stated period of time, the seller will
repurchase the asset from the original buyer at a pre-determined price. A reverse repurchase
agreement consists of the purchase of a security or other asset with the simultaneous
commitment by the buyer that after a stated period of time, the buyer will resell the asset to the
original seller at a predetermined price. In any circumstance where these transactions are not
reported on-balance sheet, they should be reported as an off-balance sheet exposure with a 100%
credit conversion factor.

4.3.3. Forward asset purchases71 (100% conversion factor)

A commitment to purchase a loan, security or other asset at a specified future date, usually on
prearranged terms.

4.3.4. Forward-forward deposits (100% conversion factor)

An agreement between two parties whereby one will pay and the other will receive an agreed
rate of interest on a deposit to be placed by one party with the other at some predetermined date
in the future. Such agreements are distinct from futures and forward rate agreements in that, with
forward-forwards, the deposit is actually placed.

71
This does not include a spot transaction that is contracted to settle within the normal settlement period.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 79
4.3.5. Partly paid shares and securities (100% conversion factor)

The unpaid portion of transactions where only a part of the issue price or notional face value of a
security purchased has been subscribed and the issuer may call for the outstanding balance (or a
further instalment), either on a date predetermined at the time of issue or at an unspecified future
date.

4.3.6. Transaction-related contingencies (50% conversion factor)

Transaction-related contingencies relate to the ongoing business activities of a counterparty,

where the risk of loss to the insurer depends on the likelihood of a future event that is
independent of the creditworthiness of the counterparty. Essentially, transaction-related
contingencies are guarantees that support particular performance of non-financial or commercial
contracts or undertakings rather than supporting customers' general financial obligations.
Performance-related guarantees specifically exclude items relating to non-performance of
financial obligations.

Performance-related and non-financial guarantees include items such as performance bonds,

warranties and indemnities, and performance standby letters of credit. These represent
obligations backing the performance of non-financial or commercial contracts or undertakings
and can include arrangements backing:
a. subcontractors' and suppliers' performance,
b. labour and material contracts,
c. delivery of merchandise, bids or tender bonds,
d. guarantees of repayment of deposits or prepayments in cases of non-performance;

4.3.7 Trade-related contingencies (20% conversion factor)

These include short-term self-liquidating trade-related items such as commercial and

documentary letters of credit issued by the insurer that are, or are to be, collateralized by the
underlying shipment.

Letters of credit issued on behalf of a counterparty back to back with letters of credit of which
the counterparty is a beneficiary ("back-to-back" letters) should be reported as documentary
letters of credit.

Letters of credit advised by the insurer for which the insurer is acting as an agent should not be
considered a risk asset.

4.4. Commitments
Commitments are arrangements that obligate an insurer, at a counterparty’s request, to:
1) extend credit in the form of loans or participations in loans, lease financing receivables,
mortgages, overdrafts, acceptances, letters of credit, guarantees or loan substitutes; or
2) purchase loans, securities, receivables, or other assets.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 80
The risk in undertaking a commitment is that an insurer may be required to extend credit or
purchase assets at worse-than-market terms. The presence of a form of consideration, such as a
commitment fee, would normally indicate that an insurer is providing a potential financial
benefit to a third party for which capital is required.

Commitments for which an insurer has an absolute right of refusal, has the unfettered right to set
the loan interest rate at time of exercise, or for which the asset purchase price is fair market value
are not subject to a capital requirement. Commitments exclude undrawn policy loans, i.e., part of
a policy's cash value that has not been taken in the form of a policy loan.

4.4.1. Maturity

Insurers should use original maturity (as defined below) to report commitments.

4.4.1.1. Original maturity

The maturity of a commitment should be measured from the date when the commitment was
accepted by the customer, regardless of whether the commitment is revocable or irrevocable,
conditional or unconditional, until the earliest date on which:
a. the commitment is scheduled to expire; or
b. the insurer can, at its option, unconditionally cancel the commitment.

A material adverse change clause is not considered to give sufficient protection for a
commitment to be considered unconditionally cancellable.

Where the insurer commits to granting a facility at a future date (a forward commitment), the
original maturity of the commitment is to be measured from the date the commitment is accepted
until the final date that drawdowns are permitted.

4.4.1.2. Renegotiations of a commitment

If both parties agree, a commitment may be renegotiated before its term expires. If the
renegotiation process involves a credit assessment of the customer consistent with the insurer's
credit standards, and provides the insurer with the total discretion to renew or extend the
commitment and to change any other terms and conditions of the commitment, then on the date
of acceptance by the customer of the revised terms and conditions, the original commitment may
be deemed to have matured and a new commitment begun. If new terms are not reached, the
original commitment will remain in force until its original maturity date. This process must be
clearly documented.

In syndicated and participated transactions, a participating insurer should be able to exercise its
renegotiation rights independent of the other syndicate members.

Where these conditions are not met, the original start date of the commitment must be used to
determine maturity.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 81
4.4.2. Credit conversion factors

The credit conversion factor applied to a commitment is dependent on its maturity. Longer
maturity commitments are considered to be of higher risk because there is a longer period
between credit reviews and less opportunity to withdraw the commitment if the credit quality of
the drawer deteriorates.

Conversion factors apply to commitments as set out below.

50% conversion factor

a. Commitments and forward commitments with an original maturity of over one year;
b. Note issuance facilities and revolving underwriting facilities (q.v. section 4.4.3.6).
c. The undrawn portion of a commitment to provide a loan that will be drawn down in a
number of tranches, some less than and some over one year.
20% conversion factor
a. Commitments and forward commitments with an original maturity of one year and
under.
0% conversion factor
a. Commitments that are unconditionally cancellable at any time by the insurer without
notice or that effectively provide for automatic cancellation due to deterioration in the
borrower’s creditworthiness. This implies that the insurer conducts a review of the
facility at least annually, thus giving it an opportunity to take note of any perceived
deterioration in credit quality. Retail commitments are unconditionally cancellable if
the terms permit the insurer to cancel them fully and this is allowable under consumer
protection and related legislation.

4.4.3. Specific types of commitments

4.4.3.1. Undated/open-ended commitments

A 0% credit conversion factor is applied to undated or open-ended commitments that are
unconditionally cancellable at any time without notice, which may include unused credit card
lines, personal lines of credit, and overdraft protection for personal chequing accounts.

4.4.3.2. Evergreen commitments

Open-ended commitments that are cancellable by the insurer at any time subject to a notice
period do not constitute unconditionally cancellable commitments and are converted at 50%.
Long-term commitments must be cancellable without notice to be eligible for the 0% conversion
factor.

4.4.3.3. Commitments drawn down in a number of tranches

A 50% credit conversion factor is applied to a commitment to provide a loan (or purchase an
asset) to be drawn down in a number of related tranches, some one year and under and some over
one year. In these cases, the ability to renegotiate the terms of later tranches should be regarded

Life A LICAT
October 2018 82
as immaterial. For example, such commitments may be provided for development projects from
which the insurer may find it difficult to withdraw without jeopardizing its investment.

Where the facility involves unrelated tranches, and where conversions are permitted between the
over- and under-one-year tranches (i.e., where the borrower may make ongoing selections as to
how much of the commitment is under one year and how much is over), then the entire
commitment should be converted at 50%.

Where the facility involves unrelated tranches with no conversion between the over- and under-
one-year tranches, then each tranche may be converted separately, depending on its maturity.

4.4.3.4. Commitments for fluctuating amounts

For commitments that vary in amount over the life of the commitment, such as the financing of a
business subject to seasonal variation in cash flow, the conversion factor should apply to the
maximum unutilized amount that can be drawn under the remaining period of the facility.

4.4.3.5. Commitment to provide a loan with a maturity of over one year

A commitment to provide a loan that has a maturity of over one year but that must be drawn
down within a period of less than one year may be treated as an under-one-year instrument, as
long as any undrawn portion of the facility is automatically cancelled at the end of the drawdown
period.

However, if through any combination of drawdowns, repayments, re-drawdowns, or other

options, the client can access a line of credit past one year, with no opportunity for the insurer to
unconditionally cancel the commitment within one year, the commitment is converted at 50%.

4.4.3.6. Note issuance/revolving underwriting facilities

Note issuance facilities and revolving underwriting facilities are arrangements whereby a
borrower may issue short-term notes, typically three to six months in maturity, up to a prescribed
limit over an extended period of time, commonly by means of repeated offerings to a tender
panel. If at any time the notes are not sold by the tender at an acceptable price, an underwriter (or
group of underwriters) undertakes to buy them at a prescribed price.

4.4.3.7. Commitments for off-balance sheet transactions

Where there is a commitment to provide an off-balance sheet item, companies are to apply the
lower of the two applicable credit conversion factors.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 83
Chapter 5 Market Risk
Market risk arises from potential changes in rates or prices in various markets such as those for
bonds, foreign currency, equities and commodities. Exposure to this risk stems from investment
and other business activities that create on- and off-balance sheet positions. Market risk in the
LICAT includes interest rate, equity, real estate, and currency risks. A reduction in required
capital for the potential risk-mitigating effect of dividend reductions or contractual adjustability
is calculated separately for participating and adjustable products (q.v. Chapter 9).

Risks associated with segregated fund guarantees are covered in Chapter 7. Consequently, with
the exception of the requirements for hedges in sections 5.2.3 and 5.2.4, liabilities for segregated
fund guarantees, assets backing these liabilities under CALM (including hedges), and assets held
in segregated funds by an insurer’s policyholders (and the corresponding liabilities) are not
subject to the requirements of this chapter.

Sections 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4 relate to market risks associated with particular assets. These sections
do not apply to assets backing index-linked products that are included in the correlation factor
calculation in section 5.5. Investment income due and accrued on assets subject to market risk is
reported with, and receives the same factor as, the asset to which it relates.

A commitment to purchase a traded asset that is subject to market risk should be treated as a sold
put option under section 5.2.3.3. The capital requirement for a commitment to purchase a non-
traded asset is equal to the product of the applicable credit conversion factor from section 4.4, the
applicable market risk factor, and the amount of the commitment.

Assets held in composite insurance subsidiaries may be subject to the market risk requirements
of either the LICAT guideline or the MCT guideline51; the interest rate risk and currency risk
requirements for a composite subsidiary are determined using the same guideline as used for
assets that do not back CALM liabilities. If MCT requirements are used for interest rate risk and
currency risk, they are calculated at the MCT target level, and are not divided by 1.5.

5.1 Interest rate risk

Interest rate risk is the risk of economic loss resulting from market changes in interest rates. The
most significant aspect of this risk is the net effect of potential changes in interest rates on the
values of interest-sensitive assets and liabilities whose cash flows may be mismatched.

A projected cash flow methodology is used to measure the economic impact of sudden interest
rate shocks. Required capital for interest rate risk is calculated as the maximum loss under four
different prescribed stress scenarios. For each scenario, the loss is defined as the decrease in the
insurer’s net position after revaluing asset and liability cash flows by changing the discount rates
from those of the initial scenario to those of the stress scenario. The net position used to measure
the loss in each scenario is equal to the difference between the present values of asset cash flows
(including assets backing capital or surplus) and liability cash flows. Required capital for interest
rate risk is calculated for each geographic region (Canada, the United States, the United
Kingdom, Europe other than the United Kingdom, Japan, and other locations).

Life A LICAT
October 2018 84
5.1.1 Initial scenario discount rates

Initial Scenario Discount Rates are defined in terms of risk-free interest rates plus a spread, with
the sum grading to an ultimate interest rate (UIR) plus an ultimate spread. Initial Scenario
Discount Rates are prescribed for Canada, the United States, the United Kingdom, Europe other
than the United Kingdom, and Japan. The Initial Scenario Discount Rates for other locations are
the same as for the United States.

Risk-free interest rates are based on the following:

 Canada – the spot rates for Government of Canada bonds;
 The United States – the spot rates for applicable United States treasuries;
 The United Kingdom – the spot rates for United Kingdom sovereign benchmark bonds;
 Europe other than the United Kingdom – the spot rates for Government of Germany
bonds; and
 Japan – the spot rates for Government of Japan bonds.

The UIR for Canada, the United States, and the United Kingdom is a spot rate of 4.5%. The
UIRs for Europe other than the United Kingdom and for Japan are 2.8% and 1.0%, respectively.

The risk-free spot interest rates used in the initial scenario are determined as follows:
1) For cash flows from year 0 to year 20, the interest rate is the published risk-free spot rate;
2) For cash flows between years 20 and 70, the interest rate is linearly interpolated between
the 20-year spot discount rate and the UIR;
3) For cash flows at year 70 and beyond, the interest rate is the UIR.

The spread is defined as follows:

1) From year 0 to year 20, the spread is 90% of the corresponding market average spread;
2) Between year 20 and year 70, the spread grades linearly from 90% of the 20-year market
average spread to an ultimate spread of 80 basis points;
3) At year 70 and beyond, the spread is 80 basis points.

The market average spreads between years 0 and 20 are determined using market spreads at the
valuation date based on a recognized investment-grade corporate bond index chosen by the
insurer. The index used must be published by a reliable information provider, should be used
consistently from period to period, and should be disclosed in the LICAT memorandum. In order
to be recognized, an investment-grade corporate bond index must meet the following criteria:
1) The index is composed only of corporate bonds with a rating of BBB or better;
2) The index contains a representative selection of the entire investment-grade corporate
bond universe in the jurisdiction that it covers (e.g., the rating distribution and sector
distribution is aligned with that of the broad investment grade corporate bond market in
the jurisdiction); and

Life A LICAT
October 2018 85
 3) The index is produced by a reliable72 index provider.

Determination of Initial Scenario Discount Rates

The following illustrates the calculation of risk-free spot rates and market spreads for both par and
non-par blocks of business.

Risk-free spot rates

Step 1: Gather Par73 Risk-Free Yields

Insurers would first collect par risk-free (semi-annual) yields. These yields are available from
several sources, including but not limited to the following:

 Yields for Canadian treasuries with maturities of 10 years or less: One source where these rates
can be found is the Bank of Canada’s website:
o Treasury bills (for maturities of one-year or less):
http://www.bankofcanada.ca/rates/interest-rates/t-bill-yields/selected-treasury-bill-yields-
10-year-lookup/
o Treasury bonds (for maturities greater than one-year):
http://www.bankofcanada.ca/rates/interest-rates/lookup-bond-yields/

The series codes for the relevant maturities are:

Duration Series
3 month V39065
6 month V39066
1 year V39067
2 year V39051
3 year V39052
5 year V39053
7 year V39054
10 year V39055

 Yields for Canadian treasuries with maturities of over 10 years: One source where these rates
can be found is http://www.investing.com/rates-bonds/canada-20-year-bond-yield-historical-
data. For example, the rate for December 31, 20xx can be found under the “Price” column for
“Dec xx”.

72
A “reliable” index provider would, at a minimum, construct benchmarks that (1) use a transparent and objective
process (2) are an accurate representation of the target market segment and (3) use a rebalancing approach that
reflects market changes in a timely and orderly fashion.
73
“Par” in this context refers to yields for securities priced at par with the relevant maturities, and not to
participating business.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 86
 Yields for US treasuries: One source where these yields can be found is the United States’
Department of the Treasury website: https://www.treasury.gov/resource-center/data-chart-
center/interest-rates/Pages/TextView.aspx?data=yield
 Bloomberg: Insurers with access to Bloomberg could obtain sovereign benchmark par bond
yields which may be appropriate for the five LICAT geographic regions under the following
curve codes:

Geographic Region Curve Code Curve Name

Canada I7 CAD Canada Sovereign Curve
United States I25 US Treasury Actives Curve
United Kingdom I22 GBP United Kingdom Sovereign Curve
Europe other than UK I16 EUR German Sovereign Curve
Japan I18 JPY Japan Sovereign Curve

For example, Canadian sovereign par yields could be obtained by:

 Entering “GC I7”;
 Setting the curve date to the appropriate quarter end date;
 Retrieving the “Mid-YTM (yield-to-maturity)” by hovering over each maturity in the
graphed curve or by exporting the data into Excel.

Although yields obtained above are tied to a specific currency, it is assumed that they are
appropriate for use for all business within a geographic region (e.g., Euro yields are used for all
business within Europe).

Step 2: Convert Par Yields to Spot Rates

The following formulas would be used to convert par semi-annual yields to spot rates (zero coupon
yields):

1
1 , if 𝑡 = 1
1+ 𝑌𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑑 2

𝑃𝑉𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟,𝑡 = 2 𝑝𝑎𝑟 𝑠𝑒𝑚𝑖,𝑡

1 , if 𝑡 > 1
{(1 + 𝑌𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑑𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜 𝑐𝑜𝑢𝑝𝑜𝑛,𝑡)𝑡 2

𝑡×2−1
𝑌𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑑𝑝𝑎𝑟 𝑠𝑒𝑚𝑖,𝑡
𝑃𝑉𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑡 𝑝𝑎𝑦𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡,𝑡 = 100 (1 − 2
∑ 𝑃𝑉𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟,𝑛⁄2)
𝑛=1

𝑌𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑑𝑝𝑎𝑟 𝑠𝑒𝑚𝑖,𝑡 1
𝑌𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑑 = [100 × (1 + )/𝑃𝑉 ] 𝑡− 1
𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜 𝑐𝑜𝑢𝑝𝑜𝑛,𝑡 2 𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑡 𝑝𝑎𝑦𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡,𝑡
Life A LICAT
October 2018 87
Risk-free par yields that are not obtained directly can be inferred using linear interpolation (i.e. for
durations 4, 6, etc.). The resulting quantities 𝑌𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑑𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜 𝑐𝑜𝑢𝑝𝑜𝑛,𝑡 for 𝑡 = 1, 2, … , 20 as determined
above would constitute the risk-free spot rate curve.

Market spreads

Step 1: Select an Investment-Grade Corporate Bond Index

The following are examples of indices that could be found to meet the criteria for recognition as an
investment-grade corporate bond index:

Geographic Index
Region
Canada  FTSE TMX All Corporate Bond Index
United  Barclays USD Liquid Investment Grade Corporate Index
States  Bank of America Merrill Lynch US Corporate Bond Index
 Citi Corporate Investment Grade Index
 Bloomberg USD Investment Grade Corporate Bond Index (Bloomberg
curve code: BS76)
United  S&P UK Investment Grade Corporate Bond Index
Kingdom
Europe  S&P Eurozone Investment Grade Corporate Bond Index
other than  Bloomberg EUR Investment Grade European Corporate Bond Index
UK (Bloomberg curve code: BS78)

Step 2: Gather Par Investment-Grade Corporate Bond Yields

Similar to the process described above for gathering par risk-free yields, investment-grade corporate
bond yields should be collected from the appropriate source for the relevant maturities (i.e. 3
months, 6 months, 1 year, 2 years, etc.). Insurers would use as many maturities as are available, and
would only use fewer if constrained by the data source.

As an example, United States corporate bond par yields could be obtained in Bloomberg by:
 Entering “GC BS76”;
 Setting the curve date to the appropriate quarter-end date;
 Retrieving the “Mid-YTM” by hovering over each maturity in the graphed curve or by
exporting the data into Excel.

There are a number of jurisdictions (e.g. Canada, United Kingdom and Japan) for which an insurer
may not be able to find pre-constructed investment-grade corporate bond curves that provide the
necessary information. For these jurisdictions, an insurer could use a curve building tool to collect
the required bond yields. More generally, an insurer could extract the data for each constituent of an
index and construct the curve by applying appropriate filters and using an appropriate curve fitting

Life A LICAT
October 2018 88
model. For example, a Canadian investment-grade corporate bond curve could be constructed using
Bloomberg’s curve building tool and the following procedures:
 Enter “SRCH”;
 Select “Asset Classes – Corporates”;
 Apply the following filters:
o Security Status: Active
o Country of Incorporation: Canada
o Currency: Canadian Dollar
o Maturity Type: Bullet or Callable or Puttable
o Coupon Type: Fixed
o Security Type: Exclude Inflation-Linked Note
o BICS Classification: Exclude government
o Bloomberg Composite Rating: Investment Grade
 Remove outliers (if appropriate);
 Click “Actions” and save the curve;
 Enter “CRV”;
 Click on “Fitted Curve”;
 Select “Bond Search”;
 Select the saved curve;
 Click “Construct Curve”;
 Select Regression: N-S-S (Nelson-Siegel-Svensson) to fit the curve;
 Save the curve;
 Enter “GC” and the curve name from the previous screen;
 Specify the appropriate quarter-end date;
 Retrieve the “Mid-YTM” by hovering over each maturity in the graphed curve or by
exporting the data into Excel.

Other appropriate filters could apply depending on the nature of the corporate bond market in a
particular jurisdiction. For instance, inflation-linked corporate bonds are quite common in the
United Kingdom and will distort the corporate bond curve. They would therefore be excluded.

Aside from Bloomberg, insurers who subscribe to a data feed from an index provider may receive
the “Mid-YTM” at key maturities for the index as a whole. In some cases, individual bond data for
all bonds in the index are provided. If so, an insurer would apply the appropriate filters (similar to
the ones above) and use an appropriate curve fitting model.

There are many methods by which par yields could be extracted from an index. An insurer would
choose an appropriate method based on the data that it has available (for example, an insurer would
use underlying bond data if available, and would only use summary data, such as Mid-YTM for a
subset of key maturities, if more detailed data were not readily available). In accordance with this

Life A LICAT
October 2018 89
 guideline, the methodology used would be consistent from period-to-period and disclosed in the
LICAT memorandum.

Step 3: Convert Par Investment-Grade Corporate Bond Yields to Spot Rates

The formulas and considerations specified in Step 2 of Risk-free spot rates would be used to
perform this conversion.

5.1.2 Stress scenarios

The present value of all asset and liability cash flows is determined under four prescribed stress
scenarios by discounting them to time zero using stressed discount rates. The stress scenario used
to determine required capital is the one that produces the lowest net present value (i.e., the
difference between the present values of assets and liabilities) for the cash flows after taking
account of recoveries through reductions in participating dividends. The stress scenario that
determines required capital may vary by geographic region.

5.1.2.1 Stress scenario specifications

For each stress scenario, the annualized stressed discount rates are calculated as follows:

1) For discount rates prior to and including year 20, the initial scenario discount rates are
adjusted by calculating:
a. an adjustment to the 90-day discount rate (T or S),
b. an adjustment to the 20-year discount rate (B or C), and
c. adjustments for all periods in between, by applying linear interpolation to the
coefficients used to calculate the adjustments a. and b. above.
2) Between years 20 and 70, stressed discount rates are determined by linearly interpolating
between the adjusted 20-year discount rate and the adjusted ultimate discount rate,
determined in the next step.
3) For year 70 and beyond, an adjustment (L) is made to the ultimate discount rate.

The four stress scenarios are described below, relative to the initial scenario:
1) Decreased short term interest rate (by adding shock T–), decreased long term interest rate
(by adding shock B–), and decreased UIR (by subtracting shock L)
2) Increased short term interest rate (by adding shock S+), increased or decreased long term
interest rate (by adding shock C–), and decreased UIR (by subtracting shock L)
3) Increased short term interest rate (by adding shock T+), increased long term interest rate
(by adding shock B+) and increased UIR (by adding shock L)
4) Decreased short term interest rate (by adding shock S–), increased long term interest rate
(by adding shock C+) and increased UIR (by adding shock L)

Life A LICAT
October 2018 90
The interest rate shocks (T, S, B and C) to be used are the following linear functions of the
square roots of the current risk-free interest rates r floored at 0.5%:

T± = 0.0049 ± 0.139√max(𝑟0.25, 0.005)

S± = 0.0039 ± 0.111√max(𝑟0.25, 0.005)

B± = 0.0028 ± 0.102√max(𝑟20, 0.005)

C± = 0.0023 ± 0.007√max(𝑟20, 0.005)

where 𝑟0.25 is the current 90-day risk-free interest rate, 𝑟20 is the current 20-year risk-free
interest, and all interest rates are expressed as decimals (for example five percent corresponds to
0.05).

The interpolated interest rate shocks under the four stress scenarios can be expressed as:
1) – (0.139468  0.001873t)  (0.00492658  0.00010633t)

2) (0.112699  0.005997 t) max( rt,0.005)  (0.00394084  0.00008336 t)

3) (0.139468  0.001873t) max( rt,0.005)  (0.00492658  0.00010633t)

4) – (0.112699  0.005997 t) max( rt,0.005)  (0.00394084  0.00008336 t)

where 𝑟𝑡 is the time t risk-free interest rate, and t is between 90 days and 20 years.

Initial and stress scenario interest rates are not floored at zero, and no adjustments are made if an
interest rate is negative.

The shock L applied to the UIR, which is a decrease in the first two scenarios and an increase in
the last two scenarios, is 40 basis points for Canada, the United States, the United Kingdom, and
other locations, 25 basis points for Europe other than the United Kingdom, and 20 basis points
for Japan.

5.1.2.2 Determination of the most adverse scenario74

For the purpose of determining the most adverse stress scenario that is used to calculate required
capital, an insurer’s loss under a stress scenario (LSS) within each geographic region should be
calculated as:

𝐿𝑆𝑆 = 𝐼𝑅𝑅non-par gross + ∑ max(𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par gross − 𝐶𝑖 stress, 𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par npt gross, 0)
𝑖

74
An approximation may be used under section 1.4.5.
Life A LICAT
October 2018 91
where:
 𝐼𝑅𝑅non-par gross is the gross interest rate risk requirement for non-participating business
within the region under the stress scenario, equal to the decrease (or the negative of the
increase) in the net present value of the region’s non-participating asset cash flows and
liability cash flows from the initial scenario.
 The summation is taken over all participating blocks within the region (q.v. Chapter 9).
 𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par gross is the gross interest rate risk requirement for a participating block within the
region under the stress scenario, equal to the decrease (or the negative of the increase) in
the net present value of the block’s entire participating asset cash flows and liability cash
flows from the initial scenario. All of the block’s assets and liabilities are included,
irrespective of whether interest rate risk on the assets and liabilities is passed through to
policyholders.
 𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par npt gross is the gross interest rate risk requirement for any of a participating
block’s assets and liabilities whose interest rate risk is not passed through to
policyholders (e.g. surplus, PfADs, and ancillary funds, and/or the assets backing them),
equal to the decrease (or negative of the increase) in the net present value these elements’
cash flows from the initial scenario.
 If losses arising from interest rate risk are recoverable through dividend reductions,
𝐶𝑖 stress is 75% of the present value of restated dividend cash flows for the block used in
the interest rate risk calculation (q.v. section 5.1.3.3), discounted using the rates under the
stress scenario. If losses arising from interest rate risk are not recoverable through
dividend reductions then 𝐶𝑖 stressis zero.

The most adverse scenario used to calculate required capital for interest rate risk in geographic
regions outside Canada and the United States is the scenario that produces the highest value of
LSS as defined above. For Canada and the United States, the same adverse scenario is used to
calculate required capital for interest rate risk in both regions, and is the scenario for which the
value of:

max(𝐿𝑆𝑆Canada, 0) + max(𝐿𝑆𝑆𝑈𝑆, 0)

is greatest.

5.1.2.3 Interest rate risk requirements

Once an insurer has determined the most adverse scenario for each geographic region, the
interest rate risk requirement for non-participating business within the region is equal to:

𝐼𝑅𝑅non-par = max(𝐼𝑅𝑅non-par gross, 0)

under this scenario. The interest rate risk requirement for each block of participating business
within the region before reflecting the effect of participating dividends is equal to:

𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par = max(𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par gross, 0)

Life A LICAT
October 2018 92
under the most adverse scenario.75 The interest rate risk requirement for the non-pass through
portion of a block of participating business, which is used to calculate the par requirement floor
(q.v. section 9.1.2) is equal to:

𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par npt = max( 𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par npt gross, 0)

Although the same scenario is used for Canada and the United States, the interest rate risk
requirements for these regions are calculated separately, under the assumption that gains in one
region do not offset losses in the other.

The interest rate risk requirement for each participating block is used in the calculation of the
standalone requirement for the block (q.v. section 11.2) and the participating credit for the block
(q.v. section 9.1.2). The quantities 𝐶stress used to determine the most adverse scenario must be
consistent with the quantities 𝐶adverse and 𝐾floor used to determine the participating credit for a
block in section 9.1.2.

Example: Interest Rate Risk

The most adverse stress scenario for interest rate risk is determined based on the gain or loss
in a geographic region’s non-par block under each scenario (𝐼𝑅𝑅non-par gross), the gain or loss
in the region’s par blocks (𝐼𝑅𝑅par gross and 𝐼𝑅𝑅par npt gross), and the amount of dividends
available to pass through any interest rate losses in the par block (𝐶stress). The quantities
𝐼𝑅𝑅non-par gross, 𝐼𝑅𝑅par gross, and 𝐼𝑅𝑅par npt gross are the gross capital requirements for the non-
par and par blocks without any floors. They will consequently be positive if there is a loss in
the block under a scenario, and negative if there is a gain in the block under a scenario.
The premises underlying the scenario loss measure 𝐿𝑆𝑆 are that any gains in a par block will
ultimately be passed on to policyholders (and hence cannot be used to offset non-par losses),
and that losses in the par block under a scenario should not be counted if they can be passed
onto policyholders via dividends.

In the situation in which all interest rate risk is passed through to policyholders and an insurer
has ample dividends available to absorb losses in its par blocks, the most adverse stress
scenario will be determined solely by the gains or losses in the non-par block under each

75
If the gross interest rate risk requirement for a participating block is positive under the most adverse scenario, an
insurer may optionally choose to treat the block as non-participating under this scenario. If the insurer does so
then:
i) The gross interest rate risk requirement for the participating block (without any reduction for dividends)
is added to the gross interest rate risk requirement for non-participating business before the non-
participating requirement is floored at zero, and
ii) The interest rate risk requirement for the participating block used in the calculation of the standalone
requirement and participating credit for the block is set to zero.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 93
scenario, since the terms max(𝐼𝑅𝑅par gross − 𝐶stress, 𝐼𝑅𝑅par npt gross, 0) will be zero in all
scenarios.
For example, if there is only one par block in a geographic region with no non-pass through
elements, and the values of 𝐼𝑅𝑅non-par gross, 𝐼𝑅𝑅par gross and 𝐶stress under each scenario are as
follows:
Scenario 𝑰𝑹𝑹non-par gross 𝑰𝑹𝑹par gross 𝑪stress LSS
1 800 800 5,000 800
2 1,400 -100 5,500 1,400
3 -600 2,500 4,000 -600
4 1,000 -700 3,000 1,000

then the most adverse stress scenario is scenario 2. Based on this scenario, the insurer will use
a value of 𝐼𝑅𝑅non-par = 1,400 for the interest rate risk requirement in the calculation of
𝐾non-par, a value of 𝐼𝑅𝑅par = 0 for interest rate risk in the calculation of 𝐾, 𝐾floor and
𝐾reduced interes𝑡 for the par block, and a value of 𝐶adverse = 5,500 in the calculation of the credit
for the par block.
If the amount of par dividends available is low, or dividends cannot be used to pass through
interest rate risk, then losses in the par block could affect the determination of the most
adverse stress scenario. For example, if 𝐶stress under the scenarios changes as follows:

𝑰𝑹𝑹non-par gross 𝑰𝑹𝑹par gross Scenario Loss

Scenario 𝑪stress
Measure
1 800 800 90 1,510
2 1,400 -100 100 1,400
3 -600 2,500 80 1,820
4 1,000 -700 50 1,000

then the most adverse stress scenario is scenario 3. Based on this scenario, the insurer will use
a value of 𝐼𝑅𝑅non-par = 0 for the interest rate risk requirement in the calculation of 𝐾non-par, a
value of 𝐼𝑅𝑅par = 2,500 for interest rate risk in the calculation of 𝐾, 𝐾floor and 𝐾reduced interes𝑡
for the par block, and a value of 𝐶adverse = 80 in the calculation of the credit for the par block.
However, in this situation it will likely be to the insurer’s advantage to treat the par block as
non-participating for interest rate risk. If it does so, it will use an interest rate risk requirement
of 𝐼𝑅𝑅non-par = 1,900 in the calculation of 𝐾non-par, and an interest rate risk requirement of
𝐼𝑅𝑅par = 0 in the calculation of 𝐾, 𝐾floor and 𝐾reduced interes𝑡 for the par block, with 𝐶adverse still
equal to 80.
Note that if an insurer has dividends available but uses a value of 0 for 𝐶stress in all scenarios to
determine the most adverse stress scenario because it is unable to pass through interest rate
risk, it should use 100% of the par interest rate risk requirement in the calculation of 𝐾floor.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 94
5.1.3 Projection of cash flows74

Cash flows are determined at the reporting date, and are projected net of all reinsurance (i.e., if
all or a portion of an insurance liability corresponds to an on-balance sheet reinsurance asset,
then the matching liability and asset are excluded from projected cash flows)76. No reinvestment
of any asset cash flows should be assumed. Liability cash flows should incorporate insurance
MfADs projected under CALM. Projected asset and liability cash flows (except for participating,
adjustable, index-linked pass-through liability, and future income tax cash flows) that are interest
sensitive should be changed to be consistent with the interest rate scenario.

For participating, adjustable, index-linked risk pass through (RPT) and non-interest sensitive
products, the same liability cash flows are used for all interest scenarios. For participating
products, restated dividend cash flows should be projected using the methodology described in
section 5.1.3.3, and all other cash flows should be projected based on Best Estimate Assumptions
with the addition of insurance risk MfADs. Adjustments to cash flows should not be made for
anticipated reductions or increases in dividends that may result from increases or decreases in
interest rates under each scenario. A reduction in required capital for the potential risk-mitigating
effect of dividend reductions is calculated separately for participating and adjustable products
(q.v. Chapter 9).

The treatment for specific asset and liability cash flows is described next.

5.1.3.1 Assets having fixed cash flows

A fixed cash flow is one that is contractually guaranteed for a definite amount, and not
contingent on future market prices or interest rates. A cash flow is considered contractually
guaranteed if it is payable regardless of the condition of the obligor (for example, it is not
contingent on the obligor meeting its target level of profitability), and if failure to pay the
guaranteed cash flow would be considered an event of default. For assets having fixed cash
flows, insurers should project the same cash flows as those used in the balance sheet valuation.
Asset cash flows that are included in the valuation of CALM liabilities should be projected net of
investment expenses, and all other asset cash flows should be projected gross of investment
expenses.

5.1.3.2 CALM MfADs and accounting loss provisions

Projected cash flows should not reflect the impact of CALM C-1 expected losses, CALM C-1
MfADs, or balance sheet loss provisions reported under IFRS 9 (i.e., asset cash flows should not
be reduced by any amount on account of these three items, nor should liability cash flows be
increased by any amount on account of these items).

Liability cash flows should be projected reflecting the impact of CALM insurance risk MfADs
(i.e., all insurance assumptions used to project liability cash flows should be set equal to the best

76
Liabilities corresponding to business ceded under funds withheld arrangements are excluded from liability cash
flows, but liabilities due to reinsurers under funds withheld arrangements are included in liability cash flows. If
business ceded under a modified coinsurance arrangement effectively transfers interest rate risk on an insurance
liability and a pool of supporting assets to the reinsurer, both the liability and asset cash flows should be
excluded from projected cash flows.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 95
estimate assumption plus the CALM insurance risk MfAD used for the insurer’s financial
statements).

All cash flows should be projected without reflecting the impact of CALM C-3 and currency risk
provisions.

5.1.3.3 Participating liability dividends

The dividend cash flows used in the initial scenario are different from those projected under
CALM. For the initial scenario, CALM dividend cash flows should be re-projected to produce
restated dividend cash flows by making a level adjustment (e.g., determined using an iterative
process) to the dividend scale so that the participating block balance sheet surplus is maintained
under LICAT Initial Scenario Discount Rates. In other words, the net present value of assets over
liabilities discounted using Initial Scenario Discount Rates is equal to the balance sheet surplus.

If some portion of dividends under CALM is projected to be distributed in the form of paid-up
additions, the same portion of restated dividends should be projected to be distributed as paid-up
additions.74

In re-projecting the dividend scale, insurers should only include asset and liability cash flows
whose returns are passed through to policyholders through dividends. If investment returns on
surplus and PfADs (including ancillary funds) are not elements that are passed through to
policyholders, these cash flows should be excluded. If the assets to be excluded are comingled
with other par assets, the insurer should remove them by assuming that they are supported by a
proportionate share of the total (in practice, this could be a fixed percentage reduction of assets at
each duration).

The restated dividend cash flows projected for the initial scenario remain unchanged under all
stress scenarios.

Example: Participating liability dividend restatement

An insurer has a block of participating policies with underlying total cash flows (including
surplus assets from non-pass through and pass-through components) as illustrated in (A). The
insurer uses CALM discount rates to determine the total net present value of these cash flows for
the participating policies, calculating a CALM balance sheet surplus of $445 in (B). In certain
situations under LICAT, asset cash flows (e.g. NFI) are projected differently than under CALM
(C). The balance sheet surplus resulting from those cash flows and LICAT Initial Scenario
Discount Rates is $338 (D), which is different from the CALM surplus. Under LICAT, the
insurer (using an iterative process (E), (F)) applies a level adjustment to the dividend scale so
that the adjusted liability cash flows (G) discounted using the LICAT Initial Scenario Discount
Rates generate a total net present value (H) equal to the balance sheet surplus of $445 (B)
initially calculated under CALM.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 96
 Year CALM Base Scenario LICAT Initial Scenario
Discount Rates Discount Rates
1 2.48% 1.48%
2 2.52% 1.52%
3 2.66% 1.66%
4 2.81% 1.81%
5 2.99% 1.99%

Total Cash Flows for Participating Policies

(A) (C)
LICAT
CALM (Before Adjustment to 10% dividend scale)
Liability Liability
Non Net (Balance Non Net (Balance
Time Asset Div. Div. Total Sheet Surplus) Asset Div. Div. Total Sheet Surplus)
Time 0 900 300 30 330 570 1,000 300 30 330 670
Year 1 900 400 40 440 460 850 400 40 440 410
Year 2 900 550 55 605 295 850 550 55 605 245
Year 3 800 800 80 880 -80 760 800 80 880 -120
Year 4 700 900 90 990 -290 675 900 90 990 -315
Year 5 500 1,000 100 1,100 -600 480 1,000 100 1,100 -620
Total 4,700 3,950 395 4,345 355 4,615 3,950 395 4,345 270

Total Net Present Value of Cash Flows

(B) (D)
LICAT
CALM (Before Adjustment to 10% dividend scale)
Liability Liability
Non Net (Balance Non Net
Time Asset Div. Div. Total Sheet Surplus) Asset Div. Div. Total (Surplus)
Time 0 900 300 30 330 570 1,000 300 30 330 670
Year 1 889 395 40 435 454 844 397 40 437 407
Year 2 867 530 53 583 284 831 538 54 591 240
Year 3 749 749 75 824 -75 729 768 77 845 -115
Year 4 635 817 82 899 -263 634 845 85 930 -296
Year 5 438 876 88 964 -526 439 915 92 1,007 -567
Total 4,479 3,667 367 4,034 445 4,477 3,763 376 4,139 338

Life A LICAT
October 2018 97
 Total Cash Flows for Participating Policies
(E) (G)
LICAT (Iterative Adjustment to dividend scale) LICAT (After Adjustment to dividend scale)
(8% dividend scale) (7.2% dividend scale)
Liability Liability
Non Net (Balance Non Net (Balance
Time Asset Div. Div. Total Sheet Surplus) Asset Div. Div. Total Sheet Surplus)
Time 0 1,000 300 24 324 676 1,000 300 21 321 679
Year 1 850 400 32 432 418 850 400 29 429 421
Year 2 850 550 44 594 256 850 550 39 589 261
Year 3 760 800 64 864 -104 760 800 57 857 -97
Year 4 675 900 72 972 -297 675 900 64 964 -289
Year 5 480 1,000 80 1,080 -600 480 1,000 72 1,072 -592
Total 4,615 3,950 316 4,266 349 4,615 3,950 283 4,233 382

Total Net Present Value of Cash Flows

(F) (H)
LICAT (Iterative Adjustment to dividend scale) LICAT (After Adjustment to dividend scale)
(8% dividend scale) (7.2% dividend scale)
Liability Liability
Non Non
Time Asset Div. Div. Total Net (Surplus) Asset Div. Div. Total Net (Surplus)
Time 0 1,000 300 24 324 676 1,000 300 21 321 679
Year 1 844 397 32 429 415 844 397 28 425 418
Year 2 831 538 43 581 250 831 538 38 576 255
Year 3 729 768 61 829 -100 729 768 55 823 -93
Year 4 634 845 68 913 -279 634 845 61 906 -272
Year 5 439 915 73 989 -549 439 915 66 981 -541
Total 4,477 3,763 301 4,064 413 4,477 3,763 269 4,033 445

5.1.3.4 Preferred shares and innovative instruments

Preferred shares and innovative instruments that do not constitute substantial investments are
treated in the same manner as assets having fixed cash flows. Projected cash flows under the
initial and stress scenarios should include all expected dividends and proceeds at maturity.

5.1.3.5 Real estate

Insurers should include as a time zero cash flow the balance sheet value of the real estate less the
present value of fixed cash flows calculated using Initial Scenario Discount Rates. Where no
fixed cash flows are projected, the real estate’s entire balance sheet value should be included as a
cash flow at time zero. The cash flow amount at time zero remains the same under all interest
rate scenarios.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 98
Fixed cash flows on leases in force should be included in the period in which they are
contractually expected to be received. No contract or lease renewals should be assumed. Prepaid
rent should be treated as a time zero cash flow. The cash flows should exclude projected
reimbursements for operating expenses that are paid by the lessor (e.g., property taxes and
utilities). Cash flows from lease agreements with a rent-free period followed by a rent-paying
period are included in the present value of lease cash flows.

5.1.3.6 Floating rate investments

The market value of a floating rate bond, note, or other investment should be reported as a cash
flow at time zero.
5.1.3.7 Bonds and preferred shares with embedded options
The cash flows associated with a callable bond or preferred share under the initial and stress
scenarios should be projected to the redemption date (i.e., one of the call dates or the maturity
date) for which the present value of the cash flows, discounted at the scenario’s rates, is lowest.
For a puttable bond or preferred share, the cash flows under the initial and stress scenarios
should be projected to the date for which the present value of the cash flows, discounted at the
scenario’s rates, is highest.

For a bond or preferred share that is both callable and puttable, the cash flows under the initial
and stress scenarios are projected to the date determined by the following algorithm: if the dates
in chronological order on which the investment can be put or called are 𝑡1, … , 𝑡𝑁, and 𝑡𝑁+1 is the
investment’s final maturity date, then for 1 ≤ 𝑖 ≤ 𝑁 + 1, the quantity 𝑃𝑉𝑖 is defined to be the
present value at time zero of the investment’s cash flows under the scenario if it is called, put, or
matures at time 𝑡𝑖. The quantities 𝑊𝑖 are solved backwards recursively from:

𝑊𝑁+1 = 𝑃𝑉𝑁+1

min(𝑃𝑉𝑖, 𝑊𝑖+1) if 𝑡𝑖 is a call date

𝑊𝑖 = {
max(𝑃𝑉𝑖, 𝑊𝑖+1) if 𝑡𝑖 is a put date

The cash flows for the investment under the scenario are projected to the earliest time 𝑡𝑖 for
which 𝑊1 = 𝑃𝑉𝑖. If the investment can be called or put over a continuous time period, the point
𝑡𝑖 for the period should be defined as the time during the period at which 𝑃𝑉𝑖 takes its highest or
lowest value, respectively. For the purpose of projecting scenario cash flows for perpetual
preferred shares that are callable and puttable, the shares may be assumed to mature at any time
after which there is no material difference among any of the scenario present values 𝑃𝑉𝑖.

Example: Redeemable retractable preferred share

A Canadian perpetual preferred share with par value 100 pays a 7% dividend at the end of
each year. At the end of years 3, 5 and 8, the holder of the share is entitled to put the share
back to the issuer for prices of 100, 102, and 99 respectively, while at the end of years 5 and 7,
the issuer of the share is entitled to call the share for 103 and 100, respectively. At the end of

Life A LICAT
October 2018 99
year 10 and all year-ends thereafter, the issuer is entitled to call the share at par. All options
are exercisable only after the annual dividend has been paid.
The current Canadian risk-free rate at all maturities between 1 and 20 years is 5%, and 90% of
the market average spread at all maturities between 1 and 20 years is 80 bps. Based on the put
and call dates before year 10, the times 𝑡𝑖 are defined as:

𝑡1 3
𝑡2 5
𝑡3 5
𝑡4 7
𝑡5 8

(Note that if a put and call are exercisable simultaneously, the strike price of the put must be
lower than the strike price of the call. In such a case, the calculation will not be affected by
which option is assumed to be exercisable first).
Since all options in years 10 and later are calls, the date to which the present value of
payments is lowest can be treated as a maturity date. If the preferred share remains outstanding
to year 10, the issuer will realize the lowest present value of payments under the initial and
stress scenarios if it redeems the share at the following year-ends:

Initial scenario Scenario 1 Scenario 2 Scenario 3 Scenario 4

Redemption time (N+1): 10 10 10 23 20
Present value: 108.92 129.54 96.92 84.80 115.78

With 𝑡6 taken to be the optimal calling time for the issuer after year 10, then the present values
𝑃𝑉𝑖 under the scenarios are as follows:

ti Initial scenario Scenario1 Scenario 2 Scenario 3 Scenario 4

𝑃𝑉1(put) 3 103.22 110.51 96.67 94.31 108.21
𝑃𝑉2(put) 5 106.59 118.39 97.21 92.91 113.68
𝑃𝑉3(call) 5 107.35 119.23 97.89 93.56 114.49
𝑃𝑉4(call) 7 106.75 122.25 95.83 89.59 114.79
𝑃𝑉5(put) 8 106.87 124.05 95.51 88.27 115.09
𝑃𝑉6(call) N+1 108.92 129.54 96.92 84.80 115.78

The values of the 𝑊𝑖 are then:

ti Initial scenario Scenario1 Scenario 2 Scenario 3 Scenario 4

𝑊1(put) 3 106.75 119.23 97.21 94.31 114.49
𝑊2(put) 5 106.75 119.23 97.21 92.91 114.49
𝑊3(call) 5 106.75 119.23 95.83 88.27 114.49
𝑊4(call) 7 106.75 122.25 95.83 88.27 114.79

Life A LICAT
October 2018 100
 𝑊5(put) 8 108.92 129.54 96.92 88.27 115.78
𝑊6(call) N+1 108.92 129.54 96.92 84.80 115.78

Consequently, in the initial scenario, the share is valued on the assumption that it will be
redeemed at the end of year 7, in scenarios 1 and 4 it is valued assuming that it will be
redeemed at the end of year 5, in scenario 2 it is valued assuming that it will be retracted at the
end of year 5, and in scenario 3 it is valued assuming that it will be retracted at the end of
year 3.

5.1.3.8 Non-fixed income investments

Non-fixed income (NFI) investments include any assets that do not have contractually
guaranteed cash flows. Examples of such assets include equities and infrastructure investments
without contractually fixed cash flows. However, real estate, preferred shares and innovative
instruments are excluded from the definition of NFI investments as they are treated separately
within the interest rate risk requirement.

In order to approximate the non-interest sensitive component of NFI investment’s dividend

stream, 33% of the investment’s value77 is projected as cash flows occurring beyond time zero,
while the remaining 67% of the investment’s value is projected as a time zero cash flow. At all
integer times 𝑡 ≥ 1, a cash flow of:
4.1 × 0.89𝑡
%
𝐷𝑡

of the investment’s value is projected as a cash flow occurring at time t, where Dt is the initial
scenario discount factor from time t to time zero.

5.1.3.9 Pooled funds – index-linked risk pass-through products

If the index-linked product risk component is used (q.v. section 5.5), liability cash flows should
match asset cash flows in each scenario. However, minimum interest rate guarantees must be
reflected if they are higher than the asset cash flows.

If the index-linked product risk component is not used, the liability cash flows should be the
same as those used in the balance sheet valuation. If minimum interest guarantees do not apply,
the account value should be included as a cash flow at time zero. Cash flows from the portion of
investment management fees used to cover investment expenses and other administration costs
should be included in both asset and liability cash flows.

5.1.3.10 Pooled funds – products without direct risk pass-through

Where the account value of a policy is linked to a bond fund but does not vary directly with the
fund’s value, the cash flows of the fund should be projected so that the value of the fund changes
appropriately in response to the change in interest rates under each scenario.

77
For hedged equity positions receiving credit under section 5.2.4, the delta equivalent value of the hedged position
should be used as the investment value.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 101
For mutual or pooled funds holding assets that do not have fixed cash flows (e.g., equities and
real estate), insurers should treat the funds according to the type of assets that the funds hold. For
example, equity funds should be treated as specified in section 5.1.3.8, and real estate funds
should be treated as specified in section 5.1.3.5. If such treatment cannot be applied (e.g. if real
estate lease cash flows are not known), the balance sheet value of the fund should be included as
a cash flow at time zero.

5.1.3.11 Securitized assets

For securitized assets whose cash flows are fixed, insurers should project the underlying fixed
cash flows. For securitized assets whose cash flows are not fixed, the balance sheet value should
be projected as a cash flow at time zero.

5.1.3.12 Capital instruments issued by the insurer

Obligations that the insurer has issued itself and that qualify for recognition in available capital
under Chapter 2 (e.g., preferred shares and subordinated debt) should be excluded from the
projection of liability cash flows.

5.1.3.13 Interest rate and currency swaps

The cash flows projected for interest rate and currency swaps consist of three components:
1) All cash flows to be paid or received under any fixed legs of the swap.
2) Cash flows at the maturity of the swap equal to the notional amounts of any fixed legs of
the swap, unless these have already been projected in 1). If an insurer makes payments
under a fixed leg of the swap, the notional amount should be projected as a cash outflow
at maturity, and if the insurer receives payments, the notional amount should be projected
as a cash inflow.
3) Cash flows at time zero equal to the notional amounts of any floating legs of the swap. If
an insurer makes payments under a floating leg of the swap, the notional amount should
be projected as a cash outflow at time zero, and if the insurer receives floating payments,
the notional amount should be projected as a cash inflow.

5.1.3.14 Other interest rate derivatives

Interest rate derivatives other than swaps should be included as an asset or liability cash flow at
time zero in all scenarios. In each scenario, the time zero cash flow for the derivative is equal to
the derivative’s fair value under the scenario’s risk-free interest rates. Stressed fair values should
be calculated assuming no change in underlying interest rate volatility.

5.1.3.15 Reverse mortgages and collateral loans

Cash flows for reverse mortgages and collateral loans with fixed interest rates are projected using
Best Estimate Assumptions, including mortality assumptions. If the assets have variable interest
rates then they are shown as time zero cash flows. If an insurer’s model used for valuation in its
financial statements is able to project variable interest assets accurately then asset cash flows are
updated in each interest rate scenario.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 102
 5.1.3.16 Policy loans
Cash flows for policy loans with interest rates that are fixed or subject to guaranteed maximums
should be projected using mortality and lapse assumptions that are consistent with those used in
the valuation of the related policies. Policy loan amounts for variable rate policy loans that are
not subject to guaranteed maximums should be projected as time zero cash flows.

5.1.3.17 Future income taxes

Projected cash flows should include cash flows arising from investment income taxes and tax
timing differences that are projected under CALM74. No other income tax cash flows should be
included in the projection. Cash flows related to tax timing differences should not be re-projected
to reflect the interest rate scenario being tested.

5.1.3.18 Dynamic assumptions tied to interest rates

If an insurer uses dynamic assumptions (e.g. for lapses) that vary with interest rates to project
insurance cash flows under CALM, the liability cash flows projected in the interest rate initial
scenario and stress scenarios should reflect these assumptions (i.e., the assumptions that are set
dynamically should vary in each interest rate scenario to be consistent with the scenario).

5.1.3.19 Cash flows tied to inflation

Cash flows projected for expenses, and for benefit payments that are subject to cost-of-living
adjustments should reflect the impact of inflation assumptions that vary consistently with each
scenario. Inflation rates should bear the same relation to risk-free interest rates as assumed under
the CALM valuation. For example, if an insurer generates inflation rates dynamically under
CALM, the same generator should be used to derive inflation rates in the initial scenario and
stress scenarios that are consistent with these scenarios.

5.1.3.20 Assets replicated synthetically

The cash flows projected for assets replicated synthetically (q.v. section 5.2.3), including non-
fixed income assets, should be the same as those of the replicated assets.

5.1.3.21 Other investment contracts

The projection of cash flows for liabilities that are classified as investment contracts in the
financial statements and that are not covered in a previous section depends on whether the
contract holder has an option to redeem the investment. If the contract is not redeemable, the
insurer should project the same cash flows as those used in the balance sheet valuation. If the
contract is redeemable at the option the holder, the cash flows under the initial and stress
scenarios should be projected to the redemption date for which the present value of the cash
flows, discounted at the scenario’s rates, is highest. In particular, the balance sheet value of
deposit-type liabilities should be treated as a time zero cash flow.

5.1.3.22 Universal life

For most products, only contractual cash flows are projected, without assuming reinvestments.
Universal life (UL) is an exception as the contract continues after the end of any interest
guarantee period inside the investment account. It is therefore necessary to use a reinvestment

Life A LICAT
October 2018 103
assumption to generate a credited rate that is used to project best estimate cash flows for
premiums, policy charges and benefits and expenses.

Insurers should use Initial and stress Scenario Discount Rates (qq.v. sections 5.1.1 and 5.1.2) for
discounting UL cash flows. The credited rate should vary appropriately with the scenario that is
being tested, including the initial scenario. The relation between the restated credited rates for
LICAT purposes and the LICAT discount rates under each scenario should be consistent and
maintain the same relationship as exists between actual credited rates and the implied discount
rates that are derived from the assets (both fixed income and non-fixed income) used to support
the specific UL product under the CALM base scenario.

Where the universal life contract has minimum interest guarantees, the effect of these guarantees
must be reflected in the scenario that is being tested.

If the performance of a universal life contract inside-account benefit is tied to the performance of
specific assets and these assets are held by the insurer, then the cash flows on these assets and
liabilities should be included with the cash flows of other index-linked RPT products (q.v.
section 5.5). If matching assets are not held, then the cash flows should be projected using
assumptions that are consistent with those used in the balance sheet valuation and then adjusted
for the scenario being tested.

5.2 Equity risk

Equity risk is the risk of economic loss due to potential changes in the prices of equity
investments and their derivatives. This includes both the systematic and specific components of
equity price fluctuation.

5.2.1 Common equity

Required capital for all investments classified as common equities (including equity index
securities, managed equity portfolios, income trusts, limited partnerships, and interests in joint
ventures) is calculated by applying a factor to the market value of the investment. The base
factor is 35% for equities in developed markets, and 45% for equities in other markets. The base
factor is increased by 5 percentage points (i.e., to 40% or 50%) if:
a. the equities are not listed on a recognized public exchange (e.g. private equity), and/or
b. the insurer’s ownership interest in the equities constitutes a substantial investment78
without control.
Common Equity
35% Developed markets, listed and non-substantial
40% Developed markets, non-listed and/or substantial
45% Other markets, listed and non-substantial
50% Other markets, non-listed and/or substantial

78
As defined in Section 10 of the Insurance Companies Act.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 104
If an increased factor is used for an equity holding that is a substantial investment, the amount to
which the factor is applied should be net of the amount of associated goodwill and intangible
assets deducted from Gross Tier 1 capital in section 2.1.2.1.

Developed markets include countries listed as developed markets by at least two of the five
following data providers: Dow Jones & Company, FTSE Group, MSCI Inc., Russell Investments
and Standard and Poor’s.

Substantial investments in mutual fund entities that do not leverage their equity by borrowing in
debt markets, and that do not otherwise leverage their investments, do not receive equity risk
factors for substantial investments. Instead, a capital charge on the assets of the mutual fund
entity will apply based on the requirements of section 5.4. For example, the factors for
substantial investments do not apply where the insurer has made a substantial investment in a
mutual fund as part of a structured transaction that passes through the unaltered returns (i.e., no
guarantee of performance) on the substantial investment to the mutual fund holder.

The treatment of offsetting long and short positions in identical or closely correlated equities is
described in section 5.2.4.

5.2.2 Preferred shares

Required capital for preferred shares depends on their rating category, and is calculated by
applying the factors shown in the table below to their market values:

Preferred Share Rating Categories

3% P1
5% P2
10% P3
20% P4
Common equity risk factor P5 and unrated

For investments in capital instruments issued by domestic or foreign financial institutions, other
than common or preferred shares, that qualify as capital according to the solvency standards of
the financial institution’s home jurisdiction (e.g. subordinated debt), the applicable factor is the
higher of:
1) The preferred share factor associated with either:
a. the issuer’s senior unsecured issuer rating, or
b. if the issuer does not have a senior unsecured issuer rating, the highest rating
assigned to any of the issuer’s outstanding unsecured debt obligations
2) The credit risk factor from section 3.1 associated with the capital instrument’s rating and
maturity.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 105
Refer to appendix 5-A for the correspondence between the rating categories used above and
individual agency ratings, and to section 3.1.1 for requirements related to the use of ratings.

5.2.3 Assets replicated synthetically and derivatives

This section describes required capital for transactions that increase an insurer’s exposure to
market risk and for which the full notional amount of the transaction may not be reported on the
balance sheet, such as transactions undertaken through derivatives. Insurers should calculate
required capital based on the full exposure amount and underlying risk assumed under these
transactions, irrespective of whether they are recognized or how they are reported on the balance
sheet.

No additional capital is required under this section for hedges of index-linked liabilities that have
been taken into account in the correlation factor calculation under section 5.5.

Where an insurer has entered into transactions (including short equity positions and purchased
put options) that:
1) are intended to hedge the insurer’s segregated fund guarantee risk;
2) are not applied as offsets or hedges against other positions of the insurer to reduce
required capital; and
3) have not been undertaken as part of an OSFI-approved hedging program,
required capital for the hedges may be reduced to a minimum of zero if the insurer is able to
demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Superintendent, that losses on the hedges under particular
scenarios would be offset by decreases in its segregated fund guarantee liabilities. Insurers
should contact OSFI for details on the calculation for determining the capital requirement for
these hedges.

The requirements in this section are distinct from the requirements for counterparty credit risk
arising from off-balance sheet transactions. Transactions referred to in this section remain
subject to the requirements for potential replacement cost as described in section 3.1 and
Chapter 4.

5.2.3.1 Short positions in equities

Required capital for a short position in any equity security or index that does not wholly or
partially offset a long equity position is the same as that for a long position of the same
magnitude. Positions eligible for offset recognition and the corresponding treatment are
described in section 5.2.4.

5.2.3.2 Future, forwards and swaps

Required capital for a futures or forward position in any security or index is the same as that for
the equivalent spot position, and is reported as if the position were current. Required capital for a
swap is the same as that for the series of future or forward transactions that replicates the swap.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 106
 Examples: Futures and Swaps

1) An insurer has entered into a futures contract to purchase equity securities on a future date.
The insurer reports an equity exposure in an amount equal to the total current market value of
the equities underlying the futures contract.

2) An insurer has entered into a one-year swap during which it will pay the total return
(coupons and capital gains) on a 10-year Government bond, and receive the return on a
notional index of equities that was worth $100 at the time of inception. The index of equities is
currently worth $110. The insurer reports an equity risk exposure of $110 for the long position
in the index, and liability cash flows in the interest rate risk calculation for the short position in
the bond.

5.2.3.3 Options on equities

The following describes the methodology used to determine the required capital for both equity
options that have been purchased and options that have been sold. This methodology may not be
applied to equity options embedded in products sold to policyholders. The market risk required
capital for policies containing an equity option component is calculated using the methodologies
for index-linked RPT products (q.v. section 5.5) or segregated fund guarantees (q.v. Chapter 7),
as appropriate.

Required capital for an option (or a combination of options in exactly the same underlying equity)
is determined by constructing a two-dimensional matrix of changes in the value of the option
position under various market scenarios, using the same valuation model that is used for the
financial statements. The first dimension of the matrix requires an insurer to evaluate the price of
the option position over a range within the corresponding equity risk charge above and below the
current value of the underlying stock or index, with at least seven observations (including the
current observation) used to divide the range into equally spaced intervals. The second dimension
of the matrix entails a change in the volatility of the underlying stock or index equal to ±25% of its
current volatility. Required capital for the option position is then equal to the largest decline in
value calculated in the matrix. The application of this method and the precise manner in which the
analysis is undertaken must be documented and made available to OSFI upon request79.

As an alternative to constructing a scenario matrix for a purchased option, an insurer may deduct
100% of the carrying amount of the option from its Tier 1 Available Capital.

79
Insurers should demonstrate an understanding of the details of the valuation model used to construct the scenario
matrix, and should objectively review and test the model on an ongoing basis, to the satisfaction of OSFI.
Market prices, volatilities and other inputs to the valuation model must be subject to review by an objective and
qualified person that is not close to or otherwise involved in the transactions or have related decision making
authority. An insurer that does not apply the matrix method to the satisfaction of the Superintendent is required
to deduct 100% of the carrying amount of the purchased option from its Tier 1 Available Capital.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 107
 Example: Options on Equities

An insurer has sold a call option on a publicly listed Canadian stock, with the stock currently
having a market value of $100 and volatility of 20%. The first dimension of the matrix ranges
from $65 to $135, divided into six intervals of $11.66 each, and the second dimension assumes
that volatility stays at 20%, increases to 25% (= 20% + 25% of 20%) or decreases to 15%
(=20% - 25% of 20%). If the change in the value of the insurer’s option position under the
various market scenarios is as below, then the required capital for the option is $25.83.

Gain (loss) due Stock (current)

to change in Price
option value $76.66 $88.33 $100.00 $111.66 $123.33 $135.00
$65.00
Volatility 15% $10.36 $9.65 $7.11 $1.86 ($5.78) ($14.85) ($24.54)
(current)
20% $10.01 $8.59 $5.36 $0 ($7.21) ($15.72) ($24.99)
25% $9.37 $7.31 $3.58 ($1.89) ($8.85) ($16.96) ($25.83)

5.2.3.4 Equity-linked notes

The balance sheet carrying amount of an equity- or index-linked note is decomposed into the
sum of a fixed-income amount, equivalent to the present value of the minimum guaranteed
payments under the note, and an amount representing the value of the option embedded within
the note. The fixed-income portion of the note is classified as a debt exposure subject to a credit
risk charge based on the rating and maturity of the note, and the residual amount is treated as an
equity option.

Example: Equity-linked Notes

An insurer purchases an A-rated equity-linked note from a Canadian bank for $10,000. The
note promises to pay, in two years, the $10,000 purchase price of the note plus the purchase
price times 65.7% of the percentage appreciation (if positive) of the S&P 500 over the term of
the note. The insurer uses the Black-Scholes option valuation model for financial reporting
purposes. The implied volatility of the stock index is 25%, the yield curve is flat, the annual
risk-free rate is 5%, and the issuing bank’s annual borrowing rate is 6.5%. The total required
capital for this note is ($88.17 + $1,118.92 + $17.09 =) $1,224.18, the sum of the following
three separate charges:
1) Bond component: The value of the fixed-income component of the note is
$10,000/(1.065)2 = $8,816.59. The credit risk component, based on the note’s two-year
term and A rating, is 1% of this amount, or $88.17.
2) Option component: The value of the call option embedded within the note, taking into
account the credit risk of the issuer, is the residual amount, namely $1,183.41. In the
option scenario table, the greatest loss will occur if the value of the index declines by
35% at the same time as the index volatility declines to 18.75%, in which case the
value of the option will decline by $1,118.92; this is the required capital for the option.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 108
 3) Counterparty credit risk (per Chapter 4): The exposure amount for the option is
calculated under the current exposure method as:
Positive mark-to-market + Factor × Notional
= $1,183.41 + 8% × $6,570
= $1,709.01
Since the note has an A rating, the capital charge is 1% of the current exposure
amount, or $17.09.

5.2.3.5 Convertible bonds

Required capital for a convertible bond is equal to the credit risk required capital for the bond’s
fixed-income component, plus the equity option requirement for the bond’s embedded warrant.
Required capital for the fixed-income component is equal to the bond’s credit risk factor (based on
its rating and maturity) multiplied by the present value of the minimum guaranteed payments
under the bond. The required capital for the embedded warrant is calculated using the scenario
table method (q.v. section 5.2.3.3) for options on equities, where the gains and losses are based on
either the change in value of the bond’s warrant component (if the valuation methodology assigns
an explicit value to this component) or the change in value of the whole bond.

As a simplification, an insurer may classify the entire balance sheet value of the convertible bond
as an equity exposure and calculate required capital for the bond by applying the market risk
factor for equities to the bond’s value.

5.2.4 Recognition of equity hedges

5.2.4.1 Offsetting long and short positions in equities

Equity positions backing indexed-linked policyholder liabilities for which a factor is calculated
under section 5.5 may not be recognized as an offset to any other positions. Offsetting hedges of
an equity position may only be recognized if the party providing the hedge is an eligible
guarantor as defined in section 3.3.4.

Identical reference assets

Long and short positions in exactly the same underlying equity security or index may be
considered to be offsetting so that an insurer is required to hold required capital only for the net
position.

Closely correlated reference assets

Where underlying securities or indices in long and short positions of equal amounts are not
exactly the same but are closely correlated (e.g., a broad stock index and a large capitalization
sub-index), insurers should apply the correlation factor methodology described in section 5.5.2.
The capital requirement for the combined position is equal to the capital factor F multiplied by
the amount of the long position. If an insurer has not held a short position over the entire period
covered in the correlation factor calculation, but the security or index underlying the short

Life A LICAT
October 2018 109
position has quotations that have been published at least weekly for at least the past two years,
the insurer may perform the calculation as if it had held the short position over the entire period.
However, returns for actively managed short positions may not be inferred for periods in which
the positions were not actually held, and mutual funds that are actively managed externally may
not be recognized as an offsetting short position in an inexact hedging relationship.

5.2.4.2. Recognition of equity option hedges

Option hedges of an equity holding may only be recognized if the party providing the hedge is an
eligible guarantor as defined in section 3.3.4. Option hedges of segregated fund guarantee risk
may not be recognized in the segregated fund guarantee capital requirement without explicit
approval from OSFI. The form and amount of any such recognition will be specified by OSFI at
the time of approval. Option hedges of segregated fund guarantee risk that receive recognition in
the segregated fund guarantee required capital cannot be applied towards other equity risks.

Identical reference assets

If an option’s reference asset is exactly the same as that underlying an equity position held, an
insurer may exclude the equity holding in calculating required capital for its equity exposures
and instead consider the combined change in value of the equity position with the option in
constructing the scenario table (q.v. section 5.2.3.3).

Closely correlated reference assets

If an option’s reference asset is not exactly the same as that underlying an equity position, but is
closely correlated with the equity, then the factor for offsetting long and short positions in the
option’s reference asset and the asset underlying the equity position is calculated as described in
section 5.2.4.1. An insurer may then exclude the equity holding from its required capital for
equity exposures and instead calculate the combined change in value of the equity position with
the option in a scenario table (q.v. section 5.2.3.3). However, the movement in the option’s
reference asset under each scenario must be assumed to be higher or lower (whichever produces
a lower value for the option position) than the movement of the equity, by an amount equal to the
required capital for directly offsetting positions. No additional adjustments need be made to the
assumed changes in asset volatilities under the scenarios to account for asset mismatch.

Example: Equity Option Hedges

An insurer has a long position in a main equity index in a developed market, and also owns a
call option and a put option on different indices that are closely correlated with the main
index. The highest factor F over the previous four quarters between the reference index of the
call option and the main index, calculated per section 5.5.2, is 3%, and the highest factor F
calculated over the previous four quarters between the reference index of the put option and
the main index is 1%. The insurer therefore constructs a scenario table in which the price of
the main index ranges from 35% below to 35% above its current value, while the index
underlying the call option ranges from 38% below to 32% above its current value, and the
index underlying the put option ranges from 34% below to 36% above its current value. In the
scenarios in the center column of the table, the main index will remain at its current value,

Life A LICAT
October 2018 110
 while the index underlying the call option will be 3% lower than currently and the index
underlying the put option will be 1% higher than currently.

Note that for short option positions, the direction of the adjustment to account for correlation
will be opposite to that of a long option position. Thus, if the insurer had sold the call and put
options instead of purchasing them, the index underlying the call would range from 32%
below to 38% above its current value in the scenario table, and the index underlying the put
would range from 36% below to 34% above its current value.

5.3 Real estate risk

Real estate market risk is the risk of economic loss due to changes in the amount and timing of
cash flows from investment property, and holdings of other property, plant and equipment.

The capital requirements for investment property that is leased, or holdings of property, plant and
equipment that are leased, are determined in the same manner as the requirements for assets that
are owned. The balance sheet value used for leased assets is the associated balance sheet value of
the right of use asset, determined in accordance with relevant accounting standards.

5.3.1 Investment property

The carrying amount of investment property is divided into two components: leases in force and
the residual value of the property. For leases in force, required capital is calculated for interest
rate risk (section 5.1) and for credit risk (section 3.1.9.2). The exposure amount used to
determine the credit risk requirement is the present value of the contractual lease cash flows,
including projected reimbursements for operating expenses paid by the lessor, discounted using
the Initial Scenario Discount Rates specified in section 5.1.1. The residual value of the
investment property is defined as its balance sheet value at the reporting date minus the present
value of the fixed cash flows that are contractually expected to be received as determined in
section 5.1.3.5, including prepaid rent cash flows. Required capital for the residual value of the
property is calculated by applying a factor of 30% to this value.

5.3.2 Other property, plant and equipment

For owner-occupied property80, required capital is calculated as the difference, if positive,

between either:

1) the moving average market value immediately prior to conversion to IFRS net of
subsequent depreciation, if the property was acquired before conversion to IFRS; or
2) the original acquisition cost net of subsequent depreciation, if the property was acquired
after conversion to IFRS
and 70% of the property’s fair value at the reporting date.

80
If an insurer is leasing a portion of owner-occupied property to an external party, it may treat the lease in the
same manner as a lease in force on an investment property.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 111
For all other property not having contractually guaranteed cash flows, including oil and gas
properties, timberland, and agricultural properties, required capital is calculated as the difference,
if positive, between the balance sheet value at the reporting date, and 70% of the property’s fair
value at the reporting date.

If the fair value of any property is not available then required capital is 30% of the property’s
balance sheet value. Required capital is determined on a property-by-property basis.

The capital charge for plant and equipment is 30% of the balance sheet value.

5.4 Mutual funds

The factor for investments in unleveraged mutual funds81, exchange traded funds, segregated
funds and real estate investment trusts is a weighted average of the market and credit risk factors
for the assets that the fund is permitted to invest in. The weights and factors are calculated
assuming that the fund first invests in the asset class attracting the highest capital requirement, to
the maximum extent permitted in its prospectus or Annual Information Form (where more
current). It is then assumed that the fund continues allocating investments to asset classes in
declining order of capital charge, to the maximum extent permitted, until a total allocation of
100% is reached. The factor for the mutual fund is then the sum of the products of the weights
and risk factors for the assumed investment allocation.

In the absence of specific limits to asset classes or if the fund is in violation of the limits stated in
the prospectus, the entire fund is subject to the highest risk charge applicable to any security that
the fund holds or is permitted to invest in.

Funds that employ leverage82 are treated as equity investments, and receive the equity risk factor
corresponding to the fund under section 5.2.1.

5.5 Index-linked products risk

5.5.1. Scope of application

The credit risk factors in section 3.1 and market risk charges in sections 5.2 to 5.4 do not apply to
assets backing index-linked products. All assets backing index-linked products must be
segmented and included in the index-linked reporting form, and receive factors based on the
historical correlation between weekly asset and liability returns in section 5.5.2.
81
If an insurer’s balance sheet includes an unleveraged mutual fund entity reported on a consolidated basis and the
investment in the entity is not deducted from Available Capital, the requirements of this section apply to the
portion of the fund whose returns are retained for the insurer’s own account. The requirements of this section do
not apply to the portion of the fund for which the insurer can demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the
Superintendent, that: (1) the mutual fund units are owned by policyholders or outside investors; (2) the insurer
has a contractual obligation to pass through all returns; and (3) the insurer tracks and distinguishes these units
from the units held for its own account. The portion of the fund not subject to the requirements of this section is
instead subject to the requirements for index-linked products in section 5.5.
82
Leveraged funds are those that issue debt/preferred shares, or that use financial derivatives to amplify returns.
Funds that employ an insignificant amount of leverage for operational purposes, in a manner not intended to
amplify returns may be excluded from this definition.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 110
The correlation factor calculation may be used for index-linked products, such as universal life
policies, having the following characteristics:
1) Both assets and liabilities for these contracts are held in the general fund of the life
insurer;
2) The policyholder is promised a particular return in the contract, based on an index,
possibly subject to a floor. The following are examples of such returns:
a. The same return as a specified public index. This includes, but is not limited to a
public stock index, a bond index, or an index maintained by a financial institution.
b. The same return as is earned by one of the insurer’s segregated funds or mutual
funds.
c. The same return as is earned by another company’s mutual funds; and
3) The insurer may invest in assets that are not the same as those that constitute the indices.

The following conditions must be adhered to:

1) All supporting assets are be segmented into asset subgroups;
2) A separate asset subgroup is maintained for each index referred to in the products;
3) The returns (on a market basis) of each asset subgroup are tracked; and
4) Any transfers into or out of the asset subgroup are at market value.

5.5.2. Required capital

The factor F applicable to a particular subgroup of assets is given by:

F = 20 × (C − B + B ×√2 − 2A)

where:
 A is the historical correlation between the returns credited to the policyholder funds
and the returns on the subgroup’s assets;
 B is the minimum of [standard deviation of asset returns, standard deviation of returns
credited to policyholder funds]; and
 C is the maximum of [standard deviation of asset returns, standard deviation of
returns credited to policyholder funds].

Note that a factor should be calculated for each asset subgroup.

The historical correlations and standard deviations should be calculated on a weekly basis,
covering the previous 52-week period. The returns on asset subgroups should be measured as the
increase in their market values net of policyholder cash flows.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 111
The factor F for the previous 52 weeks is required to be calculated each quarter. The charge is
then equal to the highest of the four factors calculated over the previous four quarters. This factor
is applied to the fair value at quarter-end of the assets in the asset subgroup.

Instead of using policyholder funds in the calculations, an insurer may use cash surrender values
or policy liabilities to measure the correlation. The basis used must be consistently applied in all
periods.

Credit and market risk factors should be applied to:

1) Assets backing index-linked products that are not segmented into asset subgroups;
2) Assets backing index-linked products for which F cannot be calculated; and
3) Newly formed funds for the first three quarters. (Combined with the requirement to use
the highest capital factor of the last four quarters’ calculations, this implies that the
requirement for newly formed funds will be that of the underlying assets for the first 18
months.)

As a simplification, insurers may choose to apply the common equity risk factor from section
5.2.1 corresponding to the assets listed above.

When a synthetic index investment strategy is used, there is some credit risk that is not borne
directly by policyholders. This may include credit risk associated with fixed income securities
and counterparty risk associated with derivatives that are purchased under the synthetic strategy.
Insurers should hold credit risk required capital for these risks in addition to the index-linked
requirements of this section.

For index-linked insurance policies that have a minimum death benefit guarantee, the
requirement for segregated fund mortality guarantees should be applied. This requirement may
be obtained using the methodology described in Chapter 7.

5.6 Currency risk

Currency risk is the risk of economic loss due to changes in the amount and timing of cash flows
arising from changes in currency exchange rates. Three steps are required to calculate required
capital for currency risk. The first is to measure the exposure in each currency position. The
second is to calculate the required capital for the portfolio of positions in different currencies,
which is 30% of the greater of the sum of (i) the net open long positions or (ii) the net open short
positions in each currency, plus the net open position in gold, whatever the sign83. A charge is
then added for currency volatility, if applicable. The final step allocates the total currency risk
requirement to participating and non-participating blocks in each geographic region.

83
Gold is treated as a foreign exchange position rather than a commodity because its volatility is more in line with
foreign currencies.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 112
5.6.1. Measuring the exposure in a single currency

The net open position for each individual currency (and gold) is calculated by summing:
1) the net spot position, defined as all asset items less all liability items denominated in the
currency under consideration, including accrued interest and accrued expenses but
excluding provisions for currency risk held within insurance contract liabilities. The net
spot position is calculated net of all reinsurance (i.e., all reinsurance assets and all ceded
insurance liabilities are excluded84);
2) the net forward position (i.e., all net amounts under forward foreign exchange
transactions, including currency futures and the principal on currency swaps);
3) guarantees (and similar instruments) that are certain to be called and are likely to be
irrecoverable;
4) net future income/expenses not yet accrued but already fully hedged by the insurer (q.v.
section 5.6.5);
5) an offsetting short position74 of up to 120% of the Base Solvency Buffer for assets and
liabilities denominated in the currency under consideration. The percentage amount may
be selected by the insurer and may vary by currency. The Base Solvency Buffer for
business denominated in a specific currency should be calculated by aggregating all
requirements arising from assets and liabilities in the currency, with:
 all requirements for currency risk excluded,
 the requirement for insurance risk calculated net of all reinsurance, and
 all credits for within-risk diversification, between-risk diversification, and
participating and adjustable products applicable to the aggregated requirements
(q.v. chapters 9 and 11) taken into account;
6) any other item representing a profit or loss in foreign currencies.

84
Liabilities corresponding to business ceded under funds withheld arrangements are excluded, but liabilities due
to reinsurers under funds withheld arrangements are included.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 113
Example: Currency Risk Offset

Suppose that a life insurer has the following asset and liability positions:

Value of Assets Value of Liabilities

Denominated in Foreign Denominated in Foreign
Currency Currency (CAD) Currency (CAD)
USD 1,000 500
EUR 210 200
GBP 300 400
JPY 0 0
Others 400 200

Total 1,910 1,300

Currency Solvency Buffer

USD 37.50
EUR 10.00
GBP 12.50
JPY -
Others 15.00

Total 75.00

The offset is defined as a short position of up to 120% of the solvency buffer in each currency.
In this example, the USD solvency buffer is 37.50, so the maximum permitted offset is 120%
x 37.50 = 45 for the USD exposure. A 10 offset for the EUR position is used (100% of $10) to
reduce the net EUR exposure to zero. The GBP exposure is negative (short position), so no
offset is calculated, as any offset would increase the GBP short position. For other currencies,
the maximum permitted offset is 120% x 15 = 18. Note that any percentage, up to 120%, may
be used by the insurer to produce the lowest net exposure in each currency:
Currency Potential Offset
USD 45.00
EUR 10.00
GBP 0
JPY 0
Others 18.00

Total 73.00

Life A LICAT
October 2018 114
The following structural positions and related hedges are excluded from the calculation of net
open currency positions:
1) Assets backing surplus that are fully deducted from the insurer’s Available Capital (e.g.
goodwill); and
2) Asset and liability positions corresponding to investments in foreign operations that are
fully deducted from an insurer’s Available Capital (q.v. section 2.1.2).

5.6.2. Treatment of options

If an insurer has purchased or sold options on a foreign currency, it should perform the scenario
table calculation described in section 5.2.3.3, where the changes in value measured are those of
the net open position in the currency and the options combined, and where the range of values
used for the currency in the table is 30% above and below its current value instead of 35%. The
magnitude of the net open position in the currency after adjusting for options is then equal to
3.33 times the largest decline in value that occurs in the middle row of the table. If this decline
occurs in a column where the value of the currency decreases then the position is treated as a
long position, and if the decline occurs in a column where the value of the currency increases
then the position is treated as a short position.

If the largest decline in the entire scenario table is greater than the largest decline in the middle
row, then the difference represents the required capital for volatility in the foreign currency, and
this amount is added to the capital requirement for currency risk.

5.6.3. Treatment of immaterial operations

Currency risk is assessed on a consolidated basis. It may be technically impractical in the case of
immaterial operations to include some currency positions. In such cases, the internal limit in each
currency may be used as a proxy for the positions, provided there is adequate ex post monitoring
of actual positions complying with such limits. In these circumstances, the limits are added,
regardless of sign, to the net open position in each currency.

5.6.4. Measurement of forward currency positions

Forward currency positions are valued at current spot market exchange rates. It is not appropriate
to use forward exchange rates since they partly reflect current interest rate differentials. Insurers
that base their normal management accounting on net present values are expected to use the net
present values of each position, discounted using current interest rates and translated at current
spot rates, for measuring their forward currency and gold positions.

5.6.5. Accrued and unearned interest, income and expenses

Accrued interest, accrued income and accrued expenses are treated as a position if they are
subject to currency fluctuations. Unearned but expected future interest, income or expenses may
be included, provided the amounts are certain and have been fully hedged by forward foreign
exchange contracts. Insurers should be consistent in their treatment of unearned interest, income
and expenses and should have written policies covering the treatment. The selection of positions
that are only beneficial to reducing the overall position is not permitted.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 115
5.6.6. Calculating required capital for the portfolio

The nominal amount (or net present value) of the net open position in each foreign currency (and
gold) is converted at spot rates into Canadian dollars. Required capital is 30% of the overall net
open position, calculated as the sum of:
a. the greater of the sum of the net open short positions (absolute values) or the sum of the
net open long position less offsets; and
b. the net open position in gold, whether long or short (i.e., regardless of sign).

Required capital is increased by the total of the volatility risk charges for each foreign currency,
if any, to arrive at the final required capital.

Example: Currency Risk Requirement for a Portfolio

An insurer has the following net currency positions. These open positions have been converted
at spot rates into Canadian dollars, where (+) signifies an asset position and (-) signifies a
liability position.
JPY EUR GBP CHF USD GOLD
+50 +100 +150 -20 -180 -35
+300 -200 -35

In this example, the insurer has three currencies in which it has long positions, these being the
Japanese Yen, the Euro and the British Pound, and two currencies in which it has a short
position, the Swiss Franc and the United States Dollar. The middle line of the above chart
shows the net open positions in each of the currencies. The sum of the long positions is +300
and the sum of the short positions is -200.

The foreign exchange requirement is calculated using the higher of the summed absolute
values of either the net long or short positions, and the absolute value for the position in gold.
The factor used is 30%. In this example, the total long position (300) would be added to the
gold position (35) to give an aggregate position of 335. The aggregated amount multiplied by
30% results in a capital charge of $100.50.

5.6.7 Allocation of the portfolio requirement

After the total currency risk solvency buffer has been calculated in aggregate, it is allocated by
geographic region in proportion to the contribution of the region’s net long currency positions or
net short currency positions (whichever is used to determine the capital requirement) to the
aggregate currency risk solvency buffer. Within a geographic region, the buffer is allocated
between par and non-par blocks in proportion to the share of the liabilities in the region.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 116
 Example: Allocation of the Aggregate Currency Risk Solvency Buffer

Continuing the example from the previous section, the total capital requirement of $100.50 is
allocated to Japan, Europe other than the United Kingdom, and the United Kingdom as
follows:

Japan: 50 / 300 × $100.50 = $16.75

Europe other than the United Kingdom: 100 / 300 × $100.50 = $33.50

United Kingdom: 150 / 300 × $100.50 = $50.25

Since the aggregate requirement is determined from the long positions rather than the short
positions, the short position in CHF does not lead to any additional allocation to Europe other
than the United Kingdom, and none of the requirement is allocated to the United States.

If the United Kingdom has two participating blocks and a non-participating block for which
liabilities are the following:

Non-participating: 800

Participating block 1: 300

Participating block 2: 400

then, of the requirement of $50.25 allocated to the United Kingdom, $26.80 is allocated to the
non-participating block, $10.05 is allocated to the first participating block, and $13.40 is
allocated to the second participating block.

5.6.8. Unregistered reinsurance

A separate component calculation should be performed for each group of liabilities that is backed
by a distinct pool of assets under unregistered reinsurance arrangements. The defining
characteristic of a pool is that any asset in the pool is available to pay any of the corresponding
liabilities. Each calculation should take into consideration the ceded liabilities and the assets
supporting the credit available under section 10.4.1, including any excess deposits. If some of the
assets supporting the ceded liabilities are held by the ceding insurer (e.g. funds withheld
coinsurance), the insurer’s corresponding liability should be treated as an asset in the calculation
of the open positions for the ceded business. If the ceded liabilities are payable to policyholders
in a foreign currency, this currency should be used as the base currency in the component
calculation (the Canadian Dollar is then treated as a foreign currency).

The currency risk requirement for each group of ceded liabilities is added to the insurer’s own
requirement, without netting open positions between ceded business and the insurer’s retained
business, or between different groups of ceded business.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 117
5.6.9. Foreign exchange de minimus criteria

An insurer doing negligible business in foreign currency, and that does not take foreign exchange
positions within its own investment portfolio, may be exempted from the requirement for
currency risk provided that:
1) Its foreign currency business, defined as the greater of the sum of its gross long positions
and the sum of its gross short positions in all foreign currencies, does not exceed 100% of
total Available Capital; and
2) Its overall net open foreign exchange position does not exceed 2% of total Available
Capital.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 118
Appendix 5-A Rating Mappings

Preferred
Share Rating Preferred share rating
Category
DBRS Fitch Moody’s S&P KBRA JCR R&I
AAA to Aaa to AAA AAA to AAA to
P1 Pfd-1 P-1
AA- Aa3 to AA- AA- AA-
P2 Pfd-2 A+ to A- A1 to A3 P-2 A+ to A- A+ to A- A+ to A-
BBB+ to Baa1 to BBB+ to BBB+ to BBB+ to
P3 Pfd-3 P-3
BBB- Baa3 BBB- BBB- BBB-
BB+ to Ba1 to BB+ to BB+ to BB+ to
P4 Pfd-4 P-4
BB- Ba3 BB- BB- BB-
Pfd-5 and Below Below Below Below Below
P5 P-5
D BB- Ba3 BB- BB- BB-

Capital
Instrument
Other Than
Common or Senior unsecured issuer / debt rating
Preferred
Shares Rating
Category
DBRS Fitch Moody’s S&P KBRA JCR R&I
AAA to AAA to Aaa to AAA to AAA AAA to AAA to
P1
AA(low) AA- Aa3 AA- to AA- AA- AA-
A(high) to
P2 A+ to A- A1 to A3 A+ to A- A+ to A- A+ to A- A+ to A-
A(low)
BBB(high)
BBB+ to Baa1 to BBB+ to BBB+ to BBB+ to BBB+ to
P3 to
BBB- Baa3 BBB- BBB- BBB- BBB-
BBB(low)
BB(high)
BB+ to Ba1 to BB+ to BB+ to BB+ to BB+ to
P4 to
BB- Ba3 BB- BB- BB- BB-
BB(low)
B(high) or Below Below Below Below Below Below
P5
lower BB- Ba3 BB- BB- BB- BB-

Life A LICAT
October 2018 119
Chapter 6 Insurance Risk
Insurance risk is the risk of loss arising from the obligation to pay out benefits and expenses on
insurance policies and annuities in excess of expected amounts. Insurance risk includes:
1) Mortality risk on life insurance;
2) Longevity risk on annuities;
3) Morbidity risk on disability insurance (DI), long-term disability (LTD), short-term
disability (STD), critical illness (CI), long-term care (LTC), accident & sickness
insurance (A&S), and waiver of premium benefits (WP);
4) Lapse and policyholder behaviour risk, and
5) Expense risk.

Required capital for insurance risk covers the risk that realized insurance experience may be
worse than Best Estimate Assumptions (q.v. section 1.4.4). Required capital considers adverse
experience arising from:
i) misestimation of the level of Best Estimate Assumptions (level risk);
ii) misestimation of the future trend of Best Estimate Assumptions (trend risk);
iii) volatility risk due to random fluctuations, and
iv) catastrophe risk due to a one-time, large-scale event.

Capital requirements for insurance risk are determined using a projected cash flow methodology
that measures the economic impact of a one-time or multi-year shock to best estimate mortality,
morbidity, lapse and expense rate assumptions. A capital requirement is calculated for level,
trend, volatility and catastrophe risk components of each insurance risk. The capital requirement
for each component is calculated as the difference between the present value of shocked cash
flows and the present value of best estimate cash flows. The components are calculated at the
policy level, summed by product and added across products by risk component within a
geographic region (Canada, the United States, the United Kingdom, Europe other than the United
Kingdom, Japan, and other locations). Required capital components for participating and
adjustable products are calculated as if the products were non-participating and non-adjustable.

Unless otherwise indicated, the four risk components for each type of insurance risk are
aggregated as the square root of the sum of the squares of the volatility and catastrophe risk
components, plus the level and trend risk components:
𝑅𝐶 = √𝑅𝐶2 + 𝑅𝐶2 + 𝑅𝐶𝑙𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑙 + 𝑅𝐶𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑑
𝑣𝑜𝑙 𝑐𝑎𝑡

where:
 RC is total required capital for the insurance risk
 RCvol is the required capital component for volatility risk
 RCcat is the required capital component for catastrophe risk

Life A LICAT
October 2018 120
  RClevel is the required capital component for level risk
 RCtrend is the required capital component for trend risk

Required capital is calculated by geographic region, and is floored at zero within each region.
Required capital for volatility risk is calculated using formulas that cover one full year, while
required capital for catastrophe risk is calculated using shocks that occur over the first year
starting on the first day after the valuation date.

Aggregation of the insurance risk components is specified in Chapter 11. Risks are aggregated
separately for non-participating business and for blocks of participating business (q.v. Chapter 9).

The methodologies specified in this chapter do not apply to segregated fund guarantee products,
investment contracts, or “Administrative Services Only” group contracts where an insurer bears
no risk and has no liability for claims. These products should be excluded completely from the
calculation of the insurance risk requirement.

6.1. Projection of insurance liability cash flows

Cash flows used to determine required capital for insurance risk are calculated using Best
Estimate Assumptions per section 1.4.4. Best estimate and shocked cash flows are projected for
the terms of the liabilities by geographic region. Best estimate cash flows do not include CALM
margins for adverse deviation (MfADs). The participating policy dividend scale should not
reflect the impact of the insurance risk shocks.

All best estimate and shocked cash flows are projected net of registered reinsurance (q.v. Chapter
10)85 with the exception of stop loss treaties (q.v. section 6.8.5)86. For the solvency buffers SB1,
SB2 and SB3 defined in section 6.8, cash flows are projected net of registered reinsurance and
additional elements specific to the calculation. Projected cash flows may reflect future planned
recaptures as long as all the features of the recapture are also incorporated.

Projected cash flows should include cash flows arising from investment income taxes and tax
timing differences that are projected under CALM.87 No other income tax cash flows should be
included in the projection. Cash flows related to tax timing differences should not be re-projected
to reflect insurance risk shocks.

For the purpose of calculating the insurance risk components, best estimate and shocked cash
flows are discounted at prescribed rates that depend on the geographic region in which the
underlying liabilities are included, rather than the currency in which the liability is denominated.

85
Cash flows include those corresponding to liabilities assumed under modified coinsurance arrangements, and
exclude those corresponding to business ceded under registered modified coinsurance arrangements.
86
Cash flow projection may not be appropriate for business assumed under stop loss arrangements. Given the
potential impact of OSFI finding that a treaty is not appropriately captured within the solvency buffer
calculation, an insurer writing stop loss insurance is encouraged to seek a confirmation from OSFI prior to
entering into such a transaction.
87
An approximation may be used under section 1.4.5.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 121
Cash flows, including participating policy dividends, should not be restated to reflect the
prescribed discount rates.
The spot discount rates are level, and are:
 5.3% for Canada, the United States and the United Kingdom,
 3.6% for Europe other than the United Kingdom,
 1.8% for Japan, and
 5.3% for other locations.

In calculating required capital, group business that is individually underwritten is treated as

individual business.

Group liability cash flows may be projected up to or beyond the term of the liabilities. An insurer
should project group cash flows (other than for claims liabilities) up to the end of the guaranteed
coverage period88. If the length of this period is less than one year but active life liability cash
flows are projected for a full year, the insurer may opt to project the cash flows for a full year
and use a reduced factor. Under this option, a 75% factor is applied to the death benefit amounts
used to determine mortality volatility risk in section 6.2, and to the projected cash flows used to
determine the requirements for all other mortality and morbidity risks in sections 6.2 and 6.4.

6.2. Mortality risk

Mortality risk is the risk associated with the variability in liability cash flows due to the
incidence of death. Level, trend, volatility and catastrophe risk components are calculated for all
individual and group life insurance products that are exposed to mortality risk. Mortality risk
required capital is calculated for accidental death and dismemberment products and any mortality
exposure supported by the general account. However, mortality risk required capital is not
calculated for products that cover longevity and morbidity risk, such as waiver of premium,
critical illness and deferred annuities.

In cases where an insurer does not use an explicit mortality rate assumption in the determination
of its liabilities, shocks on mortality rates should be applied to net written premiums adjusted by
the expected claims loss ratio, where this ratio includes both claims incurred and claims incurred
but not reported. For the level risk shock, the percentage shocks specified for mortality rate
assumptions should instead be applied to adjusted net written premiums. For the catastrophe risk
shock, the percentage shocks specified for mortality rate assumptions should instead be applied
to policy face amounts. For the volatility risk requirement, adjusted net written premiums may be
used in place of 𝐶 within the approximation formulas in section 6.2.4.

88
The guaranteed coverage period should be consistent generally with the term of the liabilities projected under the
CALM valuation. For group products that are not individually underwritten, if the term of the liabilities projected
under the CALM valuation is less than the length of premium guarantee remaining due to the insurer’s right to
terminate the policy early, the guaranteed coverage period used in calculating level and trend risks should be the
term of the liabilities extended to reflect the additional risk the insurer is bearing due to the presence of the
premium guarantee. The extension beyond the term of the liabilities should be at least half of the difference
between the length of the premium guarantee remaining, and the term of the liabilities projected in the CALM
valuation.
Life A LICAT
October 2018 122
Required capital for mortality risk is calculated for each geographic region using the following
formula:

𝑅𝐶𝑚𝑜𝑟𝑡𝑎𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑦 = √𝑅𝐶2 + 𝑅𝐶2 + 𝑅𝐶𝑙𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑙 + 𝑅𝐶𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑑

𝑣𝑜𝑙 𝑐𝑎𝑡

A diversification credit is given for level and trend components between individually
underwritten life supported and individually underwritten death supported business (q.v. section
11.1.1).

All cash flow projections, benefit amounts and reserve amounts used to determine required
capital for mortality risk are calculated net of registered reinsurance (q.v. section 10.1).

The net amount at risk for a policy or set of products, for both directly written business and
business acquired through reinsurance, refers to the total net face amount of all of the included
policies minus the total net reserve for the included policies, where both the face amount and the
reserve are net of registered reinsurance.

For purposes of mortality risk required capital, basic death benefits include supplementary term
coverage, participating coverage arising out of dividends (paid-up additions and term additions),
and increasing death benefits associated with universal life policies (i.e., policies where the death
benefit is the face amount plus funds invested).

6.2.1. Designation of life and death supported business

Required capital for mortality risk is calculated separately for life supported and death supported
business. All individual and group life insurance products with mortality risk are designated as
either life supported or death supported for aggregation purposes.

The insurer should group its policies into portfolios with similar products and characteristics and
then determine if each individual portfolio is life supported or death supported. Level and trend
risk components must be combined for this calculation.

The present value of cash flows87 for each portfolio is calculated using a -15% mortality level
shock applied to the best estimate assumption for the mortality rate and a +75% mortality trend
shock applied to the best estimate assumption for mortality improvement, discounted using either
CALM valuation rates, or the discount rates specified in section 6.1. The result of this calculation
is compared to the present value of best estimate cash flows using the same discount rates. If the
present value of the shocked cash flows is greater than the present value of the best estimate cash
flows, the portfolio is designated as death supported business; otherwise, the portfolio is
designated as life supported.

6.2.2. Level risk

A level risk component is calculated for all individual and group life products that are exposed to
mortality risk.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 123
The mortality level risk component is the difference between the present value of shocked cash
flows and the present value of best estimate cash flows, determined separately for life and death
supported business.

In order to avoid double counting with mortality volatility risk, the level risk component is
reduced by the component related to the increase in the Best Estimate Assumption for mortality
rate in the first year following the reporting date. Required capital for the first year is calculated
as the difference between the present value of best estimate cash flows with a level shock in the
first year only, and the present value of best estimate cash flows.

6.2.2.1 Life supported business

The level risk shock for life supported business is a permanent increase to the Best Estimate
Assumptions for mortality rate at each age. The increased mortality rates are calculated as:

(1 + Factor) x Best Estimate Mortality Rate

where Factor is the lesser of:

a. 11% plus 20% of the ratio of the calculated individual life volatility component to the
following year’s net expected claims87; or
b. 25%.

The ratio in a) above is the same for all individual life insurance products within a single
geographic region.89

6.2.2.2 Death supported business

The level risk shock for death supported business is a permanent 15% decrease in best estimate
mortality rates for each age and policy for all policy durations (i.e., - 15% for all years).

6.2.3. Trend risk

A trend risk component is calculated for all individual and group life products that are exposed to
mortality risk. The trend risk component is the difference between the present value of the
shocked cash flows and the present value of best estimate cash flows at all years, determined
separately for life and death supported business.

6.2.3.1 Life supported business

The trend risk shock for life supported business is a permanent 75% decrease to the Best
Estimate Assumption for mortality improvement for 25 years, followed by no mortality
improvement (i.e., a 100% decrease) thereafter.

89
The volatility component used in the ratio is that for participating and non-participating business within the
region combined, which is lower than the sum of the components for participating and non-participating business
calculated separately.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 124
 6.2.3.2 Death supported business
The trend risk shock for death supported business is a permanent 75% increase in the Best
Estimate Assumption for mortality improvement at all policy durations.

6.2.4. Volatility risk

A volatility risk component is calculated for all individual and group life insurance products that
are exposed to mortality risk. It is calculated in aggregate (i.e., life and death supported products)
by geographic region across all products.

In order to compute the mortality requirement, an insurer should partition its book of business
into sets of like products. Basic death and AD&D products may not be included in the same set,
nor may individual and group products.

The volatility risk component is:


 RC2   RC 2
Basic Death AD&D


where the sums are taken over all sets of basic death and AD&D products respectively, and RC is
the volatility risk required capital component for the set of products. The formula for RC is given
by:
2.7  A  E F

where:
 A is the standard deviation of the upcoming year’s projected net death claims for the
set (including claims projected to occur after the term of the liability for group
policies), defined by:

A 



where:
 q is a particular policy’s Best Estimate Assumption for mortality; and
 b is the death benefit for the policy, net of registered reinsurance.

The sum is taken over all policies. The calculation is based on claims at the policy
level, rather than claims per life insured. Multiple policies on the same life may be
treated as separate policies, but distinct coverages of the same life under a single
policy must be aggregated. If this aggregation is not done due to systems limitations,
the impact should still be approximated and accounted for in the mortality volatility
risk requirement.
 E is the total net amount at risk for all policies in the set; and
 F is the total net face amount for all policies in the set.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 125
 When there is insufficient data available to calculate A for a set of products and the standard
deviation of the net death benefit amounts for all policies or (for group products) certificates in
the set is known, factor A for the set should be approximated as:

A 

where:
 C is the projected value of the upcoming year’s total net death claims for all policies
in the set (including claims projected to occur after policy renewal dates);
 The sum is taken over all policies or (for group products) certificates in the set, and b
is the net death benefit amount for the policy or certificate; and
 F is the total net face amount for the policies in the set.

When there is insufficient data available to calculate A for a set of products and the standard
deviation of the net death benefit amounts is not known, the insurer may approximate factor A
for the set using a comparable set of its own products for which it is able to calculate the
volatility component exactly. For the set whose volatility component is being approximated, A
may be approximated as:

A   
Cc  
where:

 Ac is the exact factor A calculated for the comparison set;

 Nc and N are the total numbers of deaths projected to occur over the upcoming year
for all policies in the comparison set and all policies in the set for which A is being
approximated, respectively;
 Cc and C are the projected values of the upcoming year’s total net death claims for all
policies in the comparison set and all policies in the set for which A is being
approximated, respectively;
 F is the total net face amount for the policies in the set for which A is being
approximated; and
 n is the total number of lives covered under the policies in the set for which A is
being approximated.

The use of the above approximation is subject to the following conditions:

1) There is no basis from which to conclude that the dispersion of the distribution of net
death benefit amounts, as measured by the ratio of the standard deviation to the mean, of
the comparison set may with material likelihood be lower than that of the set for which A
is being approximated. It may not be appropriate to base the approximation on an
insurer’s entire book of products of the same type. An insurer’s Appointed Actuary
Life A LICAT
October 2018 126
 should be able to explain, to the satisfaction of OSFI, why using the approximation based
on the comparison set produces appropriate results.
2) Insurers should use comparison sets of individual products to approximate factors for sets
of individual products, and comparison sets of group products to approximate factors for
sets of group products. Insurers may use sets of basic death products to approximate
factors for sets of AD&D products, but may not use sets of AD&D products to
approximate factors for sets of basic death products.
3) For any particular set of products used as a comparison set, the number of covered lives
in the comparison set must be greater than or equal to the total number of covered lives
summed over all sets for which factors are approximated based on the comparison set.
4) If this approximation is used for sets of individual basic death products, the sets in
aggregate must not be material relative to the insurer’s entire book of business.

For sets of products consisting entirely of traditional employer-sponsored group policies, insurers
may use the above approximation without reliance on a set of comparable products with the
comparison set factor Ac  Nc Cc replaced by 1.75 in the approximation. The factor of 1.75
may be used to approximate A for a set only if each group policy in the set requires employees to
remain actively working for the plan sponsor in order to continue coverage. In particular, such a
set may not contain debtor, association, mass mailing or dependent coverages.

When there is insufficient data available to calculate A for a set of products and the standard
deviation of the net death benefit amounts is not known, companies may also approximate
factor A for the set using the formula:

A 
where:

 C is the projected value of the upcoming year’s total net death claims for all policies
in the set (including claims projected to occur after policy renewal dates);
 bmin is less than or equal to the lowest single-life net death benefit amount of any
policy or certificate in the set;
 bmax is the highest single-life net death benefit amount or retention limit of any policy
or certificate in the set;
 F is the total net face amount for the policies in the set; and
 n is the total number of lives covered under the policies in the set.

The value of the average net death benefit amount F / n used in the above formula must be exact,
and may not be based on an estimate. If an insurer cannot establish with certainty both the
average net death benefit amount and a lower bound bmin on the net death benefit amounts, it
should use the value bmin  0 in the formula so that the approximation used is:

A  C  bmax
Life A LICAT
October 2018 127


6.2.5. Catastrophe risk

A catastrophe risk component is calculated for all individual and group life insurance products
that are exposed to mortality risk. It is tested in aggregate (i.e., life and death supported products)
by geographic region across all products.

The shock for catastrophe risk is an absolute increase in the number of deaths per thousand lives
insured in the year following the reporting date (including claims projected to occur after policy
renewal dates for group policies), and varies by the location of the business as follows:

Canada 1.0
United States 1.2
United Kingdom 1.2
Europe other than the United Kingdom 1.5
Other 2.0

For AD&D products, 20% of the above shocks for mortality catastrophe risk are used.

The catastrophe risk component is the difference between the present value of the shocked cash
flows and the present value of the best estimate cash flows.

6.3. Longevity risk

Longevity risk is the risk associated with the increase in liability cash flows due to increases in life
expectancy caused by changes in the level and trend of mortality rates.

The following formula is used to calculate longevity risk required capital for each geographic
region:

𝑅𝐶𝑙𝑜𝑛𝑔𝑒𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦 = 𝑅𝐶𝑙𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑙 + 𝑅𝐶𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑑

6.3.1. Level risk

The longevity level risk component is calculated for all annuity products that are exposed to
longevity risk. The level risk component is the difference between the present value of the shocked
cash flows and the present value of the best estimate cash flows. The required shock is a
permanent decrease in Best Estimate Assumptions for mortality rate at each age as follows:

Non-registered annuity business – Canada, United States and United Kingdom -20%
Registered annuity business – Canada -10%
Registered annuity business – United States and United Kingdom -12%
Non-registered and registered annuity business – geographic regions other than
Canada, United States and United Kingdom -15%

Life A LICAT
October 2018 128
Registered annuities are those that are purchased using tax-qualified (i.e. pre-tax) retirement
savings.

6.3.2. Trend risk

The longevity trend risk component is calculated for all annuity products that are exposed to
longevity risk. The required shock for trend risk is a 75% increase in the Best Estimate
Assumption for mortality improvement. The shock applies per year of mortality improvement
forever. That is, the shocked cash flows for trend risk are calculated using best estimate cash
flows with 175% of the Best Estimate Assumption for mortality improvement.

The longevity trend risk component is the difference between the present value of the shocked
cash flows and the present value of the best estimate cash flows.

6.4. Morbidity risk

Morbidity risk is the risk associated with the variability in liability cash flows arising from the
incidence of policyholder disability or health claims (including critical illness), and from
termination rates. The termination rate is defined as the proportion of disabled lives that cease to
be disabled over one year as the result of either recovery or death.

Group morbidity business that is individually underwritten is subject to the same shocks as
individual business.

Return of premium riders are included in the cash flows of the underlying products. Changes in
the return of premium rider liability are taken into consideration when calculating required
capital.

In cases where an insurer does not use incidence and termination rate assumptions in the
determination of its liabilities, shocks on incidence or termination rates should be applied to net
written premiums adjusted by the expected claims loss ratio (i.e., the percentage shocks specified
for incidence/termination rate assumptions should instead be applied to net written premiums
adjusted by the loss ratio for level, volatility and catastrophe risk shocks). The expected claims
loss ratio should include both claims incurred and claims incurred but not reported.

Morbidity risk required capital components are calculated for level, trend, volatility and
catastrophe risks. Total required capital for morbidity risk is calculated separately by geographic
region using the following formula:
𝑹𝑪𝒎𝒐𝒓𝒃𝒊𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒚 = √𝑹𝑪𝟐 + 𝑹𝑪𝟐 + 𝑹𝑪𝒍𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒍 + 𝑹𝑪𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅
𝒗𝒐𝒍 𝒄𝒂𝒕

6.4.1. Level risk

The level risk component is calculated for products that are exposed to morbidity risk. The
exposure base to which the shock is applied varies according to status of the policyholder: active
versus disabled.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 129
For active lives, the shock for level risk applies to all products for which the guaranteed coverage
period88 exceeds 12 months. The shock is a permanent increase in Best Estimate Assumptions
for morbidity incidence rate at each age.

For disabled lives, the shock for level risk is a permanent decrease in Best Estimate Assumptions
for the morbidity termination rate at each age. Morbidity termination rate shocks for level risk
apply to currently disabled lives. For IBNR claims, if the approximation approach (i.e. net
written premiums adjusted by the expected claims loss ratio) is not used, then a factor should be
applied to the IBNR reserve that is equal to the ratio of the morbidity termination level solvency
buffer (before morbidity risk credits specified in section 11.1.2) to the present value of best
estimate liability cash flows for each morbidity product category (e.g. Disabled DI, Disabled
LTD, Disabled STD).

Termination rates should not be changed when applying incidence rate shocks. Termination rate
shocks are applied to the total termination rate, which includes terminations due to recovery and
due to death.

The factors for level risk shocks are as follows:

Exposure Base Product Type Shock Factor

Active DI +25%
Active WP +25%
Incidence Rates CI +35%
Active LTC +30%
Other A&S +20%
Disabled DI -25%
Disabled LTD -25%
Termination Rates Disabled STD -25%
Disabled WP -30%
Disabled LTC -25%

The morbidity level risk component is the difference between the present value of the shocked
cash flows and the present value of best estimate cash flows. The components for Disability, CI
and LTC morbidity level risk may be reduced by a credit for within-risk diversification, which is
determined using a statistical fluctuation factor (q.v. section 11.1.2).

6.4.2. Trend risk

A trend risk component is calculated for:

1) Products with a guaranteed coverage period88 for active lives of two years or more,
such as individual CI, individual active life DI and other A&S; and
2) Products that provide benefits to disabled lives, such as LTD, DI and WP.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 130
If a Best Estimate Assumption for morbidity improvement is not used, the risk charge for trend
risk is zero.

The shock for trend risk is a permanent 100% decrease in the Best Estimate Assumption for
morbidity improvement. The shocked cash flows for trend risk are calculated using best estimate
cash flows and an annual morbidity improvement rate assumption of 0%.

The morbidity trend risk component is the difference between the present value of the shocked
cash flows and the present value of the best estimate cash flows.

6.4.3. Volatility risk

The volatility risk component is calculated as a one-time shock to first-year incidence rates for
all active lives that are exposed to morbidity risk. The volatility risk shock in the first year is
calculated independently of the shock used for level risk (section 6.4.1). Termination rate
assumptions should not change as a result of the shocks to incidence rates.

The first-year87 factors for the volatility risk shocks are listed below:

Exposure Base Product Type Shock Factor

Individual active DI +25%
Individual active WP +25%
Individual CI +50%
Individual active LTC +30%
Individual medical +15%
Individual dental +20%
Individual travel +30%
Individual credit insurance +30%
Incidence Rates Other A&S +30%
Group active STD and LTD +25%
Group active WP +25%
Group CI +50%
Group active LTC +30%
Group medical +15%
Group dental +20%
Group travel +50%
Group credit insurance +50%

The morbidity volatility risk component is the difference between the present value of the
shocked cash flows and the present value of best estimate cash flows.

The components for Disability, CI, LTC, Travel and Group Medical and Dental (including other
group A&S) morbidity volatility risk may be reduced by a credit for within-risk diversification,
which is determined using statistical fluctuation factors (q.v. section 11.1.2).

Life A LICAT
October 2018 131
6.4.4. Catastrophe risk

The catastrophe risk component is calculated as a one-time shock to first year87 incidence rates
for all active lives that are exposed to morbidity risk. The shock is applied as a multiple of the
Best Estimate Assumption for morbidity (i.e., (1 + shock factor) x Best Estimate Assumption).
Catastrophe shocks are not applied to incidence rates for group medical or dental insurance, or to
individual or group travel or credit insurance.

The factors for catastrophe risk shocks are listed below:

Exposure Product Type Shock Factor

Base
Individual active DI +25%
Group active STD and LTD +25%
Individual and group active WP +25%
Incidence Individual CI +5%
Rates Group CI +5%
Individual and group active LTC +10%
Other A&S (other than disability and CI) +25%

The morbidity catastrophe risk component is the difference between the present value of the
shocked cash flows and the present value of best estimate cash flows.

6.5. Lapse risk

Lapse risk is the risk associated with the variability in liability cash flows due to the incidence of
policyholder lapses and other policyholder behaviour. Lapse risk includes risk arising from
options that allow policyholders to fully or partially terminate an insurance contract, or to
decrease or suspend/resume insurance coverage (e.g. the option to reduce premiums in universal
life contracts).

Lapse risk required capital is calculated for all individual life insurance, individual active DI,
individual critical illness, individual active life LTC and other A&S policies that are exposed to
lapse risk.

Lapse shocks are applied to individual business, including individually underwritten group
business. Lapse risk components are calculated for level and trend risks combined as well as
volatility and catastrophe risks. If any shock increases a lapse rate above 97.5%, the shocked
lapse rate is capped at 97.5%. Shocked cash flows that are projected should not include any lapse
trend improvement assumptions. If an insurer uses dynamic lapse assumptions that vary with
interest rates, the Best Estimate Assumption should be the same as that assumed in the CALM
base scenario and should not be adjusted to reflect prescribed discount rates (q.v. section 6.1)
used to calculate the capital requirement.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 132
For aggregation purposes, components are calculated separately for lapse-supported and lapse-
sensitive business.

Lapse risk required capital is calculated separately for each geographic region using the
following formula:
𝑹𝑪𝒍𝒂𝒑𝒔𝒆 = √𝑹𝑪𝟐 + 𝑹𝑪𝟐 + 𝑹𝑪𝒍𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒍+𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅
𝒗𝒐𝒍 𝒄𝒂𝒕

6.5.1. Designation of lapse supported and lapse sensitive business87

Lapse supported and lapse sensitive products are assumed to be negatively correlated for LICAT
purposes. The direction of the lapse shock should be tested to determine whether the business is
lapse supported or lapse sensitive. An insurer should use the product groupings it has in place for
setting its Best Estimate Assumptions for lapse (which should result in portfolios with similar
products and characteristics), and then test each individual portfolio by applying the level, trend
and volatility shocks combined to determine if the portfolio is lapse supported or lapse sensitive.
For the purpose of the designation test the shocks should be applied first as an increase in lapse
rates (lapse sensitive) in all policy years, and then as a decrease in lapse rates (lapse supported)
in all policy years. The designation is done on a portfolio basis based on the largest present value
using either CALM valuation rates, or the discount rates specified in section 6.1 (note that the
present value under each test may be lower than the best estimate present value net of registered
reinsurance). Once the designation is set, it is used for the application of the appropriate shocks
for catastrophe risk and the calculation of the lapse supported and lapse sensitive components of
the diversification matrix.

6.5.2. Level and trend risk

A combined component is calculated for level and trend risk. The combined shock is a
permanent ±30% change in Best Estimate Assumptions for the lapse rate at each age and
duration, with lapse shocks applied in a manner consistent with how lapse MfADs are applied for
valuation purposes.90 In applying the level and trend shocks insurers may determine the
direction of the shocks by comparing cash surrender values with liabilities calculated using either
CALM valuation rates, or the discount rates specified in section 6.1.

The combined component for lapse level and trend risk is the difference between the present
value of the shocked cash flows and the present value of best estimate cash flows.

6.5.3. Volatility risk

The shock for volatility risk is ±30% in the first year87 and is calculated independently of the
shock used for level and trend risk (section 6.5.2). The shock should be applied in a manner
consistent with how lapse MfADs are applied for valuation purposes90. The shocked cash flows
after year one are the best estimate cash flows as affected by the shock in the first year.

90
As described in the CIA Educational Note Margins for Adverse Deviations dated November 2006. The resulting
aggregate capital requirement for each portfolio should be positive.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 133
The first year shock on lapse rates is the sum of the impacts of a ±30% shock for level and trend
risk and a ±30% shock for volatility risk, so that the lapse volatility shock may be quantified as:
PV of cash flows (lapse shocked at +/-60% in first year) – PV of cash flows (lapse
shocked at +/-30% in first year)87,

where 60% represents lapse volatility shock plus level and trend shocks and 30% represents only
the level and trend shocks.

The risk charge for any portfolio is floored at zero.

6.5.4. Catastrophe risk

The shocks for catastrophe risk are:

1) For lapse sensitive products, an absolute increase of 20 percentage points in the Best
Estimate Assumption for lapse for the first year87 only; and
2) For lapse supported products, a 40% proportional reduction of the Best Estimate
Assumption for lapse in the first year87 only.

The catastrophe risk component for any portfolio cannot be negative.

The lapse catastrophe risk component is the difference between the present value of shocked
cash flows and the present value of best estimate cash flows.

6.6. Expense risk

Expense risk is the risk associated with the unfavourable variability of expenses incurred in
servicing insurance or reinsurance contracts (e.g., the variability in expense liability cash flows
due to the variation of the in force policies, excess claims, lapses and surrenders, new business
decrease and other circumstances that could have an impact on unit expenses).

All maintenance expenses that are estimated (including non-commission premium and claim
expenses) are included in the shocks. Tax timing differences reflected in liabilities, and expenses
that are contractually guaranteed by third parties are excluded from the shocks.

Expense risk required capital is calculated in aggregate for level, trend, volatility and catastrophe
risks for each geographic region.

6.6.1. Level, trend, volatility and catastrophe risk

The combined shock is a permanent shock on the Best Estimate Assumptions for expenses
including inflation91 for all insurance products87. The shock is an increase of 20% in the first year
followed by a permanent increase of 10% in all subsequent policy years. Expense shocks are
applied to maintenance expenses. Premium taxes and investment income tax are excluded.

91
The Best Estimate Assumption for inflation is the same as that assumed in the CALM base scenario and should
not be adjusted to reflect prescribed discount rates (q.v. section 6.1) used to calculate the capital requirement.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 134
Required capital for expense risk is the difference between the present value of the shocked cash
flows and the present value of best estimate cash flows.

6.7 Property and casualty risk

If an insurer has a composite subsidiary that writes both life insurance and property and casualty
(P&C) insurance, it is required to calculate the subsidiary’s capital requirements for life
insurance risks using the LICAT guideline, and the requirements for P&C insurance risks using
the MCT Guideline. The MCT insurance risk requirements used within the LICAT insurance risk
calculation are at the MCT target level, and are not divided by 1.5. The subsidiary’s requirements
for both life and P&C risks are included in the calculation of the aggregate insurance risk
requirement (q.v. section 11.2.1). Where the MCT Guideline does not address insurance risk
requirements relating to a specific P&C insurance risk, insurers should contact OSFI in order to
determine the capital requirement.

6.8 Credit for reinsurance and special policyholder arrangements

6.8.1 Unregistered reinsurance

Under unregistered reinsurance arrangements (q.v. section 10.1.2), excess deposits placed by the
reinsurer (q.v. section 10.5.4) that can be applied against losses under a specific reinsurance
agreement or group of agreements may be recognized as Eligible Deposits for the purpose of
calculating the Total Ratio and Core Ratio (q.v. section 1.1). The limit on excess deposits that are
eligible for recognition is:

𝐴𝐶 + 𝑆𝐴
min ( , 1.5) × (𝑆𝐵0 − 𝑆𝐵1 − 𝑅) − 𝑃𝐹𝐴𝐷
𝑆𝐵2

where:

1) AC is the insurer’s total Available Capital or Available Margin

2) SA is the insurer’s Surplus Allowance (q.v. section 1.1.3) calculated net of all reinsurance

3) SB0 is the Base Solvency Buffer (q.v. section 11.3) for the insurer’s entire book of
business calculated net of registered reinsurance only

4) SB1 is the Base Solvency Buffer87 calculated net of:

a. registered reinsurance,
b. the insurance risks reinsured under the agreements, and
c. the currency risk requirement related to the agreements (q.v. section 5.6.8)

5) SB2 is the Base Solvency Buffer calculated net of all reinsurance, and all currency risk
requirements related to unregistered reinsurance
6) R is the amount of any retained loss positions (q.v. section 10.5.2) under the agreements
Life A LICAT
October 2018 135
 7) PFAD is the CALM provision for adverse deviation for the insurance risks reinsured
under the agreements.
In the intermediate steps of the calculations of SB0, SB1 and SB2, the quantity A (q.v. section
11.2.2) includes all of the requirements for credit and market risks related to unregistered
reinsurance collateral (q.v. section 10.4.3) except for the currency risk requirements specific to
the calculation. The statistical fluctuation factors (q.v. section 11.1) used in the calculations of
SB0, SB1 and SB2 will vary depending on which of these solvency buffers is being calculated. The
operational risk components of SB0, SB1 and SB2 are all equal, and are calculated as specified in
chapter 8 without modification.

All excess deposits recognized in Eligible Deposits must be contractually fully available to cover
any losses arising from the risks for which an insurer is taking credit. If a portion of an excess
deposit is not contractually available to cover losses arising from a risk that is included in the
above limit, this portion of the deposit may not be recognized in Eligible Deposits. For example,
if the limit on deposits eligible for recognition is $500, but an unregistered reinsurance
agreement only covers excess losses up to $300, then the portion of the deposit above $300 may
not be recognized in Eligible Deposits, even if the total amount covered under the reinsurance
agreement is above the Requisite Level in section 10.5.2.

6.8.2 Policyholder deposits

Qualifying policyholder deposits, excluding actuarial and claim reserves and any due refund
provisions, may be used to reduce the insurance risk requirement92 for a policy. Such deposits
must be:
1) made by policyholders,
2) available for claims payment (e.g., claims fluctuation and premium stabilization reserves,
and accrued provision for experience refunds), and
3) returnable, net of applications, to policyholders on policy termination.

When an insurer is able to recover excess losses from a deposit for a particular policy on a first-
dollar, 100% coinsurance basis, the amount by which required capital may be reduced is the
lower of the deposit amount, or the sum of the marginal policy requirements (as defined in
section 2.1.2.9.2) for each of the insurance risks mitigated by the deposit, calculated net of all
reinsurance. If the amount that the insurer is able to recover from a deposit is subject to a risk-
sharing arrangement, the insurer may only take credit for the deposit if the dollar amounts of
both the losses borne by the insurer and by the policyholder under the arrangement do not
decrease as total excess claims increase. If a risk-sharing arrangement is eligible for credit, the
amount by which required capital may be reduced is the lower of the deposit amount, or the
portion of the marginal policy requirements for the policy that would be allocated to the
policyholder under the risk-sharing formula.

92
Deposits made by agents or brokers meeting the same conditions as qualifying deposits made by policyholders
may also be recognized.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 136
6.8.3 Adjustments for group business

Required capital may be reduced if a group benefit included in the calculation of the insurance
risk requirement carries one of the following risk-reduction features that provides for a full
transfer of risk:
1) “guaranteed no risk”,
2) deficit repayment by policyholders, or
3) a “hold harmless” agreement where the policyholder has a legally enforceable debt to the
insurer.

The amount by which required capital may be reduced is equal to a scaling factor multiplied by
the sum of the marginal policy requirements for the policy (q.v. section 2.1.2.9.2) calculated net
of all reinsurance. The scaling factor to be used is 95% if the group policyholder is the Canadian
Government or a provincial or territorial government in Canada, and 85% for all other
policyholders.

Where a policy has one of the above risk-reduction features, but the maximum recoverable
amount (as specified in the insurance contract) from the policyholder is subject to a limit, the
credit for the risk-reduction feature is calculated in the same manner as the credit for qualifying
deposits in section 6.8.2, with the following modifications:
1) the maximum recoverable amount is used in place of the deposit amount in the
calculation, and
2) the credit amount is multiplied by 95% if the group policyholder is the Canadian
Government or a provincial or territorial government in Canada, and by 85% for all other
policyholders.

6.8.4 Reinsurance claims fluctuation reserves and similar arrangements

Claims fluctuation reserves, deposits, or loss positions retained by a ceding insurer that serve to
reduce the assuming insurer’s risk under a reinsurance agreement may be included in the Eligible
Deposits of the assuming insurer. The limit on such reserves, deposits or loss positions that are
eligible for recognition is:
𝐴𝐶 + 𝑆𝐴
min ( , 1.5) × (𝑆𝐵2 − 𝑆𝐵3 − 𝑑) − 𝑃𝐹𝐴𝐷
𝑆𝐵2

where:

 AC, SA and SB2 are as defined in section 6.8.1

 SB3 is the Base Solvency Buffer87 calculated net of all reinsurance and all currency risk
requirements related to unregistered reinsurance, and additionally excluding the
reinsurance agreement for which the claims fluctuation reserve or other arrangement is in
place

Life A LICAT
October 2018 137
  d is the amount of any reductions that have been made to the Base Solvency Buffer on
account of policyholder deposits and group business adjustments (qq.v. sections 6.8.2 and
6.8.3) for the business assumed under the reinsurance agreement.
 PFAD is the CALM provision for adverse deviation, net of all reinsurance, for the
insurance risks assumed under the agreement.

6.8.5 Stop loss arrangements

A ceding insurer may reduce its insurance capital requirement for risks it has reinsured under
stop loss treaties (including catastrophe covers). A credit is calculated separately for each
component of the insurance risk requirement, before between-risk diversification. For all
components except mortality volatility risk, the credit is measured as the increase in the value of
the reinsurance asset corresponding to a stop loss treaty under the shocks specified for the
component (the cash flows projected for the component do not include amounts recovered under
the treaty). For mortality volatility risk, the credit is measured by calculating the reduction in the
variance of the upcoming year’s net death claims.

Any reduction in required capital for insurance risk is subject to the prior approval of the
Superintendent. To obtain such approval, it is necessary for the ceding insurer to demonstrate the
validity of its valuation methodology for the stop loss reinsurance asset under the relevant
insurance risk shocks. As a minimum requirement for approval, the valuation methodology must
encompass more than deterministic valuation of a single set of cash flows.

If the assuming insurer providing the stop loss protection is subject to the requirements of this
guideline, the ceding insurer should retain in its records the assuming insurer’s actuary’s
certification that the assuming company has included all reductions claimed by the ceding
insurer in its own LICAT insurance risk calculation. If the stop-loss arrangement constitutes
unregistered reinsurance under section 10.1, the treatment of excess deposits placed to cover the
ceded insurance risk requirement is the same as in section 6.8.1.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 138
Chapter 7 Segregated Fund Guarantee Risk
This component is for the risk associated with investment or performance-related guarantees on
segregated funds or other similar products. The risk is determined using prescribed or approved
factors, or, subject to an insurer obtaining prior approval, an internal model.

OSFI permits, subject to materiality considerations, criteria and explicit prior approval, the use of
internal models for the development of segregated fund capital requirements. Insurers seeking to
use internal models should follow the requirements outlined in OSFI’s Instruction Guide: Use of
Internal Models for Determining Required Capital for Segregated Fund Risks (LICAT) dated
March 2002, Advisory: Revised Guidance for Companies that Determine Segregated Fund
Guarantee Capital Requirements Using an Approved Model dated December 2010, and
Advisory: Supplementary Information for Life Insurance Companies that Determine Segregated
Fund Guarantee Capital Requirements Using an Approved Model dated April 2009.

7.1. Products
Capital factors are provided for a variety of standardized product forms for guaranteed minimum
death and maturity benefits commonly offered for segregated fund guarantee products in Canada
and the United States. Below is a general description of the product forms modeled. More details
can be found in Table 4 of section 7.5.

Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit (GMDB) forms modeled include the following:

1) Return of Premium (ROP): provides a death benefit guarantee equal to the higher of the
account value or the premiums paid.
2) 5% Annual Roll-up (ROLL): provides a guaranteed benefit that increases 5% per annum
compounded at each contract anniversary with the guarantee frozen at age 80.
3) Maximum Anniversary Value/Annual Ratchet (MAV): automatic annual reset of
guarantee at each contract anniversary with resets frozen at age 80.
4) 10-year Rollover Contract (GMDB_10): guarantee can reset and term-to-maturity also
will reset to 10 years. No resets are permitted in the final 10 years prior to contract
maturity.

Guaranteed Minimum Maturity Benefits (GMMB) forms modeled include:

1) Fixed Maturity Date (FIXED): guarantee is level and applies up to the fixed maturity
date.
2) 10-year Rollover Maturity Benefit (GMMB_10): guarantee can be reset and term-to-
maturity also resets to 10 years. No resets are permitted in the 10 years prior to contract
maturity.
3) Guaranteed Minimum Surrender Benefit After 10 Years (GMSB_10): guarantee comes
into effect 10 years after contract issue. If the guaranteed value at 10 years is greater than
the account value at surrender, a “top-up” benefit equal to the difference is paid.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 139
7.2. Documentation and reporting
Given the complexity of this calculation, for auditing purposes the Appointed Actuary is required
to keep supporting schedules of all the calculations for each step building up to the final numbers
detailed in the LICAT Quarterly Return and LICAT Annual Supplement. Also, the Appointed
Actuary is required to detail the calculation in the segregated fund section of the Appointed
Actuary’s Report. Pages 70.100 and 70.200 must be completed.

The columns of the reporting form on page 70.100 are filled in as follows:

Column 01 - Guaranteed Value

This is the amount guaranteed in all segregated funds. If the funds are subject to
guarantees of differing amounts, for example 100% on death and 75% on maturity, report
the larger amount here.

Column 02 - Market Value

This is the market value of all segregated funds.

Column 03 - Total Gross Calculated Requirements

This is the total gross calculated requirement for all segregated funds.

Column 04 - Credit for Reinsurance Ceded

Report credit for amounts ceded in column 04. Note that amounts ceded under
unregistered reinsurance (q.v. section 10.1) must be deducted from Available
Capital/Margin on page 20.030 of the LICAT Quarterly Return or LICAT Annual
Supplement. Deposits held for unregistered reinsurance, for a period not less than the
remaining guarantee term, in excess of policy liabilities and any required margins (q.v.
section 10.5) can be used to reduce the net required segregated fund risk component on
the reinsured policies to a minimum of zero.

Column 05 - Net Requirements

This is determined as:

(Total Gross Calculated Requirements – Credit for Reinsurance Ceded)

Column 06 – Credit for OSFI-Approved Hedging Programs

This is the dollar equivalent of the maximum allowable reduction. It is determined as:

(Maximum allowable percentage reduction × Net Requirements)

Life A LICAT
October 2018 140
 where the maximum percentage reduction is the reduction that was determined at the
time of approval. See the OSFI Advisory: Recognition of Hedge Contracts in the
Determination of the Segregated Fund Guarantee Capital Requirement for Life
Insurance Companies dated December 2008.

This column may also be used to enter the amount of a negative Guaranteed Minimum
Withdrawal Benefit Hedging Liability (enter the amount as a positive value in this
column) to effectively floor this negative value at zero in determining the Net Required
Component in Column 8.

Column 07 - Net Actuarial Liabilities Held

This is the total net actuarial liability held on the balance sheet for segregated fund
guarantee risks, excluding deferred income taxes93.

Column 08 - Net Required Component

This is determined as:

(Net Requirements (column 5) – Credit for OSFI-Approved Hedging Programs

(column 6) – Net Actuarial Liabilities Held (column7)) × 1.25

Net required component is multiplied by 1.25 to bring the required capital to the
supervisory target level.

Line 920 must not be less than zero in total.

The columns of the reporting form on page 70.200 are filled in as follows:

Column 01 - Factor Requirements on Business

This is the gross calculated requirement based on the OSFI-approved factors.

Column 02 - OSFI Approved Internal Model Requirements

For OSFI-approved models, this is the gross calculated requirement based on company-
specific internal models.

Column 03 - Total Gross Calculated Requirements

For OSFI-approved models, transition rules apply:

93
Wherever the term “Net Actuarial Liabilities Held” or a similar term appears, it should be calculated on a basis
that is consistent with the calculation of the TGCR with respect to the inclusion or exclusion of deferred income
taxes.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 141
 In the first year of approval, Total Gross Calculated Requirements = 50% of the Factor
Requirements + 50% of the Internal Model Requirements.

Thereafter, Total Gross Calculated Requirements = 100% of the Internal Model

Requirements.

Otherwise, Total Gross Calculated Requirements = 100% of the Factor Requirements.

Column 04 - Credit for Reinsurance Ceded

Report credit for amounts ceded in column 04. Note that policy liabilities ceded under
unregistered reinsurance (q.v. section 10.1) must be deducted from Available
Capital/Margin on page 20.300 of the LICAT Quarterly Return or LICAT Annual
Supplement. Deposits held for unregistered reinsurance, for a period not less than the
remaining guarantee term, in excess of policy liabilities and any required margins (q.v.
section 10.5) can be used to reduce the net required segregated fund risk component on
the reinsured policies to a minimum of zero.

Column 05 - Net Requirements

This is determined as:

(Total Gross Calculated Requirements (column 3) – Credit for Reinsurance Ceded

(column 4))

Column 06 - Credit for OSFI-Approved Hedging Programs

This is the dollar equivalent of the maximum allowable reduction. It is determined as:

(Maximum allowable percentage reduction × Net Requirements (column 5))

where the maximum percentage reduction is the reduction that was determined at the
time of approval. See the OSFI Advisory: Recognition of Hedge Contracts in the
Determination of the Segregated Fund Guarantee Capital Requirement for Life
Insurance Companies dated December 2008.

This column may also be used to enter the amount of a negative Guaranteed Minimum
Withdrawal Benefit Hedging Liability (enter the amount as a positive value in this
column) to effectively floor this negative value at zero in determining the Net Required
Component in Column 8.

Column 07 - Net Actuarial Liabilities Held

This is the total net actuarial liability held on the balance sheet for segregated fund
guarantee risks, excluding deferred income taxes93.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 142
Column 08 - Net Required Component

This is determined as:

(Net Requirements (column 5) – Credit for OSFI Approved Hedging Programs

(column6) – Net Actuarial Liabilities Held (column 7)) × 1.25

Net required component is multiplied by 1.25 to bring the required capital to the
supervisory target level.

Note that the amount reported on page 70.100, column 08 should be the same as the amount
reported on page 70.200, column 08.

7.3. Total gross calculated requirement

7.3.1. Overview

It is expected that the LICAT methodology for Total Gross Calculated Requirement (“TGCR”)
will be applied on a policy-by-policy basis (i.e., seriatim). If the company adopts a cell-based
approach, only materially similar contracts should be grouped together. Specifically, all policies
comprising a “cell” must display substantially similar characteristics for those attributes expected
to affect risk-based capital (e.g., definition of guaranteed benefits, attained age, policy duration,
years-to-maturity, market-to-guaranteed value, and asset mix). The TGCR and Net Actuarial
Liabilities held for the purpose of determining capital requirements for segregated funds using
prescribed or approved factors should not include deferred income taxes.

The portfolio TGCR is the sum of the TGCR calculations for each policy or cell. The result for
any given policy (cell) may be negative, zero or positive. In total, the TGCR cannot be negative.

The TGCR for a given policy is equal to:

𝑇𝐺𝐶𝑅 = 𝐺𝑉 × 𝑓̂(𝜃̃) − 𝐴𝑉 × 𝑔̂(𝜃̃)

where:
 GV = current guaranteed minimum benefit,
 AV = current account balance,
 𝑓̂(𝜃̃)= benefit cost factor,
 𝑔̂(𝜃̃) = margin offset factor and
 𝜃̃is a vector that defines the risk characteristics for the policy.

The factors 𝑓̂(𝜃̃) and 𝑔̂(𝜃̃) are described more fully in section 7.7.1. The TGCR is calculated
separately for each guaranteed minimum benefit (i.e., death, maturity and surrender).

The model assumptions for the TGCR Factors are documented in section 7.3.2.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 143
There are four (4) major steps in determining the TGCR for a given policy/cell:
a) Classify the asset exposure (section 7.4);
b) Determine the risk attributes (section 7.5);
c) Retrieve the appropriate nodes (section 7.6);
d) Use the supplied functions to determine the requirement (section 7.7).

The first step requires the company to categorize the asset value for the given policy/cell by
mapping the entire exposure to one of the prescribed “fund classes” as described in section 7.4.
TGCR factors are provided for each asset class.

The second step requires the company to determine (or derive) the appropriate attributes for the
given policy or cell. The attributes needed to access the factor tables and calculate the required
values are:
1) Product form (“Guarantee Definition”), P.
2) Guarantee level, G.
3) Adjustment to guaranteed value upon partial withdrawal (“GMDB/GMMB Adjustment”),
A.
4) Fund class, F.
5) Attained age of the policyholder, X, (for GMDB only, use a 4-year setback for female
lives).
6) Contract maturity age, M, (for GMDB only, use a 4-year setback for female lives).
7) Time-to-next maturity date, T.
8) Ratio of account value to guaranteed value, .
9) Total “equivalent” account-based charges, MER (“management expense ratio”).
10) Reset utilization rate, R (where applicable).
11) In-the-money termination rate, S (guaranteed surrender benefits only).

Other required policy values include:

12) Total account value on which the guaranteed benefit is calculated, AV.
13) Current GMDB, GMMB and/or GMSB.
14) Total net spread available to fund guaranteed benefits (“margin offset”), .

The next steps – retrieving the appropriate nodes and using the supplied functions to determine
the requirement – are explained in sections 7.6 and 7.7. Software tools have been developed to
assist companies in these efforts. If an insurer is unable to use the supplied tools, it will be
required to develop software of its own. In such a situation, the insurer should contact OSFI for
specific guidance on how to develop its own lookup and extraction routines. A calculation

Life A LICAT
October 2018 144
example demonstrating the application of the various component factors to a sample policy is
provided in section 7.7.2.

In this chapter, GMDB, GMMB, GMSB are generically denoted by GV. AV generically denotes
either Account Value or Market Value. The total “equivalent” account charges should include all
amounts assessed against policyholder accounts, expressed as a level spread per year (in basis
points). This quantity is called the Management Expense Ratio (“MER”) and is defined as the
average amount (in dollars) charged against policyholder funds in a given year divided by
average account value. Normally, the MER would vary by fund class and be the sum of
investment management fees, mortality & expense charges, guarantee fees/risk premiums, and
other items. The total spread available to fund the guaranteed benefits (i.e., GMDB, GMMB,
GMSB costs) is called the “margin offset” (denoted by ) and should be net of spread-based
costs and expenses (e.g., net of maintenance expenses, investment management fees, trailer
commissions, and amounts required to provide for amortization of deferred acquisition costs).
Section 7.8 describes how to determine MER and  .

The GMDB/GMMB/GMSB definition for a given policy/cell may not exactly correspond to
those provided. In some cases, it may be reasonable to use the factors/formulas for a different
product form. In other cases, the company might determine the TGCR based on two different
guarantee definitions and interpolate the results to obtain an appropriate value for the given
policy/cell. However, if the policy form is sufficiently different from those provided and there is
no practical or obvious way to obtain a reasonable result, the insurer should follow the
instructions outlined in section 7.10.

The general form of the TGCR may be written as:

𝛼
𝑇𝐺𝐶𝑅 = 𝐺𝑉 × ℎ(𝜃̃) × 𝑤(𝜃̃) × 𝑓(𝜃̃) − × 𝐴𝑉 × 𝑔(𝜃̃)
100

where:
𝐺𝑉 = current guaranteed minimum benefit (dollars)
𝐴𝑉 = current account value (dollars)
𝑓(𝜃̃) = cost factor per $1 of 𝐺𝑉
𝑔(𝜃̃) = margin offset factor per $1 of 𝐴𝑉 (assuming 100 bps of available spread)
ℎ(𝜃̃) = asset mix diversification factor
𝑤(𝜃̃) = time diversification factor

Under this notation, 𝜃̃is used to generically represent the risk attribute set (e.g., product form,
guaranteed level, asset class, attained age, etc.) for the policy, or some relevant subset thereof.
 is the company-determined net spread (“margin offset”, in basis points per annum) available
to fund the guaranteed benefits.

Where more than one feature (i.e., guaranteed benefit) is present in a product, unless the
company has a justifiable alternative for allocating the total available spread between the benefit
types (e.g. explicitly defined risk charges), the split should be based on the proportionate gross
guaranteed benefit costs. An example is provided in section 7.7.2 to illustrate this concept.
Life A LICAT
October 2018 145
In practice, 𝑓(𝜃̃), 𝑔(𝜃̃), ℎ(𝜃̃) and 𝑤(𝜃̃) are values interpolated from the factor grid. The use of the
factor grid is discussed more fully in section 7.7. The factor grid is a large pre-computed table
developed using stochastic modeling for a wide array of combinations of the risk attribute set.
The risk attribute set is defined by those policy/product characteristics that affect the risk profile
(exposure) of the business: product form (guarantee definition), fund class, attained age,
AV/GV ratio, time-to-maturity, etc.

7.3.2. Assumptions for TGCR methodology published factors

Each node in the factor grid is effectively the modeled result for a given “cell” assuming a $100
single deposit.

Table 1: Model Assumptions & Product Characteristics

Account Charges (MER) Vary by fund class. See Table 2 later in this section.
Base Margin Offset 100 basis points per annum.
 ROP = return of premium.
 ROLL = 5% compound roll-up, frozen at age 80.
GMDB Description
 MAV = annual ratchet (maximum anniversary value), frozen at age 80.
 GMDB_10 = 10-year rollover contract.
 FIXED = fixed maturity date.
GMMB & GMSB Descriptions  GMSB_10 = 10-year guaranteed surrender benefit.
 GMMB_10 = 10-year rollover maturity benefit.
GV Adjustment on Withdrawal “Pro-Rata by Market Value” and “Dollar-for-Dollar” are tested separately.
Surrender Charges Ignored (i.e., zero).
Base Policy Lapse Rate 6% p.a. at all policy durations. See also “Dynamic Lapse Multiplier”.
Partial Withdrawals Flat 4% p.a. at all policy durations (as a % of AV). No dynamics.
Rollover (Renewal) Rate 85% at the end of each 10-year term (GMDB_10 and GMMB_10 only).
Actual lapse rate =   [ Base Policy Lapse Rate ], where:
    AV  
  MIN  , MAX  , a  b   c  d  MIN (h,T ) 
     
Dynamic Lapse Multiplier
    GV  
  = 1.6667,  
= 0.3333, a = –0.0952, b = 0.8010, c = 0.6279, d = 0.0654,
h = 10 and T = time-to-next maturity.
Mortality 100% of CIA 1986–92 ALB Male Aggregate Ultimate.
Fixed Expenses, Annual Fees Ignored (i.e. zero).
Discount Rate 5.5% annual effective (non-dynamic).
Whenever the AV/GV ratio exceeds 115% (maximum 2 resets per year). No
Elective Reset of GV
resets are permitted in the 10 years prior to the final “contract” maturity date.
In-The-Money Surrender Whenever the benefit is payable (i.e., 10 years after issue or last reset) and the
(GMSB_10 only) AV/GV ratio is less 85%.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 146
Notes on Factor Development:

1) The GMDB roll-up is compounded (not simple interest, not stepped at each anniversary)
and is applied to the previous roll-up guaranteed value.
2) The “Base Policy Lapse Rate” is the rate of policy termination (surrenders). Policy
terminations (surrenders) are assumed to occur throughout the policy year (not only on
anniversaries).
3) Partial withdrawals are assumed to occur at the end of each time period (quarterly).
4) Account charges (“MER”) represent the total amount (annualized, in basis points)
assessed against policyholder funds (e.g., sum of investment management fees, mortality
and expense charges, risk premiums, and policy/administrative fees). They are assumed
to occur throughout the policy year (not only on anniversaries).
5) For the GMDB_10 and GMMB_10 products, the contract rolls over (renews) at the end
of each 10-year term for another 10 years. The guaranteed benefit resets to Z% of MV
(after payment of any top-up maturity benefit for in-the-money maturity guarantees)
where Z is typically 75 or 100.
6) The guaranteed minimum surrender benefit (GMSB_10) comes into effect 10 years after
contract issue. If the guaranteed value at 10 years is greater than the account value at
surrender, a “top-up” benefit equal to the difference is paid.

Table 2: Account-Based Fund Charges (bps per annum)

Account Value
Asset Class / Fund
Charges
(MER)
Money Market 110
Fixed Income (Bond) 200
Balanced 250
Low Volatility Equity 265
Diversified Equity 265
Intermediate Risk Equity 280
Aggressive or Exotic Equity 295

The annualized total fund depletion rates (i.e., including the fixed 4% per annum partial
withdrawal) are illustrated in Figure 1 for various AV/GV ratios and times to maturity.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 147
Figure 1: Fund Depletion Rates (Lapse + Partial Withdrawal) by AV/GV Ratio & Time-to-Maturity

16%
AV/GV Ratio
0.50
0.75
14% 1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75

12%

10%

8%

6%

4%
10 11 12
Time-to-Next Maturity (Years)

7.4. Classifying the asset exposure

7.4.1. Definition of asset classes

The following criteria should be used to select the appropriate factors, parameters and formulas
for the exposure represented by a specified guaranteed benefit. When available, the volatility of
the long-term annualized total return for the fund(s) – or an appropriate benchmark – should
conform to the limits presented. For this purpose, “long-term” is defined as twice the average
projection period that would be applied to test the product in a stochastic model (generally, at
least 25 years).

Where data for the fund or benchmark are too sparse or unreliable, the fund exposure should be
moved to the next higher volatility class than otherwise indicated. In reviewing the asset
classifications, care should be taken to reflect any additional volatility of returns added by the
presence of currency risk, liquidity (bid-ask) effects, short selling and speculative positions.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 148
All exposures/funds must be categorized into one of the following seven (7) asset classes:
1) Money Market/Short-Term
2) Fixed Income
3) Balanced
4) Low Volatility Equity
5) Broad-Based Diversified Equity
6) Intermediate Risk Equity
7) Aggressive or Exotic Equity

Money Market/Short-Term. The fund is invested in money market instruments with an average
remaining term-to-maturity of less than 365 days.

Fixed Income. The fund is invested primarily in investment grade fixed income securities. Up to
25% of the fund within this class may be invested in diversified equities or high-yield bonds. The
expected volatility of the fund returns will be lower than the Balanced fund class.

Balanced. This class is a combination of fixed income securities with a larger equity component.
The fixed income component should exceed 25% of the portfolio. Additionally, any aggressive
or ‘specialized’ equity component should not exceed one-third (33.3%) of the total equities held.
Should the fund violate either of these constraints, it should be categorized as an equity fund.
These funds usually have a long-term volatility in the range of 8%  13%.

Low Volatility Equity. This fund is comparable to the Broad-Based Diversified Equity class with
the additional attributes noted below. Only funds that otherwise would be classified as Broad-
Based Diversified Equity are candidates for this fund classification. For foreign funds, volatility
should take into account the impact of currency fluctuations.

The expected volatility of the fund should be less than 15.5% (annualized) and the
aggressive/exotic equity component of the equity holdings should be less than 33.3% of the total
equities by market value. Further, the overall asset holdings should satisfy at least one of the
following conditions:
1) The fund permanently maintains a relatively large cash or fixed income position (greater
than 10% of the market value of assets) as part of its investment strategy;
2) The fund is “income” oriented and contains a significant (greater than 10% of the market
value of assets) proportion of stocks paying material and regular dividends that are
automatically reinvested in the fund.

Broad-Based Diversified Equity. The fund is invested in a well-diversified mix of Canadian,

U.S. or global equities. The foreign equity component must be comprised of liquid securities in
well-developed markets. Funds in this category would exhibit long-term volatility comparable to

Life A LICAT
October 2018 149
that of the TSX. These funds should usually have a long-term volatility in the range of
13%  19%.

Intermediate Risk Equity. The fund has a mix of characteristics from both the Diversified and
Aggressive Equity Classes. These funds have a long-term volatility in the range of 19%  25%.

Aggressive or Exotic Equity. This class comprises more volatile funds where risk can arise from:
(a) underdeveloped markets, (b) uncertain markets, (c) high volatility of returns, (d) narrow focus
(e.g., specific market sector), and other sources. The fund (or market benchmark) either does not
have sufficient history to allow for the calculation of a long-term expected volatility, or the
volatility is very high. This class would be used whenever the long-term expected annualized
volatility is indeterminable or exceeds 25%.

7.4.2. Selecting appropriate investment classes

The selection of an appropriate investment type should be done at the level for which the
guarantee applies. For guarantees applying on a deposit-by-deposit basis, the fund selection is
straightforward. However, where the guarantee applies across deposits or for an entire contract,
the approach can be more complicated. In such instances, the approach is to identify for each
policy where the “grouped holdings” fit within the categories listed and to classify the associated
assets on this basis.

A seriatim process is used to identify the “grouped” fund holdings, to assess the risk profile of
the current fund holdings (possibly calculating the expected long-term volatility of the funds held
with reference to the indicated market proxies), and to classify the entire ‘asset exposure’ into
one of the specified choices. Here, ‘asset exposure’ refers to the underlying assets (segregated
and/or general account investment options) on which the guarantee will be determined. For
example, if the guarantee applies separately for each deposit year within the contract, then the
classification process would be applied separately for the exposure of each deposit year.

In summary, mapping the benefit exposure (i.e., the asset exposure that applies to the calculation
of the guaranteed minimum benefits) to one of the prescribed asset classes is a multi-step
process:
1) Map each separate and/or general account investment option to one of the prescribed
asset classes. For some funds, this mapping will be obvious, but for others it will involve
a review of the fund’s investment policy, performance benchmarks, composition and
expected long-term volatility.
2) Combine the mapped exposure to determine the expected long-term volatility of current
fund holdings. This will require a calculation based on the expected long-term volatilities
for each fund and the correlations between the prescribed asset classes as given in Table 3.
3) Evaluate the asset composition and expected volatility (as calculated in step 2) of current
holdings to determine the single asset class that best represents the exposure, with due
consideration to the constraints and guidelines presented earlier in this section.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 150
 In step 1, the company should use the fund’s actual experience (i.e., historical performance,
inclusive of reinvestment) only as a guide in determining the expected long-term volatility. Due
to limited data and changes in investment objectives, style and/or management (e.g., fund
mergers, revised investment policy, and different fund managers), the company may need to give
more weight to the expected long-term volatility of the fund’s benchmarks. In general, the
company should exercise caution and not be overly optimistic in assuming that future returns
will consistently be less volatile than the underlying markets.

In step 2, the company should calculate the “volatility of current fund holdings” (  for the
exposure being categorized) by the following formula using the volatilities and correlations in
Table 3.

n n
   w w i j ij i j
 i1 j 1


 AVi
where wi  is the relative value of fund i expressed as a proportion of total contract
 AV k

value, ij is the correlation between asset classes i and j and  i is the volatility of asset class i

(see Table 3).

Table 3: Volatilities and Correlations for Prescribed Asset Classes

ANNUAL GENERAL MONEY FIXED LOW VOL DIVERSE INTERM AGGR

BALANCED
VOLATILITY ACCOUNT MARKET INCOME EQUITY EQUITY EQUITY EQUITY
GENERAL
1% 1 0.50 0.15 0 0 0 0 0
ACCOUNT
MONEY
1% 0.50 1 0.20 0 0 0 0 0
MARKET
FIXED
6% INCOME
0.15 0.20 1 0.50 0.25 0.25 0.20 0.10

11% BALANCED 0 0 0.50 1 0.80 0.95 0.75 0.65

LOW VOL
15% 0 0 0.25 0.80 1 0.80 0.75 0.65
EQUITY
DIVERSE
17% 0 0 0.25 0.95 0.80 1 0.75 0.65
EQUITY
INTERM
22% 0 0 0.20 0.75 0.75 0.75 1 0.70
EQUITY
AGGR
26% 0 0 0.10 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.70 1
EQUITY

Life A LICAT
October 2018 151
 Example: Fund Categorization

Suppose three funds (Fixed Income, Diversified Equity and Aggressive Equity) are offered to
clients on a product with a contract level guarantee (i.e., across all funds held within the policy).
The current fund holdings (in dollars) for five sample contracts are as follows:

1 2 3 4 5
MV Fund X (Fixed Income): 5,000 6,000 8,000 - 5,000
MV Fund Y (Diversified Equity): 9,000 5,000 2,000 5,000 -
MV Fund Z (Aggressive Equity): 1,000 4,000 - 5,000 5,000
Total Market Value: $15,000 $15,000 $10,000 $10,000 $10,000

Total Equity Market Value: $10,000 $9,000 $2,000 $10,000 $5,000

Fixed Income % (A): 33% 40% 80% 0% 50%

Fixed Income Test (A>75%): No No Yes No No

Aggressive % of Equity (B): 10% 44% n/a 50% 100%

Balanced Test (A>25% &
Yes No n/a No No
B<33.3%):
Volatility of Current Fund
12.0% 12.1% 6.5% 19.6% 13.6%
Holdings:
Fund Classification: Balanced Diversified94 Fixed Income Intermediate Diversified

The “Volatility of Fund Holdings” for policy #1 is calculated as A  B  12.04% where:

5  9  1 
A   0.06    0.17    0.26 
15  15  15 
 1.1104%

B  2   0.250.060.17  2   0.100.060.26  2   0.650.170.26

5 9 5 1 9 1
15 15  15 15  15 15 
 0.3388%

Importantly, the volatility would be understated if we assumed zero correlation (e.g. if all
market returns are independent) since B contributes materially to the final value.

94
Although the volatility suggests “Balanced Fund”, the Balanced Fund criteria were not met. Therefore, this
exposure is moved “up” to Diversified Equity. For those funds classified as Diversified Equity, additional
analysis would be required to assess whether they can be reclassified as “Low Volatility Equity”. In the examples
above, none qualify.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 152
7.5. Determining the risk attributes
The ‘Tabular’ approach for the TGCR component creates a multi-dimensional grid (array) by
testing a very large number of combinations for the policy attributes. The results are expressed as
factors. The TGCR is calculated by looking into (based on a “key”) the large, pre-computed
multi-dimensional tables and using multi-dimensional linear interpolation. The lookup “key”
depends on the risk attributes for the policy 𝜃̃ = (𝑃, 𝐺, 𝐴, 𝐹, 𝑋, 𝑀, 𝑇, 𝜙, Δ, 𝑅, 𝑆) where  is the
AV/GV ratio for the benefit exposure under consideration,  is the “MER Delta”, R is the
utilization rate of the elective reset option (if applicable) and S is the “in-the-money” termination
rate on GMSB_10 policies. The “MER Delta” is calculated based on the difference between the
actual MER and that assumed in the factor testing (see Table 2), subject to a cap (floor) of 100
bps (100 bps). See Table 4 for more details.

For GMDB, there are 4  2  2  7  4  4  5  7  3  2 = 376,320 “nodes” in the “Basic

Factor” grid. Interpolation will only be permitted across the six (6) dimensions: Contract
Maturity Age (M), Attained Age (X), Time to Next Maturity (T), AV/GV Ratio (), MER Delta
() and Reset Utilization Rate (R). The “In-the-Money” termination rate (S) is not used for
GMDBs.

For GMMB, there are 3  2  2  7  1  7  5  7  3  2  2 = 246,960 “nodes” in the “Basic

Factor” grid. Interpolation will only be permitted across the six (6) dimensions: Contract
Maturity Age (M), Time to Next Maturity (T), AV/GV Ratio (), MER Delta (), Reset
Utilization Rate (R) and In-the-Money Termination Rate (S). The “In-the-Money” termination
rate (S) is only applies to the “GMSB_10” product form. The testing for guaranteed minimum
maturity and surrender benefits assumed all lives were attained age 55 at the calculation date.

Functions are available to assist the company in applying the TGCR Methodology. More fully
described in section 7.7, these functions perform the necessary factor table lookups and
associated multi-dimensional linear interpolations. If the insurer is unable to use the supplied
functions, it will be required to develop its own. In such a case, the insurer should contact OSFI
for specific details.

The GMDB and GMMB/GMSB factors are respectively contained in the files
“GMDBFactors_CTE95.csv” and “GMMBFactors_CTE95.csv”. These are comma-
separated value text files where each “row” represents the factors for a test policy as identified
by its lookup key. Rows are terminated by new line and line feed characters. Factors are also
provided at the CTE80 confidence level – the factor files are “GMDBFactors_CTE80.csv”
and “GMMBFactors_CTE80.csv”. For the determination of capital requirements, the
“GMDBFactors_CTE95.csv” and “GMMBFactors_CTE95.csv” factors are to be used.

Each row in the factor tables consists of three entries, described further below.

1 2 3
Basic Cost or Basic Margin Offset
Test Case Identifier (Key)
Diversification Factor Factor or Zero (N/A)

Life A LICAT
October 2018 153
An individual test case (i.e., a node on the multi-dimensional matrix of factors) can be uniquely
identified by its key, which is the concatenation of the relevant individual policy attribute keys
(or some subset thereof) prefixed by a leading ‘factor code’. The factor codes are shown below.

Factor Code Description

1 Basic GMDB “Cost” and “Margin Offset” factors.
2 Basic GMMB and GMSB “Cost” and “Margin Offset” factors.
3 Asset Mix Diversification factors for GMDB options.
4 Asset Mix Diversification factors for GMMB and GMSB options.
5 Time Diversification factors for GMDB options.
6 Time Diversification factors for GMMB and GMSB options.

Basic Cost Factor. This is the term 𝑓(𝜃̃) in the formula for TGCR. The values in the factor grid
represent CTE95 (or CTE80) of the sample distribution95 for the present value of guaranteed
minimum benefit cash flows (in excess of account value) in all future years (i.e., to the earlier of
contract maturity and 30 years), normalized by current guaranteed value.96 The policy attribute
keys for the Cost factors are shown in Table 4.

Basic Margin Offset Factor. This is the term 𝑔(𝜃̃) in the formula for TGCR. The values in the
factor grid represent CTE95 (or CTE80) of the sample distribution for the present value of
margin offset cash flows in all future years (i.e., to the earlier of contract maturity and 30 years),
normalized by current account balance. The Basic Margin Offset Factors assume 𝛼̂= 100 basis
points of “margin offset” (net spread available to fund the guaranteed benefits). The policy
attribute keys for the Margin Offset factors are shown in Table 4.

Asset Mix Diversification Factor. This is the term ℎ(𝜃̃) in the formula for TGCR.
ℎ(𝜃̃) = ℎ(𝑃, 𝐺, 𝑅, 𝑆) is an adjustment factor that reflects the benefits of fund diversification (asset
mix) at the company (i.e., total portfolio) level. Note that ℎ(𝜃̃) ≤ 1 depends on product form “P”,
guarantee level “G”, reset utilization rate “R” (where applicable) and in-the-money termination
rate “S” (GMSB only). The lookup keys for the Asset Mix Diversification factors are given in
Table 5.

DF should be set equal to 1 in the GetCost and GetTGCR functions (q.v. section 7.7.1).

Time Diversification Factor. This is the term 𝑤(𝜃̃) in the formula for TGCR.
𝑤(𝜃̃) = 𝑤(𝑃, 𝐺, 𝐹, 𝑅, 𝑆) is an adjustment factor that attempts to capture the benefits (i.e., net
reduction in guaranteed benefit costs) of a dispersed maturity profile. This adjustment applies on

95
Technically, the sample distribution for “present value of net cost” = PV[benefit claims] – PV[Margin Offset]
was used to determine the scenario results that comprise the CTE95 risk measure. Hence, the “Cost Factors” and
“Base Margin Offset Factors” are calculated from the same scenarios.
96
In other words, the Basic Cost Factors are expressed “per $1 of current guaranteed benefit” and the Margin
Offset Factors are “per $1 of account balance”, assuming 100 basis points (per annum) of available spread.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 154
to maturity benefit factors only; it does not apply to death benefit factors. Note that 𝑤(𝜃̃) ≤ 1
also depends on fund class “F”. If the company does not satisfy the time diversification criteria,
then 𝑤(𝜃̃) = 1 (i.e., no time diversification benefit). Although the structure permits otherwise,
the time diversification factors for GMDB are set to 1. The lookup keys for the Time
Diversification factors are given in Table 6.

This factor is set either to zero or one, based on the results of a time diversification test.

To perform the test, the in-force maturity dates for each product/maturity guarantee form are
grouped by “quarter-to-maturity” (i.e., 1, 2, …, N). For limited-term contracts that offer the
client the opportunity to renew (“rollover”), the next maturity date should be used (not final
contract maturity). Using current market value (at the calculation date), the current market value
in each future 3-month time period is determined.

If the current market value in any given quarter exceeds 10% of the total, then the portfolio fails
the test. If the current market value in each quarter is less than or equal to 10% of the total, the
portfolio passes the test. If the portfolio fails the test, DT is set equal to zero in the GetCost and
GetTGCR functions (q.v. section 7.7.1). Otherwise, DT is set equal to one.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 155
Table 4: Grid of Cost and Margin Offset Factors

Policy Attribute Key : Possible Values & Description

0 : Return-of-premium.
1 : Roll-up (5% per annum).
GMDB 2 : Maximum Anniversary Value (MAV).
3 : 10-year rollover.
Product Definitions, P. 0: Fixed maturity date.
1: 10-year CSV (benefit paid on
GMMB &
surrender)
GMSB 2: Not used.
3: 10-year rollover.
Guarantee Level (% of deposits), G. 0: 75% 1: 100%
0: Pro-rata by market value.
GV Adjustment Upon Partial Withdrawal, A. 1: Dollar-for-dollar.
0 : Not used.
1 : Money Market.
2 : Fixed Income (Bond).
3 : Balanced Asset Allocation.
Fund Class, F. 4 : Low Volatility Equity.
5 : Diversified Equity.
6 : Intermediate Risk Equity.
7 : Aggressive / Exotic Equity.
0 : 5 years
1 : 15 years
GMDB 2 : 25 years
Contract Maturity Age, M. 3 : 30 years
(years from valuation date) 0 : 1 year 4: 10 years
GMMB & 1 : 3 years 5: 20 years
GMSB 2 : 5 years 6: 30 years
3 : 8 years
0: 35 2 : 65
GMDB
1: 55 3 : 75
Attained Age (Last Birthday), X.
GMMB &
0: 55
GMSB
0 : 1 year 3: 8 years
Time to Next Maturity, T.
1 : 3 years 4: 10+ years
(years from valuation date)
2 : 5 years
0 : 0.25 4: 1.25
1 : 0.50 5: 1.50
Account Value-to-Guaranteed Value Ratio, . 2 : 0.75 6: 2.00
3 : 1.00

Annualized Account Charge Differential from 0: 100 bps

1: 0 bps
Table 2 Assumptions (“MER Delta”),  2: +100 bps
Reset Utilization Rate, R. 0: 0% 1 : 100%
In-the-Money Surrender Rate (GMSB only), S. 0: 0% 1: 100%

Life A LICAT
October 2018 156
It is important to note that the lookup keys for the factor tables define certain values differently
from the parameters (arguments) passed to the lookup/retrieval functions, as indicated in the
following table. More details are provided in section 7.7.

Policy Attribute Key Interpretation Function Arguments

Years from Valuation Date. Equal
Contract Maturity Age, M. to [Contract Maturity Age] less Actual contract maturity age.
[Attained Age].

Ratio of current Account Balance AV and GV are provided

AV/GV Ratio, . (AV) to Guaranteed Value (GV). separately.

[Actual MER] less [Assumed

MER], in basis points. The MER (annualized, in basis points
MER Delta, . “Assumed MERs” are shown in p.a.) is passed directly.
Table 2.

Table 5: Grid of Asset Mix Diversification Factors

Policy Attribute Key : Possible Values & Description

0 : Return-of-premium.
1 : Roll-up (5% per annum).
GMDB 2 : Maximum Anniversary Value (MAV).
3 : 10-year rollover.
Product Definitions, P. 0 : Fixed maturity date.
1 : 10-year CSV (benefit paid on
GMMB &
surrender).
GMSB 2 : Not used.
3 : 10-year rollover.
Guarantee Level (% of deposits), G. 0 : 75% 1: 100%
Reset Utilization Rate, R. 0 : 0% 1 : 100%
In-the-Money Surrender Rate (GMSB only),
0 : 0% 1 : 100%
S.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 157
Table 6: Grid of Time Diversification Factors

Policy Attribute Key : Possible Values & Description

0 : Return-of-premium.
1 : Roll-up (5% per annum).
GMDB 2 : Maximum Anniversary Value
(MAV).
3 : 10-year rollover.
Product Definition, P.
0 : Fixed maturity date.
1 : 10-year CSV (benefit paid on
GMMB &
surrender).
GMSB
2 : Not used.
3 : 10-year rollover.
Guarantee Level (% of deposits), G. 0 : 75% 1: 100%
0 : Not used.
1 : Money Market.
2 : Fixed Income (Bond).
3 : Balanced Asset Allocation.
Fund Class, F. 4 : Low Volatility Equity.
5 : Diversified Equity.
6 : Intermediate Risk Equity.
7 : Aggressive / Exotic Equity.
0 : 0%1 : 100%
Reset Utilization Rate, R.
In-the-Money Surrender Rate (GMSB only), 0 : 0%1 : 100%
S.

7.6. Retrieving the appropriate nodes

Table 7 provides some sample lookup keys (assuming the annualized fund based charges equal
the base assumption, hence  = 0), while Table 8 shows the “Basic Cost” and “Basic Margin
Offset” values from the factor grid for some sample GMDB and GMMB policies. All sample
policies in Table 8 use a 100% guarantee level, base MERs and no resets. As mentioned earlier,
the Base Margin Offset factors (in the tables) assume 100 basis points of “available spread”. The

“Margin Offset Factors” are therefore scaled by the ratio , where  is the actual margin
100
offset (in basis points per annum) for the policy being valued. Hence, the margin factor for the
7th policy is exactly half the factor for node ‘11105214210 ’ (the 4th sample policy in Table 8).
That is, 0.02093 = 0.5 × 0.04187.

Where more than one feature (i.e., guaranteed benefit) is present in a product, unless the
company has a justifiable alternative for allocating the total available spread between the benefit
types (e.g. explicitly defined risk charges), the split should be based on the proportionate gross
guaranteed benefit costs. An example of this allocation is provided in section 7.7.2.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 158
Table 7: Sample Lookup Keys

NODE PRODUCT / GV FUND ATT.. AGE / NEXT RESET ITM

KEY AV/GV
TYPE GV% ADJUST CLASS MAT. AGE MAT. UTIL.% TERM%
GMDB-ROP / Balanced
10103214110 A Pro-rata 65 / 80 10+ 50% 0% n/a
100% Allocation
GMMB-Fixed / Diverse
200150444110 A $-for-$ 55 / 75 5 125% 100% n/a
75% Equity
GMDB_10 /
3311 B n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 100% n/a
100%
GMMB_10 /
43100 B n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 0% n/a
100%
GMSB_10 / Low Vol.
611411 C n/a n/a n/a n/a 100% 100%
100% Equity

A = Basic Cost and Margin Offset Factors; B = Asset Mix Diversification Factors; C = Time Diversification Factors.

Table 8: Sample Nodes on the Basic Factor Grids

GV FUND ATT. AGE / NEXT COST MARGIN

KEY PRODUCT AV/GV OFFSET
ADJUST CLASS MAT.AGE MAT. FACTOR FACTOR
Balanced
10113124310 GMDB ROP $-for-$ 55 / 80 10+ 1.00 100 0.01802 0.05762
Allocation
Balanced
10113214310 GMDB ROP $-for-$ 65 / 80 10+ 1.00 100 0.03926 0.04747
Allocation
Balanced
10113302310 GMDB ROP $-for-$ 75 / 80 5 1.00 100 0.04443 0.02653
Allocation

GMDB Diverse
11105214210 Pro-rata 65 / 80 10+ 0.75 100 0.16780 0.04187
5% Rollup Equity
GMDB Diverse
11105214310 Pro-rata 65 / 80 10+ 1.00 100 0.13091 0.04066
5% Rollup Equity
GMDB Diverse
11105214410 Pro-rata 65 / 80 10+ 1.25 100 0.09925 0.03940
5% Rollup Equity

GMDB Diverse
11105214210 Pro-rata 65 / 80 10+ 0.75 50 0.16780 0.02093
5% Rollup Equity

Diverse
231050513100 GMMB_10 Pro-rata 55 / 75 3 1.00 100 0.32250 0.05609
Equity
Diverse
231050523100 GMMB_10 Pro-rata 55 / 75 5 1.00 100 0.25060 0.05505
Equity
Diverse
231050533100 GMMB_10 Pro-rata 55 / 75 8 1.00 100 0.16758 0.05545
Equity

7.7. Use of supplied functions to determine the requirement

7.7.1. Function descriptions

Special functions have been supplied in the file OSFIFactorCalc.dll (C++ dynamic linked
library) to retrieve the “cost”, “margin offset” and “diversification” factors from the factor files
and perform the multi-dimensional linear interpolation. Cover functions in the Microsoft®

Life A LICAT
October 2018 159
Visual Basic “Add-In” are provided in the file OSFIFactorCalc.xla so that the C++ routines
are callable from Microsoft Excel through VBA97. The function arguments are described in
Table 9. Not all parameters apply to all functions (i.e., some are optional and/or not applicable).
The keys for the input parameters are given in Table 4.

Installation instructions are given later in this section. A call to an Excel function (built-in or
VBA) must be preceded by a “+” or “=” character.

Table 9: Input Parameters (Arguments) to Supplied Lookup/Retrieval Functions

Input Parameter – Variable

Description
Variable Name Type
B – BenefitType Long Integer Benefit Type code (1=GMDB, 2=GMMB/GMSB).
P – ProductCode Long Integer Product Definition code.
G – GuarCode Long Integer Guarantee Level code.
A – GVAdjustCode Long Integer GV Adjustment Upon Partial Withdrawal.
F – FundCode Long Integer Fund Class code.
M – FinalMatAge Floating Point Double Contract Maturity Age of annuitant (in years).
X – AttainedAge Floating Point Double Attained Age of annuitant (in years).
T – TimeToMat Floating Point Double Time to Next Maturity Date (in years).
MVGV – MVGV Floating Point Double Ratio of Account Balance to Guaranteed Value (AV/GV).
MER – MER Floating Point Double Total Equivalent Account Charges (annualized, in bps).
R – ResetUtil Floating Point Double Reset Utilization Rate (from 0 to 1).
S – SurrenderUtil Floating Point Double In-The-Money Termination Rate (from 0 to 1).
RC – RiskCharge Floating Point Double Margin Offset (annualized, in basis points).
AV – AccountValue Floating Point Double Current Account Balance, in dollars.
GV – GuarValue Floating Point Double Current Guaranteed Value, in dollars.
The fraction of the Asset Mix Diversification adjustment
DF – FundDivAdj Floating Point Double
reflected in the Adjusted Cost Factor (from 0 to 1).
The fraction of the Time Diversification adjustment
DT – TimeDivAdj Floating Point Double
reflected in the Adjusted Cost Factor (from 0 to 1).

Refer to section 7.5 for instructions on setting the parameters for DF and DT.

Using the notation given earlier,

𝛼
𝑇𝐺𝐶𝑅 = 𝐺𝑉 × ℎ(𝜃̃) × 𝑤(𝜃̃) × [𝐵𝑎𝑠𝑖𝑐𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝐹𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟] − × 𝐴𝑉 × [𝐵𝑎𝑠𝑖𝑐𝑀𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑖𝑛𝐹𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟]
100

97
Visual Basic for Applications.
Life A LICAT
October 2018 160
 𝛼
= 𝐺𝑉 × ℎ(𝜃̃) × 𝑤(𝜃̃) × 𝑓(𝜃̃) − × 𝐴𝑉 × 𝑔(𝜃̃)
100

= 𝐺𝑉 × 𝑓̂(𝜃̃) − 𝐴𝑉 × 𝑔̂(𝜃̃)
= 𝐹̂(𝜃̃) − 𝐺̂(𝜃̃)

The VBA functions are:

GetCost(B, P, G, A, F, M, X, T, AV, GV, MER, R, S, RC, DF, DT)

 Returns the Adjusted Dollar Cost 𝐹̂(𝜃̃) interpolating between nodes where necessary. S and
RC are required arguments, but RC is ignored in the calculations (i.e., the margin offset does
not affect the “cost” component). Also, S is ignored for GMDB calculations (i.e., S = 0 if B
= 1). DF and DT are optional, but assumed to be zero if not supplied.

GetMargin(B, P, G, A, F, M, X, T, AV, GV, MER, R, S, RC, DF, DT)

 Returns the Adjusted Dollar Margin Offset 𝐺̂(𝜃̃), interpolating between nodes where
necessary. S is required, but ignored for GMDB calculations (i.e., S = 0 if B = 1). DF and
DT are optional, but ignored regardless (i.e., the diversification factors only apply to the
“cost” component).

GetTGCR(B, P, G, A, F, M, X, T, AV, GV, MER, R, S, RC, DF, DT)

 Returns the Adjusted Dollar 𝑇𝐺𝐶𝑅 = 𝐹̂(𝜃̃) − 𝐺̂(𝜃̃), interpolating between nodes where
necessary. S is required, but ignored for GMDB calculations (i.e., S = 0 if B = 1). DF and
DT are optional, but assumed to be zero if not supplied.

To retrieve the Basic Cost Factor 𝑓(𝜃̃), simply use the function GetCost with AV = AV/GV,
GV = 1 and DF = DT = 0. Similarly, the Basic Margin Factor 𝑔̂(𝜃̃) may be obtained by calling
GetMargin with GV = GV/AV, AV = 1 and RC = 100.

For reference, the underlying C++ routines are listed below. These tools are also available as
VBA functions where the name is prefixed with an “x” (e.g. xGetGMDBCostFactor).

GetGMDBCostFactor(P, G, A, F, M, X, T, MVGV, MER, R)

 Returns the GMDB Basic Cost Factor 𝑓(𝜃̃), interpolating between nodes where necessary.

GetGMDBMarginFactor(P, G, A, F, M, X, T, MVGV, MER, R, RC)

 Returns the GMDB Scaled Margin Offset Factor 𝑔̂(𝜃̃), interpolating between nodes where
necessary. In this case, the Basic (i.e., tabular) Margin Offset Factor has already been scaled

by the ratio to account for the actual available spread. To extract the tabular factor
100

𝑔(𝜃̃), use RC = 100.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 161
GetGMDBFundDiversification(P, G, R)
 Returns the GMDB Asset Mix Diversification Factor ℎ(𝜃̃), interpolating between nodes
where necessary.

GetGMDBTimeDiversification(P, G, F, R)
 Returns the GMDB Time Diversification Factor 𝑤(𝜃̃), interpolating between nodes where
necessary. Currently, 𝑤(𝜃̃) = 1 for all nodes, so this function call is unnecessary for GMDB.

GetGMMBCostFactor(P, G, A, F, M, X, T, MVGV, MER, R, S)

 Returns the GMMB/GMSB Basic Cost Factor 𝑓(𝜃̃), interpolating between nodes where
necessary.

GetGMMBMarginFactor(P, G, A, F, M, X, T, MVGV, MER, R, S, RC)

 Returns the GMMB/GMSB Scaled Margin Offset Factor𝑔̂(𝜃̃), interpolating between nodes
where necessary. In this case, the Basic (i.e., tabular) Margin Offset Factor has already been

scaled by the ratio to account for the actual available spread. To extract the tabular
100

factor 𝑔(𝜃̃), use RC = 100.

GetGMMBFundDiversification(P, G, R, S)
 Returns the GMMB/GMSB Asset Mix Diversification Factor ℎ(𝜃̃), interpolating between
nodes where necessary.

GetGMMBTimeDiversification(P, G, F, R, S)
 Returns the GMMB/GMSB Time Diversification Factor 𝑤(𝜃̃), interpolating between nodes
where necessary.

7.7.2. Installing and using the OSFI factor calculation routines

The files shown in Table 10 comprise the “OSFI Factor Calculation” tools, supplied by OSFI to
assist the company in calculating the TGCR for GMDB, GMMB and GMSB options.

Table 10: OSFI Factor Calculation Tools – Required Files

File Name Description

Setup.exe Windows® setup program to unzip and install the calculation tools.

Microsoft® Excel Visual Basic Add-In. This functionality ‘wraps’ the

C++ routines, allowing them to be called directly from Microsoft
OSFIFactorCalc.xla
Excel workbooks (i.e., can be invoked the same way as built-in
Excel functions).

The C++ dynamic linked library that contains the lookup and
OSFIFactorCalc.dll
interpolation functions as described in this section.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 162
 Comma separated value (flat text) files containing the factors and
parameters described in section 7.5. Each “row” in the file
GMDBFactors_CTE95.csv corresponds to a test policy as identified by the lookup keys shown
GMMBFactors_CTE95.csv in Table 4. Each row consists of three entries and is terminated by
new line and line feed characters. Q.V. section 7.5 for more details.
Files are also provided at the CTE80 confidence level.

To install the OSFI factor calculation routines, run the setup utility and follow the instructions.
This will unzip (decompress) the files and register the DLL in the Windows program registry.

The Microsoft Add-In must be loaded (into Excel) before the VBA functions can be called. The
factor files and the Microsoft Excel Add-In (*.xla) must reside in the same folder. Simply open
“OSFIFactorCalc.xla” from Microsoft Excel. To view the VBA program, press [Alt-F11].

The following dialog should appear when the Add-In “OSFIFactorCalc.xla” is loaded,
prompting the user to select the appropriate CTE confidence level for calculation (either CTE95
or CTE80). This controls which factor tables are read into memory. For a given workbook, only
a single set of factor files can be accessed (i.e., either CTE80 or CTE95).

Life A LICAT
October 2018 163
Example: Calculation Tool

Suppose we have the policy/product parameters as specified in the table below. Further
assume that the portfolio satisfies the criteria in order to apply the “Time Diversification”
factors.

Parameter / Attribute Value Description and/or Notes

Account Value (AV) $90.00 Total account value at valuation date, in dollars.
Original Deposit $100.00 Original deposit, in dollars.
GMDB (GV) $100.00 Current guaranteed death maturity benefit, in dolla
Current guaranteed minimum maturity benefit,
GMMB (GV) $100.00
in dollars.
Guarantee Level 100% Initial guaranteed value as % of original deposit.
Gender Female Use 4-year age setback for X and M (GMDB only).
Actual Attained Age (X) 62 Attained age at the valuation date (in years).
Contract Maturity Age (M) 85 Contract maturity age (in years).
Time to Next Maturity (T),
23 Time to next maturity/rollover date (in years).
GMDB
Time to Next Maturity (T),
3 Time to next maturity/rollover date (in years).
GMMB
GV Adjustment Pro-Rata GV adjusted pro-rata by MV upon partial withdrawa
Diversified Contract exposure mapped to Diversified Equity as
Fund Class
Equity the Fund Categorization instructions in section 7.4.
MER 265 Total charge against policyholder funds (bps).

GMDB Product Code (P) 0 Product Definition code as per lookup key in Table 4
GMMB Product Code (P) 3 Product Definition code as per lookup key in Table 4
Guarantee Level Code (G) 1 Guarantee Code as per key in Table 4.
GV Adjustment Code (A) 0 GV Adjustment Upon Partial Withdrawal as per Tabl
Fund Code (F) 5 Fund Class code as per lookup key in Table 4.
GMMB Reset Utilization (R) 0.35 Reset utilization rate (from 0 to 1).
In-The-Money Termination (S) 0 In-the-money termination rate (from 0 to 1).
Total margin offset (bps p.a.) for GMDB & GMMB
Total Allocated Spread (RC) 80
combined.
Asset Mix Diversification (DF) 1 Credit for asset mix diversification.
Time Diversification (DT) 1 Credit for time diversification (GMMB).

Life A LICAT
October 2018 164
Using the notation from section 7.7.1,
𝛼
𝑇𝐺𝐶𝑅 = 𝐺𝑉 × ℎ(𝜃̃) × 𝑤(𝜃̃) × [𝐵𝑎𝑠𝑖𝑐𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝐹𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟] − × 𝐴𝑉 × [𝐵𝑎𝑠𝑖𝑐𝑀𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑖𝑛𝐹𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟]

100
𝛼
= 𝐺𝑉 × ℎ(𝜃̃) × 𝑤(𝜃̃) × 𝑓(𝜃̃) − × 𝐴𝑉 × 𝑔(𝜃̃)
100
= 𝐺𝑉 × 𝑓̂(𝜃̃) − 𝐴𝑉 × 𝑔̂(𝜃̃)
= 𝐹̂(𝜃̃) − 𝐺̂(𝜃̃)

𝑓̂ 𝐺𝑀𝐷𝐵 (𝜃̃) = GetCost( 1, 0, 1, 0, 5, 81, 58, 23, 0.9, 1, 265, 0,

0, 80, 1, 1 )
= 0.04592

𝑓̂ 𝐺𝑀𝑀𝐵 (𝜃̃) = GetCost( 2, 3, 1, 0, 5, 85, 62, 3, 0.9, 1, 265,

0.35, 0, 80, 1, 1 )
= 0.32849

In the absence of specific and well-defined risk charges for each guaranteed benefit, we
allocate the total spread by the claims cost and obtain (in bps per annum):

0.04592
GMDB  80  0.1226480  9.81 basis points per annum available to
0.04592  0.32849
fund the GMDB claims and GMMB  80  9.81  70.19 bps p.a. to fund GMMB payouts.

𝐹̂𝐺𝑀𝐷𝐵 (𝜃̃) = GetCost( 1, 0, 1, 0, 5, 81, 58, 23, 90, 100, 265, 0,

0, 9.81, 1, 1 )
= $4.59 = 0.04592  $100

𝐹̂𝐺𝑀𝑀𝐵 (𝜃̃) = GetCost( 2, 3, 1, 0, 5, 85, 62, 3, 90, 100, 265,

0.35, 0, 70.19, 1, 1 )
= $32.85 = 0.32849  $100

For reference, the Basic Cost Factors (i.e., before diversification adjustments) are:

𝑓𝐺𝑀𝐷𝐵 (𝜃̃) = GetCost( 1, 0, 1, 0, 5, 81, 58, 23, 0.9, 1, 265, 0,

0, 9.81 )
= 0.04794

𝑓𝐺𝑀𝑀𝐵 (𝜃̃) = GetCost( 2, 3, 1, 0, 5, 85, 62, 3, 0.9, 1, 265,

0.35, 0, 70.19 )
Life A LICAT
October 2018 165
 = 0.36461

Life A LICAT
October 2018 166
𝑔𝐺𝑀𝐷𝐵 (𝜃̃) = GetMargin( 1, 0, 1, 0, 5, 81, 58, 23, 0.9, 1, 265,
0, 0, 100 )
= 0.04227 = 0.04697  0.9

𝑔𝐺𝑀𝑀𝐵 (𝜃̃) = GetMargin( 2, 3, 1, 0, 5, 85, 62, 3, 0.9, 1, 265,

0.35, 0, 100 )
= 0.06201 = 0.06890  0.9

𝐺̂𝐺𝑀𝐷𝐵 (𝜃̃) = GetMargin( 1, 0, 1, 0, 5, 81, 58, 23, 90, 100, 265,

0, 0, 9.81 )
 9.81
= $0.41 = 0.04697  $90   
100 
 

𝐺̂𝐺𝑀𝑀𝐵 (𝜃̃) = GetMargin( 2, 3, 1, 0, 5, 85, 62, 3, 90, 100, 265,

0.35, 0, 70.19 )
 70.19 
= $4.35 = 0.06890  $90   
100 
 

𝑇𝐺𝐶𝑅𝐺𝑀𝐷𝐵 = GetTGCR( 1, 0, 1, 0, 5, 81, 58, 23, 90, 100, 265, 0,

0, 9.81, 1, 1 )
= $4.18
= $4.59 – $0.41

𝑇𝐺𝐶𝑅𝐺𝑀𝑀𝐵 = GetTGCR( 2, 3, 1, 0, 5, 85, 62, 3, 90, 100, 265,

0.35, 0, 70.19, 1, 1 )
= $28.50
= $32.85 – $4.35

Finally, the TGCR for the policy is $4.18 + $28.50 = $32.68

If desired, the Asset Mix and Time Diversification Factors may be obtained through additional
function calls by setting DF or DT to zero as required and solving for the other factor. For
example, if we set DF = 1 and DT = 0, we obtain for the GMMB component:

0.34307 = GetCost( 2, 3, 1, 0, 5, 85, 62, 3, 0.9, 1, 265,

0.35,
0, 80, 1, 0 )

Life A LICAT
October 2018 167
 However, with DF = 1 and DT = 1 we obtained 𝑓̂ (𝜃̃) = 0.32849 (see earlier in this
0.32849
section). Hence, the GMMB Time Diversification Factor is equal to 0.9575  .
0.34307

7.8. Margin Offset Adjustment

The total equivalent account charge (“MER”) is meant to capture all amounts that are deducted
from policyholder funds, not only those that are commonly expressed as spread-based fees. The
MER, expressed as an equivalent annual basis point charge against account value, should include
(but not be limited to) the following: investment management fees, mortality & expense charges,
administrative loads, policy fees and risk premiums. It may be necessary to estimate an
equivalent MER if there are fees withdrawn from policyholder accounts that are not expressed as
basis point charges against account value.

The margin offset,  , represents the total amount available to fund the guaranteed benefit
claims and amortization of the unamortized surrender charge allowance after considering most
other policy expenses (including overhead). The margin offset, expressed as an equivalent annual
basis point charge against account value, should be deemed permanently available in all future
scenarios. However, the margin offset should not include per policy charges (e.g., annual policy
fees) since these are included in fixed expenses. It is often helpful to interpret the margin offset
as   MER  X , where X is the sum of:
a. Investment management expenses and advisory fees;
b. Commissions, bonuses (dividends) and overrides;
c. Maintenance expenses; and
d. Amounts required to amortize unamortized acquisition costs (net of available
surrender charges).

7.9. Credit for reinsurance ceded or capital markets hedging

This is the reduction in the TGCR available on account of risk mitigation strategies, including
reinsurance and hedging.

For registered reinsurance of segregated fund liabilities that is directly expressible in terms of the
component factors, ceding companies may take credit through an appropriate reduction of the
factors.

For more complex reinsurance that cannot be expressed using the factors, the impact will need to
be modeled (q.v. section 7.10) and submitted to OSFI for approval. For example, a reinsurance
treaty that has the ceding company retain losses to a predetermined level (a “deductible”), with
the reinsurer assuming losses above this level, but with a cap on the reinsurance claims (e.g. a
maximum annual payment cap under the treaty) would normally require the use of suitable
valuation model.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 168
Policy liabilities ceded under unregistered reinsurance (q.v. section 10.1) should be reported on
page 20.030 by Canadian insurers, and on page 12.200 by branches of foreign insurers.

Deposits held for unregistered reinsurance per section 10.5, for the period not less than the fund
guarantee term remaining and that are in excess of the actuarial liabilities for the risk reinsured,
may reduce the net required segregated fund risk component requirement on the reinsured policies
to a minimum of zero (report this amount in column 08 on page 70.100). For Canadian business,
the deposits must be held in Canada, and OSFI must have given the company permission to
reduce its reserves by the deposits held corresponding to the reserves. The reduction is limited to
that available had the business been ceded to a reinsurer subject to these requirements.

7.10. Custom factors and internal models

7.10.1. Custom factors

Should the company be evaluating a product type that is materially different from those
presented in the tables, or where a company needs to evaluate a complex reinsurance or hedging
arrangement, it will be necessary to use stochastic modeling to calculate factors for the particular
product or treaty.

The use of modeling to calculate factors specific to a product requires approval by the Actuarial
Division of OSFI. Life Insurers should contact OSFI’s Actuarial or Capital Division for specific
details.

Approved factors apply until new factors or an internal model are approved by OSFI.

With the passage of time, the assumptions underlying approved factors may not reflect emerging
experience and can become inconsistent with the current valuation assumptions.

In such instances, an inconsistency between the TGCR calculated using the approved factors and
that determined at CTE (95) using the company’s stochastic model with current valuation
assumptions might develop. The actuary should regularly review this relationship to ensure that
the TGCR held using the approved factors is not materially less than that calculated at CTE (95)
using the company’s stochastic model with current valuation assumptions. If the TGCR using the
previously approved factors is materially less than the TGCR calculated at CTE (95) using the
company’s stochastic model with current valuation assumptions, the institution should use the
higher TGCR and apply to OSFI for approval of new factors or make an application to use its
internal model to calculate capital requirements.

7.10.2. Internal models

OSFI permits, subject to criteria, the use of internal models for the development of segregated
fund capital requirements. Insurers seeking to use their internal models should follow the
requirements outlined in OSFI’s Instruction Guide on Use of Internal Models for Determining
Required Capital for Segregated Fund Risks (LICAT). Internal model usage requires OSFI’s
prior written approval and is subject to materiality considerations. The requirements also include
transitional rules: in the first year of approval, only 50% credit is permitted (i.e., the Total Gross

Life A LICAT
October 2018 169
Calculated Requirement is equal to 50% of the value calculated under the approved internal
model plus 50% of the value calculated using the factor requirements). However, in subsequent
years, the requirement is based 100% upon the value determined by the approved internal model.

7.11. Analysis of results

The development of capital requirement factor grids using stochastic methods is a complex
process. While the work done in developing the factors was extensive, there is still the possibility
that the factors may contain anomalies.

Many insurers use their own stochastic models to determine liability requirements. An insurer
that uses a stochastic model that has not been approved should regularly compare the present
value of net costs at CTE(95) that is output by its model with OSFI’s capital requirements based
on the application of the factor grid. Insurers should report to OSFI any unusual results that
appear to be caused by logical or methodological errors within the capital requirements.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 170
Chapter 8 Operational Risk
Operational risk is the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people
and systems or from external events. This definition includes legal risk98 but excludes strategic
and reputational risk.

8.1 Operational risk formula

Required capital for operational risk is the sum of:
1) Business volume required capital;
2) Large increase in business volume required capital; and
3) General required capital.

8.2 Operational risk exposures and factors

This section outlines exposures and factors used to calculate required capital for operational risk.

8.2.1 Business volume required capital

Business volume required capital is determined by applying the following factors to direct
premiums and assumed reinsurance premiums written in the past 12 months, and to account
values/liabilities for deposit-type products:

Exposure Factor
Direct written premiums 2.50%
Assumed reinsurance premiums 1.75%
Investment-type products and annuities:
Segregated funds with guarantees (account values) 0.40%
Liabilities for annuities in payout period, and annuity liability
0.15%
equivalents for longevity risk transfer arrangements
Universal life account values 0.10%
Account values of mutual funds, GICs, other investment-type products
and segregated funds without guarantees, and liabilities for annuities 0.10%
in accumulation period

Direct written premiums for individual and group life policies include universal life premiums,
but exclude annuity and longevity risk transfer premiums, mutual fund deposits, GICs,
segregated fund deposits and premium equivalents for administrative service only/investment
management services.

98
Legal risk includes, but is not limited to, exposure to fines, penalties, or punitive damages resulting from
supervisory actions, as well as private settlements.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 170
In determining the premiums to which the 1.75% risk factor for assumed reinsurance is applied,
coinsurance premiums may be calculated net of expense allowances, such as ceding commissions
that comprise agent commissions, premium taxes and administrative expenses. For funds withheld
coinsurance and modified coinsurance arrangements, the 1.75% factor applies to the portion of the
gross accruing receivable or gross modified coinsurance receivable corresponding to premiums net
of expense allowances (i.e. the premium amount should be the same as for regular coinsurance).

The account and liability values to which the factors for investment-type products and annuities
are applied are calculated gross of reinsurance (where applicable), and include PfADs. The
liability value for business assumed under modified coinsurance arrangements is the pro forma
liability for the business had it been assumed under regular coinsurance.

Longevity risk transfer arrangements that assume longevity risk have the same requirement as
the underlying annuity business. The annuity liability equivalent for a swap is the current gross
value of the floating leg of the swap, without deductions or offsets.

Business volume operational risk charges do not apply to business in controlled non-life
financial corporations that are deducted from Available Capital.

8.2.2 Large increase in business volume required capital

Large increase in business volume required capital is calculated by geographic region. The
factors in section 8.2.1 are applied to the amounts by which the year-over-year increases in direct
written premiums, assumed reinsurance premiums, and account values/liabilities for investment-
type products and annuities exceed a threshold of 20%.

The year-over-year increase for direct written premiums is defined to be the total amount of
direct premiums written in the past 12 months that exceed 120% of the direct premiums written
for the same period in the previous year. It is calculated separately for each of:
a. Individual Life (including Universal Life);
b. Group Life (including Universal Life); and
c. Other (excluding annuities).

Example: Increase in Direct Written Premiums

If, as a result of rapid business growth, direct written premiums increase by 50% from 100 in
Y1 to 150 in Y2, the premiums in Y2 in excess of 120% of the premiums in Y1 (30) is subject
to an additional capital requirement of 0.75 (30 x 2.50%).

The year-over-year increase for assumed reinsurance premiums is defined to be the total amount
of reinsurance premiums assumed in the past 12 months that exceed 120% of the premiums
assumed for the same period in the previous year, for all products combined.
For investment-type products and annuities, the year-over-year increase is calculated separately
for each of:
a. Segregated funds with guarantees (account values);

Life A LICAT
October 2018 171
 b. Liabilities for annuities in payout period, and annuity liability equivalents for longevity
risk transfer arrangements;
c. Universal life account values; and
d. Account values of mutual funds, GICs, other investment-type products and segregated
funds without guarantees, and liabilities for annuities in accumulation period

To adjust for the effect of exchange rate fluctuations over the measurement period, current and
prior period premiums, account values and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies should be
converted to Canadian dollars at the exchange rates in effect at the LICAT report ending date.
Accordingly, the amounts used to measure large increases in business volume may not correspond
to the amounts reported in prior period financial statements, and in the case of premiums, may not
correspond to amounts reported in the current period financial statements.

In the case of an acquisition of another entity or an acquisition of a block of business (e.g.

through assumption reinsurance), the premiums, account values, or liabilities and equivalents for
any prior reporting period (before the acquisition) is the sum of the premiums, account values, or
liabilities and equivalents of the two separate entities/blocks of business, i.e., the sum of the
acquiring company’s and the acquired company’s/blocks of business’ premiums, account values,
or liabilities and equivalents. Following an acquisition, the acquiring insurer should re-classify
premiums based on the merged company’s categorization, using approximations, as necessary, in
order to follow categories used in the LIFE Return.

Example: Business Acquisition

Assume that company A has direct written premiums of 100 for the 12-month period ending
December 31, Y1. In Y2 it acquires company B that wrote direct premiums of 50 during Y1.
The merged company reports a total of 225 in direct written premiums for the 12-month
period ending December 31, Y2. The operational risk requirement for large increase in
business volume is calculated as:

2.50% x [225 – ((100 + 50) x 1.20)] = 2.50% x 45 = 1.13

8.2.3 General required capital

General required capital has two components. The first component is calculated as follows:

1. a 5.75% factor applied to the total required capital for credit, insurance and market risk
components, calculated net of all reinsurance and net of credits for participating products,
adjustable products, policyholder deposits, adjustments for group business, and
diversification; plus
2. a 4.5% factor applied to required capital for segregated fund guarantees.

The second component is calculated as a 2.5% factor applied to ceded reinsurance premiums,
and compensates for the understatement of the first component arising from its calculation net of

Life A LICAT
October 2018 172
reinsurance. For ceded annuity business, the amount that should be used as the ceded reinsurance
premium equivalent is the annual amount of annuity payments ceded to the reinsurer. For risks
ceded under longevity risk transfer arrangements, the amount that should be used as the ceded
reinsurance premium equivalent is the gross amount of annuity payments ceded (for swaps, this
amount is the gross annual payment under the floating leg of the swap without deductions or
offsets). For coinsurance arrangements, the 2.5% risk factor applies to ceded premiums net of
expense allowances, such as ceding commissions that include agent commissions, premium taxes
and administrative expenses.

Proxy Factor
Required Capital for Credit, Insurance and Market Risks 5.75%
Required Capital for Segregated Fund Guarantees 4.5%
Ceded Reinsurance Premiums 2.5%

Life A LICAT
October 2018 173
Chapter 9 Participating and Adjustable Products
Required capital components for participating and adjustable products are calculated in the prior
chapters as if the products were non-participating and non-adjustable. However, participating
and adjustable policies allow insurers to share risk with policyholders through discretionary
benefits. Therefore, insurers may include credits for participating products (par credit) and for
contractually adjustable policies (adjustable credit) in the calculation of the Base Solvency
Buffer provided certain conditions are met.

An insurer should calculate the credit for participating products by geographic region. However,
if not all participating products within a region are homogeneous with respect to the risks that are
passed through to policyholders via reductions in dividends, it will be necessary for the insurer to
partition its participating business within the region into separate blocks that are homogeneous
with respect to the risks passed through to policyholders.99 A partitioned block may contain
assets and liabilities (e.g. surplus, PfADs, and ancillary funds, and/or the assets backing them)
whose risks are not passed through to policyholders. A standalone capital requirement net of par
credit is calculated for each participating block.

The adjustable credit is calculated for each adjustable product within a geographic region.

A non-trivial reduction in dividends or significant adjustments made to adjustable features may

result in other adverse impacts (second-order effects) due to lapses, anti-selection, unit expense
increases or legal action undertaken by policyholders. Such second-order effects should not be
reflected in cash flows when calculating the credit for participating and adjustable products.

9.1. The participating product credit

9.1.1. Conditions for the par credit

A par credit may be used to reduce the required capital for a block of participating policies
provided that the experience with respect to specified risk elements is incorporated into the
annual dividend adjustment process in a consistent manner from year to year. A par credit may
be taken for the block only if the following three criteria are met:
1) The insurer’s participating dividend policy must be publicly disclosed and must make
clear that policyholder dividends are not guaranteed and will be adjusted to reflect actual
experience. The insurer should publicly disclose the elements of actual experience that
are incorporated in the annual dividend adjustment process. Insurers should disclose all
material elements and indicate whether and how the risks are passed through to the
policyholders (e.g., investment income, asset defaults, mortality, lapses and expenses).
2) The insurer should regularly (at least once a year) review the policyholder dividend scale
in relation to the actual experience of the participating account (i.e., including all blocks of
business). The insurer should be able to demonstrate to the satisfaction of OSFI which
99
Assets and liabilities whose risks are not passed through to policyholders that are commingled and support
multiple participating blocks within a geographic region should be allocated proportionally to particular
participating blocks.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 174
 individual elements of actual experience, to the extent that they were not anticipated in the
current dividend scale, have been passed through in the annual dividend adjustment.
Furthermore, the insurer should be able to demonstrate that shortfalls in actual overall
experience, to the extent that they are not fully absorbed in any additional reserves or
other similar experience levelling mechanisms, are recovered100 on a present value basis
through level or declining reductions in the dividend scale101. The dividend scale
reductions required to effect recovery must be made within two years from when the
shortfall occurs.
3) The insurer should be able to demonstrate to OSFI that it follows the dividend policy and
practices referred to above.

9.1.2. Calculation of the par credit for a block

The par credit for a qualifying block of par business takes into account the present value of
restated dividend cash flows. The par credit CPi for the block that is used to calculate the Base
Solvency Buffer (q.v. section 11.3) is given by:

𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par
𝐶𝑃𝑖 = min [𝐾𝑖 − 𝐾𝑖 reduced + (1 − ) 𝐶𝑖 initial, 𝐾𝑖 − 𝐾𝑖 floor ]
interest max(𝐶𝑖 adverse, 𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par)

where:

 𝐶𝑖 initial is 75% of the present value of restated dividend cash flows for the block used in
the interest rate risk calculation (q.v. section 5.1.3.3), discounted using the Initial
Scenario Discount Rates in section 5.1.1
 𝐶𝑖 adverse is 75% of the present value of restated dividend cash flows for the block used in
the interest rate risk calculation, discounted using the rates under the most adverse
scenario that determines the requirement for interest rate risk
 𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par is the interest rate risk requirement (q.v. section 5.1.2.3) for the block under the
most adverse scenario that determines the requirement for interest rate risk
 Ki is the adjusted diversified requirement K for the block (q.v. section 11.2)
 𝐾𝑖 reduced interest is the adjusted diversified requirement K for all risks in the block, with
the interest rate risk component reduced. This quantity is calculated by setting the interest
rate risk component of the block to max(𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par − 𝐶𝑖 adverse, 0), and leaving all other risk
components unchanged.

100
The recovery of shortfalls must be demonstrated based on reductions in the dividend scale compared to what
would have been paid taking into account all of the elements, and only those elements, that are passed through to
policyholders.
101
Reductions in the dividend scale must be level or must represent front-loaded or accelerated experience recovery.
Reductions in terminal dividends, where there are no periodic dividends, are considered to be level reductions in
the dividend scale.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 175
  𝐾𝑖 floor is the minimum adjusted diversified requirement for the block. This quantity is
calculated by aggregating, within the calculation of 𝐾102:
i) 100% of the requirements for all risks in the block that cannot be passed through
to policyholders by making adjustments to the dividend scale103
ii) 10% of the interest rate risk requirement for the block, if interest rate risk can be
passed through to policyholders by making adjustments to the dividend scale
iii) 30% of all other risk components that can be passed through to policyholders by
making adjustments to the dividend scale.
For a block that has assets and liabilities for which interest rate risk is passed through to
policyholders, and other assets and liabilities for which interest rate risk is not passed
through to policyholders, the combined amount for i) and ii) above that should be used
for the interest rate risk requirement in calculating 𝐾𝑖 floor is:

100% × 𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par npt + 10% × max( 𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par − 𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par npt, 0)

where 𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑖 par npt is as defined in section 5.1.2.3.

Example: Par Credit

Suppose that a participating block of business has the following risk components:

Life insurance risk Gross component Level and trend 𝑰𝑹𝒊 − 𝟎. 𝟓 × 𝑳𝑻𝒊
(𝑰𝑹𝒊) components (𝑳𝑻𝒊)
Mortality 750,000 300,000 600,000
Longevity 0 0 0
Morbidity incidence 0 0 0
Morbidity termination 0 0 0
Lapse sensitive 500,000 200,000 400,000
Lapse supported 0 0 0
Expense 50,000 0 50,000
Totals 1,300,000 500,000

102
For insurance risks, the percentage factors below are applied to the intermediate quantities 𝐼𝑅𝑖 and 𝐿𝑇𝑖 used to
calculate K.
103
These include requirements for credit and market risks related to assets backing surplus, PfADs and/or ancillary
funds if returns on these assets are not passed through to policyholders. If the block contains assets/liabilities
whose risks are not passed through to policyholders, and these assets/liabilities are commingled with
assets/liabilities whose risks are passed through to policyholders, then the requirements for credit and market
risks, other than interest rate risk, for the non-pass through assets/liabilities should be determined using
proportional allocation.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 176
 Other risks Component
Credit risk 300,000
Interest rate risk (IRR) 400,000
Other market risks 250,000
Property and casualty risk 0

Suppose further that the present value of restated dividends for the block under the initial scenario
is 800,000, and that this present value moves to 1,200,000 under the adverse scenario that
determines the requirement for interest rate risk. The quantity 𝐶initial for the block is therefore
(75% x 800,000 =) 600,000, and 𝐶adverse is (75% x 1,200,000 =) 900,000. Finally, suppose that all
risks associated with the block except mortality risk are passed through to policyholders through
dividend adjustments.

The requirement K for this block is equal to 1,913,534 (the intermediate quantities in the
calculation are I = 832,166, D = 1,544,525, and U = 2,250,000; refer to section 11.2.4 for an
example that shows the steps in the calculation of K). Since 𝐼𝑅𝑅 < 𝐶adverse for the block, the
requirement 𝐾reduced interest is the requirement K for the block recalculated using an interest rate
risk requirement of 0, and is equal to 1,565,932 (I = 832,166, D = 1,205,277, U = 1,850,000). The
potential credit as a function of the dividend absorption capacity is therefore:

400,000
1,913,534 − 1,565,932 + (1 − ) × 600,000 = 680,935
900,000

Since all risks except for mortality risk are passed through to policyholders, the requirement 𝐾floor
for the block is calculated using 100% of the requirement for mortality risk, 10% of the
requirement for interest rate risk, and 30% of the requirements for all other risks:

Life insurance risk Gross component Level and trend 𝑰𝑹𝒊 − 𝟎. 𝟓 × 𝑳𝑻𝒊
(𝑰𝑹𝒊) components (𝑳𝑻𝒊)
Mortality 750,000 300,000 600,000
Longevity 0 0 0
Morbidity incidence 0 0 0
Morbidity termination 0 0 0
Lapse sensitive 150,000 60,000 120,000
Lapse supported 0 0 0
Expense 15,000 0 15,000
Totals 915,000 360,000

Life A LICAT
October 2018 177
 Other risks Component
Credit risk 90,000
Interest rate risk (IRR) 40,000
Other market risks 75,000
Property and casualty risk 0

The value of 𝐾floor is therefore 987,966 (I = 649,173, D = 772,354, U = 1,120,000), and the
maximum credit as a function of the requirements above the LICAT floors is:

1,913,534 − 987,966 = 925,568

The par credit CP for the block is equal to the lower of the two amounts, which is 680,935.

9.2. The contractually adjustable product credit

9.2.1. Conditions for the adjustable credit

Products that are contractually adjustable qualify for a credit if all of the following conditions are
met:
1) Contractual adjustability is at the sole discretion of the insurer.
2) All adjustable features associated with the products (e.g. premiums, fees and benefits)
have been explicitly disclosed in the contract.
3) The insurer should regularly (at least once a year) review the product’s experience and
consider its potential impact on adjustments. Although the review and resulting
adjustments may be for the most part forward-looking, the insurer should be able to
demonstrate to the satisfaction of OSFI which individual elements of actual experience are
considered in the review process.
4) The adjustability is reasonably flexible, and the insurer has tested the reasonable
flexibility of the adjustable features in pricing the policy or subsequent to pricing the
product. The test should demonstrate that the insurer is able to recuperate at least half of
any unexpected insurance risk losses (defined as the product's marginal capital
requirement for insurance risks minus its Surplus Allowance related to insurance risks)
by comparing the price with and without future adjustments. Tests of adjustability may
not take into consideration amounts recoverable through arrangements that are accorded a
separate credit in the insurance risk components, such as hold harmless agreements,
deposits made by policyholders or claims fluctuation reserves. The tests should be
documented and available for review by OSFI on request, and should demonstrate, to the
satisfaction of OSFI, that these conditions are met.
5) If an insurer takes credit for an adjustable feature, the insurer should have a documented
internal policy on how it makes adjustments and the key considerations in making
adjustments, including the consideration given to losses or shortfalls in actual overall
experience. Any credit taken must be calculated consistently with the manner stated in
the internal policy, and must reflect policies that, if followed, would reduce or restrict the
adjustability otherwise permitted in the contract.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 178
 6) The insurer should be able to demonstrate to OSFI that it follows the adjustment policy
and practices referred to above.

A product that is only adjustable up to a certain age or has a one-time adjustment may be
considered adjustable provided that it meets all other conditions. A credit may not be taken for
an adjustment that is no longer available (e.g., used up or expired), or that the insurer would not
exercise, according to its policy or past practices , in the event of adverse experience or loss.

A product that is adjustable at the discretion of the insurer but that is also subject to third-party
(e.g. regulatory) approval will be considered a qualifying adjustable product; however, such a
product will receive a lower credit than other qualifying adjustable products that do not require
third-party approval.

A product with a solvency maintenance clause (e.g. certain non-participating products issued by
fraternal benefit societies) may be considered a qualifying adjustable product provided that it
meets all other conditions.

A product with adjustable features that are not at the discretion of the insurer (such as formula or
index based adjustments) is treated as non-adjustable business.104

9.2.2. Calculation of the adjustable credit

The gross adjustable credit Cj is calculated for two categories of qualifying products where there
are contractually adjustable liability cash flows:
1) Products adjustable at the sole discretion of the insurer and that do not require third-party
approval, and
2) Products adjustable at the sole discretion of the insurer and that do require third-party
approval.

The gross adjustable credit is equal to the difference between non-adjusted cash flows and
adjusted cash flows discounted using the Initial Scenario Discount Rates specified in section
5.1.1. The adjusted cash flows are based on the maximum possible adjustment for the contracts,
up to a limit, for each adjustable feature. The limit for each adjustable feature is set depending on
whether adjustments to the feature require third-party approval or not.

For products with adjustable features that do not require third-party approval, the increases or
decreases for each feature recognized in adjusted cash flows are capped at 50% of the feature’s
current level, phased-in on a straight line basis over a period of five years (i.e. 10% per year).105
For products with adjustable features that do require third-party approval, the increases or

104
It is possible, for example, that a product with a formula or an index based adjustment to have other contractually
adjustable features that are at the sole discretion of management such as cost of insurance (COI) charges. In such
a case, only the contractually adjustable features that are at the sole discretion of management are treated as
adjustable for the calculation of the credit.
105
An insurer may instead cap the adjustments at 25% of the feature’s current level starting after one year.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 179
decreases for each feature recognized in adjusted cash flows are capped at 30% of the current
level, phased-in on a straight line basis over a period of five years after a delay period of two
years (i.e. adjustments of 6% per year occur after a waiting period of two years).106

Once the gross adjustable credit Cj for a product has been calculated, the adjustable credit CAj for
the product used to calculate the Base Solvency Buffer (q.v. section 11.3) is given by:

𝐶𝐴𝑗 = min [𝐶𝑗, 0.7 × (𝐾non-par − 𝐾 non-par excluding )]

adjustable product 𝑗

where:

 𝐾non-par is the requirement K (q.v. section 11.2) calculated for the non-participating
block, and
 𝐾non-par excluding adjustable product 𝑗 is the requirement107 K for the non-participating block
recalculated excluding the requirements for all of the qualifying adjustable product’s
insurance risks.

Example: Adjustable Credit

This example builds on the example presented at the end of section 11.2.4, where the
requirement 𝐾non-par for a non-participating block of business within a geographic region is
determined to be 1,517,987. If this block contains an adjustable product, in order to determine
the adjustable credit for the product it is necessary to calculate the gross adjustable credit C,
and to recalculate the block’s insurance components with insurance risks related to the
adjustable product excluded. Suppose that the gross adjustable credit is equal to 250,000, and
that when the adjustable product’s insurance risks are removed from the non-participating
block, the block’s recalculated insurance risk components are as follows:

Gross component Level and trend

Life insurance risk (𝑰𝑹𝒊) excluding components (𝑳𝑻𝒊) excluding 𝑰𝑹𝒊 − 𝟎. 𝟓 × 𝑳𝑻𝒊
adjustable product adjustable product
Mortality 800,000 500,000 550,000
Longevity 3,000 3,000 1,500
Morbidity incidence 50,000 10,000 45,000
Morbidity termination 2,500 1,000 2,000
Lapse sensitive 200,000 90,000 155,000
Lapse supported 100,000 40,000 80,000
Expense 7,500 0 7,500
Totals 1,163,000 644,000

106
An insurer may instead cap the adjustments at 10% of the feature’s current level starting after one year.
107
An approximation may be used under section 1.4.5.
Life A LICAT
October 2018 180
 The recalculation of the components I, D, U and K for the block then proceed as follows:

= 658,756

𝐴 = 200,000 + 75,000 = 275,000 (unchanged)

𝐷 = √𝐴2 + 𝐴𝐼 + 𝐼2 = 831,109

𝐿𝑇 = 644,000
𝐾 non-par excluding
adjustable product
𝐷2
= 0.8 𝑈 + 0.1 𝐿𝑇 + max (0.233 𝑈 − 0.116 𝐿𝑇 − 1.033 𝐷 +
𝑈 − 0.5 𝐿𝑇
= 1,247,823

The adjustable credit for the product is then:

𝐶𝐴 = min[250,000, 0.7 × (1,517,987 − 1,247,823)] = 189,115

9.3. Participating products that are contractually adjustable

Where a product is both participating and has an adjustable feature that is able to pass through
losses or reflect adverse experience arising from all risks, an insurer may take a simultaneous
credit for participating and adjustable features as specified below. In order for an insurer to take
credit for participating and adjustable features simultaneously, the product must meet all of the
conditions for participating products specified in section 9.1.1 and all of the conditions for
adjustable products specified in section 9.2.1, and the insurer should have sole discretion to
exercise the adjustable feature without third-party approval to recover losses or reflect adverse
experience that occurs for any reason (i.e. adjustability must not be confined to specific risks). If
the participating product has an adjustable feature that is not able to pass through losses or reflect
adverse experience for all risks, the credit in this section is not available. For such a product, the
insurer has the option to apply either the par credit or the adjustable credit, but not both.

If a product is eligible for both credits, the adjustable credit for the product should be
recalculated using the methodology for participating products in section 9.1. The revised
adjustable credit is:

Life A LICAT
October 2018 181
 𝐶𝐴 = min [𝐾 − 𝐾reduced + (1 − 𝐼𝑅𝑅 ) 𝐶initial, 𝐾 − 𝐾floor adj ]
(

interest max 𝐶adverse, 𝐼𝑅𝑅)

where:

 𝐾, 𝐾reduced interest, and 𝐼𝑅𝑅 have the same definitions as in section 9.1.2
 𝐶initial is the gross adjustable credit defined in section 9.2.2
 𝐶adverse is the gross adjustable credit modified so that it is discounted using the rates
under the most adverse scenario that determines the requirement for interest rate risk,
instead of the initial scenario

 𝐾floor adj is calculated by aggregating, within the calculation of 𝐾:

o 30% of all insurance risk components for the block, and
o 100% of all other risk components for the block

The aggregate credit for the product is then equal to:

min(𝐶𝑃 + 𝐶𝐴, 𝐾 − 𝐾floor global)

where:

 𝐶𝑃 is the participating credit for the product

 𝐶𝐴 is the recalculated adjustable credit for the product
 𝐾 is the adjusted diversified requirement for the block
 𝐾floor global is calculated by aggregating, within the calculation of 𝐾:
o 10% of the interest rate risk component for the block, and
o 30% of all other risk components for the block

Life A LICAT
October 2018 182
Chapter 10 Credit for Reinsurance
This chapter describes the treatment of reinsurance in the determination of the LICAT ratios,
collateral requirements for unregistered reinsurance, and the conditions necessary in order for an
insurer to take credit for reinsurance.

10.1. Definitions
The term “registered reinsurance” as used in this guideline means reinsurance that is deemed to
constitute registered reinsurance as a result of meeting the conditions either in section 10.1.1 or
in section 10.1.2 below. The term “unregistered reinsurance” refers to all reinsurance that is not
deemed to constitute registered reinsurance.

10.1.1. Registered reinsurance

An arrangement is deemed to constitute registered reinsurance if it is conducted with a registered

reinsurer. OSFI considers a reinsurer to be registered if it is:
(a) a reinsurer that is either:
i) incorporated federally and has reinsured the risks of the ceding insurer; or
ii) a foreign insurer that has reinsured in Canada the risks of the ceding insurer,
and is authorized by order of the Superintendent to do so; or
(b) a provincially/territorially regulated insurer that has been approved by the Superintendent.

Note that in respect of item (a)(ii) above, a ceding foreign insurer will be permitted to treat a
reinsurance arrangement as registered reinsurance only where the arrangement provides that the
reinsurer does not have any right of set-off against obligations of the ceding foreign insurer other
than those obligations related to the insurance business in Canada of the ceding foreign insurer.

Subsection 578(5) of the Insurance Companies Act requires a foreign insurer, in respect of risks it
reinsures in Canada, to set out in all premium notices, applications for policies and policies (which
may include cover notes offer letters or quotations) a statement that the document was issued or
made in the course of its insurance business in Canada. In cases where the cover note, offer letter
or quotation can be considered neither an application for a policy nor a policy, an insurer will be
permitted to treat a reinsurance arrangement as registered reinsurance only if the foreign reinsurer
includes, in the cover note, offer letter or quotation, a statement that the reinsurer intends to issue
the reinsurance contract under negotiation in the course of its insurance business in Canada, and
that it will take measures to ensure that the cedant’s risks will be reinsured in Canada in
accordance with OSFI’s Advisory No. 2007-01-R1 entitled Insurance in Canada of Risks.

10.1.2. Unregistered reinsurance

OSFI considers an entity to be an unregistered reinsurer if it is not a registered reinsurer as

defined in section 10.1.1 above. Special purpose vehicles formed for the purpose of securitizing
insurance risks are considered to be unregistered reinsurers.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 183
 All reinsurance arrangements under which an insurer or one of its subsidiaries cedes or
retrocedes business to an unregistered reinsurer are treated as unregistered reinsurance for the
purpose of this guideline, unless:
(a) the ceding insurer is a Canadian insurer or a subsidiary of a Canadian company; and
(b) all of the underlying policies ceded under the arrangement were directly written outside
of Canada, and the ceding insurer has not assumed in Canada the risks108 of these
policies; and
(c) either:
i) the branch or subsidiary of the Canadian insurer issuing (reinsuring) the policies
is subject to local solvency supervision by an OECD country in respect of the
risks being ceded, and the reinsurance (retrocession) arrangement is recognized109
by that country’s solvency regulator, or
ii) the risks being ceded relate to policies that have been issued (reinsured) by a
subsidiary of the Canadian insurer that is incorporated in a non-OECD country,
and the reinsurance (retrocession) arrangement is recognized109 by that country’s
solvency regulator,
and;
(d) either:
i) the reinsurer is regulated and subject to meaningful risk-based solvency
supervision (including appropriate capital requirements) for insurance risks, or
ii) the foreign solvency regulator has recognized the reinsurance arrangement on the
basis that it has been fully collateralized by the reinsurer.

Reinsurance meeting all of conditions (a) through (d) above is deemed to constitute registered
reinsurance.

10.1.3. Ceded liabilities

In the remainder of this chapter, references to liabilities that have been “ceded” denote
actuarially valued obligations due from a reinsurer under a reinsurance arrangement, before any
reduction to account for the credit quality of the reinsurer. For the purpose of this chapter, all
reinsured business should be valued based on the ceded policy liability and not the reinsurance
asset appearing on the balance sheet.

108
For the sole purpose of determining whether reinsurance is deemed to constitute registered or unregistered
reinsurance under this section, all Canadian insurers (i.e., companies, societies, and foreign companies operating
in Canada on a branch basis) should refer to the considerations set out in OSFI’s Advisory No. 2007-01-R1 titled
Insurance in Canada of Risks to determine whether it, as the ceding insurer, has assumed in Canada the risks
related to the underlying policies, or whether it assumed those risks from outside Canada.
109
The term “recognized”, as applied to a reinsurance arrangement by a foreign solvency regulator, means that the
ceding company is able to report an improved capital adequacy position to the solvency regulator as a result of
the reinsurance arrangement.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 184
10.2. Valuation basis for ceded liabilities
Policy liabilities that are ceded by an insurer under unregistered reinsurance as defined in section
10.1 must be valued, in accordance with CALM, using assumptions about the assets supporting
the liabilities that are consistent with the assets used to collateralize the reinsurer's obligation. In
this chapter, for the purpose of valuing aggregate and policy-by-policy liabilities ceded to an
unregistered reinsurer, the assets backing the ceded liability should be assumed to consist of all
or a portion of:
1) the assets held by the insurer or vested in trust that are used to support funds withheld
from or other amounts due to the unregistered reinsurer;
2) the assets located in Canada for which the insurer has a valid and perfected first priority
security interest under applicable law that are used to obtain credit in respect of the
unregistered reinsurer (q.v. section 10.4); and
3) letters of credit held to secure payment to the insurer by the reinsurer that are used to obtain
credit in respect of the unregistered reinsurer (q.v. section 10.4). These amounts should be
treated as non-interest bearing cash equivalents for the purpose of valuation.

If all of the above assets are not sufficient to back the ceded liability, the remaining assets
backing the ceded liability should be assumed to be assets held by the ceding insurer or vested in
trust that back the ceding insurer’s unallocated Available Capital or Available Margin.

10.3. Deductions from Available Capital for unregistered reinsurance

Insurers are required to deduct from Available Capital the ceded policy liabilities corresponding
to reinsurance assets arising from unregistered reinsurance.

10.3.1. Requirement for aggregate positive liabilities ceded

For every unregistered reinsurer, the total value of the policy liabilities ceded to the reinsurer, if
positive, must be included within an insurer’s Deductions/Adjustments (qq.v. sections 2.1.2 and
12.2.4).

10.3.2. Requirement for offsetting policy-by-policy liabilities ceded

Where an insurer cedes positive policy-by-policy liabilities and negative policy-by-policy

liabilities to the same unregistered reinsurer, the amount of offsetting policy-by-policy liabilities
ceded to the reinsurer is defined to be the lower of the total:
a. positive policy-by-policy liabilities ceded to the reinsurer; or
b. negative policy-by-policy liabilities ceded to the reinsurer.

This offsetting amount, net of any adjustments made to negative reserves under section
2.1.2.9110, must be deducted from Tier 1 as a negative reserve and included in Tier 2 for
Canadian insurers, or included in the negative reserve component of Assets Required for foreign

110
No reduction of the adjusted amount is permitted for amounts recoverable on surrender.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 185
insurers operating in Canada on a branch basis. This requirement is equivalent to the
requirements that would apply under sections 2.1.2 and 2.2.1, or sections 12.2.4 and 12.2.1, had
an insurer retained equal amounts of positive and negative policy-by-policy liabilities.

10.3.3. Requirement for aggregate negative liabilities ceded – Canadian insurers

Where the total value of the policy liabilities that a Canadian insurer has ceded to a particular
unregistered reinsurer is negative, the insurer should deduct from Tier 1 and include in Tier 2 the
reported amount of any assets appearing in the Life annual return arising from transactions with
the reinsurer111 unless the assets:
1) are unencumbered and held in Canada in custody of the insurer;
2) are not receivables;
3) do not bear any credit exposure to the unregistered reinsurer or any of its affiliates
(obligations of the reinsurer or any of its affiliates that have been guaranteed by a third
party must be deducted from Tier 1 and included in Tier 2); and
4) have been transferred to the insurer permanently; for example, they may not become
repayable in the event of the occurrence of a contingency.

The deduction from Tier 1 and inclusion in Tier 2 required on account of any unregistered
reinsurer is limited to the value of the aggregate negative policy liability ceded to the reinsurer,
net of any adjustment to the negative reserve amount made under section 2.1.2.9110.

10.3.4. Requirement for aggregate negative liabilities ceded – foreign insurers

Where the total value of the policy liabilities that a foreign insurer has ceded to a particular
unregistered reinsurer is negative, the insurer should include in Assets Required the amount of
any assets reported as vested in trust in the Life annual return arising from transactions with the
reinsurer111 unless the assets:
1) do not bear any credit exposure to the unregistered reinsurer or any of its affiliates
(obligations of the reinsurer or any of its affiliates that have been guaranteed by a third
party must be included in Assets Required); and
2) have been transferred to the insurer permanently; for example, they may not become
repayable in the event of the occurrence of a contingency.

The amount required to be added to Assets Required on account of any unregistered reinsurer is
limited to the value of the aggregate negative policy liability ceded to the reinsurer, net of any
adjustment to the negative reserve amount made under section 2.1.2.9110.

111
Assets appearing in the Life annual return that should be deducted exclude negative reinsurance assets and
reinsurance liabilities due to the reinsurer. The value of other assets arising from transactions with the reinsurer
may not be netted with negative reinsurance assets or reinsurance liabilities in calculating the amount deducted
from Tier 1 or added to Assets Required.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 186
 Examples: Requirements for Liabilities Ceded

1) A Canadian insurer cedes policy liabilities to an unregistered reinsurer whose aggregate

value is $100, where the liabilities consist of $300 in positive policy-by-policy liabilities and
$200 in negative policy-by-policy liabilities. In the absence of any collateral or letters of
credit (q.v. section 10.4), the insurer will be required under section 10.3.1 to deduct $100
from Gross Tier 1 Capital. Additionally, under section 10.3.2, the insurer will be required to
deduct $140 (70% of $200) from Gross Tier 1 and add this amount to Tier 2.
2) A Canadian insurer cedes policy liabilities to an unregistered reinsurer whose aggregate
value is negative $400, where the liabilities consist of $100 in positive policy-by-policy
liabilities and $500 in negative policy-by-policy liabilities. The reinsurer has no recourse to
the Canadian insurer if all or part of the ceded business lapses. In the absence of any
collateral or letters of credit, the insurer will be required under section 10.3.2 to deduct $70
(70% of $100) from Gross Tier 1 Capital and add this amount to Tier 2. There may be an
additional deduction required under section 10.3.3, depending on the assets the insurer
receives in consideration for the aggregate negative cession. For example:
a. If the insurer receives $300 cash in exchange for ceding the business, then no
additional deduction is required under section 10.3.3, as cash is not precluded under
the criteria in this section.
b. If the insurer records a receivable for $350 from the unregistered reinsurer, then it
is required to deduct $280 (equal to the lower of $350 or 70% of $400) from Gross
Tier 1 Capital and add this amount to Tier 2. The amount of the deduction is $280
and not $350 in this case because it is limited to 70% of the aggregate negative
reserve ceded.
c. If the insurer receives no compensation for ceding the business, then no additional
deduction is required under section 10.3.3; the cession itself will cause a $400
reduction in Tier 1 Available Capital via a reduction in retained earnings.

10.4. Collateral and letters of credit

This section describes the conditions under which the deductions from Available Capital that are
required under section 10.3 may be reduced, and replaces the rules that would otherwise apply
under sections 3.2 and 3.3.

10.4.1. Credit available

An insurer is given credit, for each unregistered reinsurer, equal to the sum of:
1) the funds held by the ceding insurer for its exclusive benefit (e.g. funds withheld
coinsurance) to secure the payment to the ceding insurer by the reinsurer of the reinsurer's
share of any loss or liability for which the reinsurer is liable under the reinsurance
agreement.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 187
 2) the value of assets pledged by the unregistered reinsurer that are located in Canada and
subject to the ceding insurer’s claim under a valid and perfected first priority security
interest under applicable law in accordance with OSFI’s guidance for reinsurance
security agreements. All pledged assets must:
a. be held to secure the payment to the ceding insurer by the reinsurer of the
reinsurer's share of any loss or liability for which the reinsurer is liable under the
reinsurance agreement112,
b. be in the form of cash113 or securities,
c. be owned by the reinsurer, and
d. be freely transferrable.
and
3) the amount of acceptable letters of credit114 held to secure the payment to the ceding
insurer by the reinsurer of the reinsurer's share of any loss or liability for which the
reinsurer is liable under the reinsurance agreement.

In order for a ceding insurer to obtain credit for funds held under a funds withheld reinsurance
arrangement, the arrangement must not contain any contractual provision that would require
payment of funds withheld to the reinsurer before the end of the reinsurance term (e.g. an
acceleration clause). Furthermore, the ceding insurer may not provide non-contractual or implicit
support, or otherwise create or sustain an expectation that any funds withheld could be paid to
the reinsurer before the end of the reinsurance term.

All collateral must be available for as long as the assuming insurer will have financial
obligations under the reinsurance agreements for which the ceding insurer is taking credit. Where
contract stipulations regarding the collateral may vary during the period, credit may only be
taken if the ceding insurer maintains the exclusive option to retain the collateral and the
additional cost of that option, if any, is fully recognized and explicitly accounted for at inception
of the agreement.

112
A foreign insurer ceding risks related to its Canadian business will be given credit for assets located in Canada
only where the reinsurance arrangement provides that the reinsurer does not have any right of set-off against the
obligations of the foreign insurer other than obligations related to the foreign insurer’s insurance business in
Canada. In particular, the reinsurer must not be able to set off amounts due to the foreign insurer against any
liabilities of the home office or affiliates of the foreign insurer that are not liabilities arising out of the Canadian
operations of the foreign insurer.
113
Cash must be in a form in which it is possible to perfect a security interest under applicable law.
114
Insurers should contact OSFI’s Securities Administration Unit (SAU) to obtain OSFI’s standards for letters of
credit. The SAU’s contact information is:
 Via mail: 121 King Street West, 22nd Floor, Toronto, ON M5H 3T9; or
 Via email: [email protected].
General guidance on requirements for approval of letters of credit can be found in the OSFI document General
Guidelines for Use of Letters of Credit (LOC’s).

Life A LICAT
October 2018 188
 Examples: Collateral for Unregistered Reinsurance

1) An insurer has entered into an unregistered coinsurance arrangement with a term of 30

years. However, the unregistered reinsurer is contractually obligated to provide collateral
in Canada only for 5 years, and there is no mechanism in place to procure additional
collateral after the 5-year term ends. As a result, the ceding insurer may not take credit for
the collateral provided under this arrangement.

2) Suppose that the reinsurance arrangement is the same as in 1), with the exception that the
ceding insurer has the option to retain the collateral after 5 years at an annual cost equal to
the Canadian 1-year treasury bill rate plus 3%. Under this arrangement, the insurer may
take credit for the collateral provided that the present value of total collateral costs from
years 6 to 30 is taken into account as a reduction of the reinsurance asset, is covered by an
additional reserve set up by the insurer, or is otherwise excluded from reported Tier 1
capital.

All letters of credit used to obtain credit in respect of an unregistered reinsurer must be issued by
or have a separate confirming letter from a Canadian bank that is listed on Schedule I or
Schedule II of the Bank Act. In aggregate, the amount of credit taken for letters of credit is
limited to 30% of the total positive policy-by-policy liabilities ceded to unregistered reinsurers.

The assets used to obtain credit for a specific unregistered reinsurer may not be obligations of the
unregistered reinsurer itself or any of its affiliates. With respect to the above three sources
available to obtain credit, this implies that:
1) To the extent that a ceding insurer is reporting obligations due from the unregistered
reinsurer or one of its affiliates as assets in its Life annual return, the ceding insurer is
precluded from taking credit for funds held to secure payment from the unregistered
reinsurer;
2) Assets located in Canada in which a ceding insurer has a valid and perfected first priority
security interest under applicable law may not be used to obtain credit if they are
obligations of the unregistered reinsurer or one of its affiliates; and
3) A letter of credit is not acceptable if it has been issued by the unregistered reinsurer or
one of its affiliates.

Guideline B-2: Large Exposure Limits applies to assets used to obtain credit in respect of
unregistered reinsurance. As a consequence, an insurer may not take credit for assets in which it
has perfected a security interest or letters of credit, held under an unregistered reinsurance
transaction or a series of such transactions (not necessarily all with the same reinsurer), if
consolidating these assets115 on the insurer’s balance sheet, along with the ceded liabilities they
support, would cause a large exposure limit to be breached116. An insurer should comply with all
115
The expression “consolidating these assets” means, for letters of credit, recording the full amount of the letters of
credit as obligations due from the issuing banks.
116
This consolidation test must be performed in respect of unregistered reinsurance notwithstanding that Guideline
B-2 does not establish quantitative limits for exposures to reinsurers. Assets and letters of credit having a residual

Life A LICAT
October 2018 189
other OSFI guidelines and advisories concerning investments (e.g., Guideline B-1: Prudent
Person Approach, Guideline B-5: Asset Securitization) in respect of the aggregate of the assets it
has used to obtain credit for unregistered reinsurance with the assets it holds in its own portfolio.

10.4.2. Application to requirements for ceded liabilities

The credit available in respect of an unregistered reinsurer may be applied to the following
requirements of section 10.3:
1) The requirement for aggregate positive liabilities ceded to the reinsurer (q.v. section
10.3.1). This requirement may be reduced to a minimum of zero using the credit
available.
2) The requirement for offsetting policy-by-policy liabilities ceded to the reinsurer (q.v.
section 10.3.2). The requirement may be reduced to a minimum of zero for a particular
reinsurer, but the credit taken for this requirement in aggregate is subject to the limit
below.

The total credit available that may be applied toward requirement 2) in respect of all reinsurers in
aggregate is limited to the greater of zero or:

N – max (R – C, 0)

where:
 N is the total requirement for offsetting policy-by-policy liabilities ceded to unregistered
reinsurers;
 R is equal to 50% of the difference between the insurer’s Base Solvency Buffer
(calculated net of registered reinsurance only) and Surplus Allowance;
 C is Tier 1 capital (for Canadian insurers) or Available Margin less Other Admitted
Assets (for foreign insurers), calculated without deducting the amount of offsetting
policy-by-policy liabilities ceded to unregistered reinsurers (q.v. section 10.3.2).

If the maximum credit that may be applied toward requirement 2) is less than the total of the
requirement, the difference must be deducted from Tier 1 and added to Tier 2 (for Canadian
insurers) or added to Assets Required (for foreign insurers) and may not be covered by collateral
or letters of credit. If this situation occurs, the ceding insurer may allocate the maximum total
credit allowed to particular unregistered reinsurers in any manner it chooses.

Any credit available for a particular reinsurer that exceeds the sum of the maximums allowed
under 1) and 2) above or that is otherwise not applied towards these requirements may be applied
towards the capital requirements for business ceded to the reinsurer, subject to the conditions in
section 10.5.

maturity of less than one year may not be excluded from the definition of exposure. For the purpose of the
consolidation test, the additional amount of total capital that a ceding insurer may assume would be available is
limited to the amount of Eligible Deposits recognized in the LICAT total ratio.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 190
10.4.3. Credit and market risk requirements

Consistent with the substitution capital treatment used for collateral and guarantees, insurers are
required to include, in required capital or required margin, the capital requirements for credit risk
(as determined under Chapter 3) and market risk (as determined under sections 5.2, 5.3, and 5.4)
for all assets subject to the insurer’s claim under a perfected security interest, and for all letters of
credit, that are used to obtain credit for ceded liability capital requirements relating to
unregistered reinsurance or that are included in Eligible Deposits. A separate calculation is also
required for currency risk as described in section 5.6.8. Available assets and letters of credit that
are not used to obtain credit for ceded liability requirements and are not included in Eligible
Deposits are excluded from all capital requirement calculations. A ceding insurer may designate
which assets and letters of credit (or portions thereof) among those available that it will apply
towards ceded requirements or include in Eligible Deposits.

10.5. Calculation of required capital/margin or Eligible Deposits

10.5.1. Necessary conditions for credit

In order for a ceding insurer to obtain a reduction in its Base Solvency Buffer or Required
Margin on account of a registered reinsurance arrangement, or to recognize an Eligible Deposit
on account of an unregistered reinsurance arrangement, the arrangement must conform to all of
the principles contained in Guideline B-3: Sound Reinsurance Practices and Procedures. The
arrangement must also meet all of the conditions necessary for effective risk transfer specified in
this section. The ceding insurer should be able to demonstrate that the change in risk it is
exposed to as a result of the arrangement is commensurate with the amount by which it reduces
its Base Solvency Buffer or Required Margin, or with the amount of Eligible Deposits that it
recognizes117.

Risk transfer must be effective in all circumstances under which the ceding insurer relies on the
transfer to cover the capital/margin requirement. In assessing an arrangement, the ceding insurer
should take into account any contract terms whose fulfilment is outside the ceding insurer’s
direct control, and that would reduce the effectiveness of risk transfer. Such terms include,
among others, those which:
1) would allow the reinsurer to unilaterally cancel the arrangement (other than for non-
payment of reinsurance premiums due under the contract);
2) would increase the effective cost of the transaction to the ceding insurer in response to an
increased likelihood of the reinsurer experiencing losses under the arrangement;
3) would obligate the ceding insurer to alter the risks transferred for the purpose of reducing
the likelihood that the reinsurer will experience losses under the arrangement;

117
Without limiting the requirement that ceding insurers should abide by the risk transfer principle with respect to
all reinsurance transactions, OSFI may, if it is unclear how much risk the ceding insurer bears post-reinsurance
and OSFI determines it is desirable to provide greater certainty, issue further guidance (including quantitative
requirements) to implement this principle with respect to any reinsurance arrangement. Insurers are encouraged
to contact OSFI to discuss reinsurance arrangements for which the measure of risk transfer may be unclear when
applying this principle or for which implementation guidance may be required.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 191
 4) would allow for the termination of the arrangement due to an increased likelihood of the
reinsurer experiencing losses under the arrangement;
5) could prevent the reinsurer from being obligated to pay out any amounts due under the
arrangement in a timely manner; or
6) could allow for early maturity of the arrangement.

The ceding insurer should also take into account circumstances under which the benefit of the
risk transfer could be undermined. For example, this may occur if the ceding insurer provides
support (including non-contractual support) to the arrangement with the intention of reducing
potential or actual losses to the reinsurer.

In determining whether there is effective risk transfer, the reinsurance arrangement must be
considered as a whole. Where the arrangement consists of several contracts, the entire set of
contracts, including contracts between third parties, must be considered. The ceding insurer
should also consider the entire legal relationship between itself and the reinsurer.

No reduction of the Base Solvency Buffer or Required Margin, or recognition of Eligible

Deposits, is allowed for a reinsurance arrangement that has material basis risk with respect to the
reinsured business (for example if payments under the arrangement are made according to an
external indicator instead of actual losses). Reinsurance assets arising from arrangements that are
subject to basis risk may be subject to capital charges for insurance risk in addition to the capital
charge for credit risk.

In assessing the effectiveness of risk transfer, the economic substance of an arrangement must be
considered over the legal form or its treatment for financial statement purposes.

10.5.2. Retained loss positions

If a coinsurance arrangement does not cover all losses up to the level of the ceded insurance
contract liability plus the marginal insurance risk requirement for the ceded business net of
PfADs (the Requisite Level), then it is necessary for the ceding insurer to increase its required
capital or margin, or reduce the limit on Eligible Deposits recognized. In particular, any
coinsurance arrangement containing a provision under which the reinsurer is required to cover
losses only in excess of a certain amount will require an adjustment, regardless of the treatment
for financial statement purposes. Such provisions include, but are not limited to:
a) experience rating refunds,
b) claims fluctuation reserves and reinsurance claims fluctuation reserves, and
c) variable risk transfer mechanisms other than a) or b) above whereby the level at which
losses are reinsured depends upon prior experience.

If a registered coinsurance arrangement does not cover all losses up to the Requisite Level then
the ceding insurer should add to its required capital or margin the total amount of losses at or
below this level for which it remains at risk. If an unregistered coinsurance arrangement does not
cover all losses up to the Requisite Level then the quantity SB0 – SB1 used in determining the
limit on Eligible Deposits for the coinsurance arrangement (q.v. section 6.8.1) is reduced by the

Life A LICAT
October 2018 192
total amount of losses at or below the Requisite Level for which the ceding insurer remains at
risk.

Reinsurance arrangements, other than coinsurance, that provide tranched protection or under
which the ceding insurer otherwise retains a loss position, are treated as stop loss reinsurance and
are subject to the conditions in section 6.8.5.

The amount of the loss position that a ceding insurer retains under a reinsurance arrangement
should be recalculated, according to the treaty, at each reporting date.

10.5.3. Registered reinsurance

All capital requirements for which it is possible to obtain credit for reinsurance may be
calculated net of registered reinsurance. For example, policy liabilities ceded under registered
reinsurance arrangements are excluded from the policy liability cash flows used to calculate all
LICAT insurance risk components.

The 2.5% credit risk requirement for registered reinsurance assets may be reduced in accordance
with this section using the substitution approach described in section 10.4.3 if the asset is secured
by collateral meeting the conditions in the introduction to section 3.2 and in section 3.2.2118, or a
guarantee (including a letter of credit) meeting the conditions in section 3.3.

If an insurer cedes business under a funds withheld coinsurance or modified coinsurance

arrangement that constitutes registered reinsurance, it is possible that the asset risks covered in
Chapter 3 and sections 5.2 to 5.4 are transferred to the reinsurer. Such a transfer may occur if, for
example, the contractual rate of accrual of the funds withheld liability or modified coinsurance
adjustment is not fixed, and instead depends on the returns of a pool of assets held by the ceding
insurer. The capital treatment for asset risk transfers follows the treatment for collateral (section
10.4.3) or guarantees (section 3.3), as applicable, both of which are based on the substitution
approach.

10.5.3.1 Funds withheld and other balances due to reinsurers

The credit risk requirement for reinsurance assets arising from registered reinsurance may be
reduced on account of:
1. the liability for funds held by the ceding insurer for its exclusive benefit (e.g. funds
withheld coinsurance) to secure the payment to the ceding insurer by the reinsurer of the
reinsurer's share of any loss or liability for which the reinsurer is liable under the
reinsurance agreement; and
2. any other liabilities of the ceding insurer due to the reinsurer for which the ceding insurer
has a legal and contractual right of setoff against the amount recoverable from the
reinsurer.

118
The conditions for eligible financial collateral from section 3.2.2 that should be used for registered reinsurance
are those for capital markets transactions rather than secured lending. If collateral is denominated in a currency
different from that of the reinsurance asset, its market value must be reduced by 30%.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 193
Such liabilities are treated as collateral for the reinsurance asset due from the reinsurer, and the
capital treatment of the reinsurance asset follows the substitution approach described in section
10.4.3. If the liabilities due are not subject to fluctuations arising from changes in asset prices,
then the credit risk factor associated with the liability under the substitution approach is 0%.
However, if the value of the liability fluctuates directly with that of one or more on-balance sheet
assets, then:

1. Provided the reinsurer is not an affiliate of the ceding insurer, the asset risk requirements
for the on-balance sheet assets are eliminated. If the reinsurer is an affiliate of the ceding
insurer, the asset risk requirements for the on-balance sheet assets remain unchanged; and
2. Provided the on-balance sheet assets are not obligations of the reinsurer or one of its
affiliates, the credit risk factors associated with the liability are deemed to be the same as
those of the assets to which it is linked. If a portion of the liability is linked to an asset
that is an obligation of the reinsurer or one of its affiliates, then this portion of the
liability cannot be recognized as collateral.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 194
 Examples: Credit and market risk requirements for business ceded under funds
withheld

1) Under a funds withheld coinsurance treaty, an insurer has a reinsurance asset of $120 due
from a registered reinsurer, and a funds withheld liability of $100 due to the reinsurer. The
contractual interest rate used for the funds withheld balance is 2% per year, and therefore
the reinsurance does not transfer any of the asset risks borne by the ceding insurer. Of the
$120 reinsurance asset, $100 is treated as collateralized, and the remaining $20 is treated
as uncollateralized. As a result, the credit risk requirement for the reinsurance asset is
reduced from $3.00 to:

0% × $100 + 2.5% × $20 = $0.50

The asset risk requirements for the rest of the insurer’s on-balance sheet assets remain
unchanged.

2) Suppose instead that the amount that is contractually accrued on the funds withheld
liability is equal to the return on the following portfolio of on-balance sheet assets, none of
which are obligations of the reinsurer or its affiliates:

Asset Value Factor

AA-rated bond, 2 year maturity $25 0.50%
A-rated bond, 5 year maturity $25 2.00%
BBB-rated bond, 10 year maturity $25 4.75%
Common stock $25 35%

If the reinsurer is not an affiliate of the ceding insurer, a total of $10.56 of asset risk
requirements for these assets is removed from the insurer’s credit and market risk solvency
buffers. Additionally, $50 of the portfolio has an asset factor lower than that of the
reinsurance asset, which allows the ceding insurer to treat this portion of the reinsurance
asset as collateralized; the remainder is treated as uncollateralized. The credit risk
requirement for the reinsurance asset is therefore reduced from $3.00 to:

0.5% × $25 + 2% × $25 + 2.5% × $70 = $2.38

10.5.3.2 Modified coinsurance

If a registered modified coinsurance arrangement transfers asset risks associated with on-balance
sheet assets to the reinsurer, the arrangement must meet all of the requirements of section 3.3 in
order for the ceding insurer to take credit (e.g., the reinsurance must provide protection at least as
strong as a guarantee, and the reinsurer cannot be an affiliate of the ceding insurer). If an insurer
is eligible to take credit for the transferred asset risks, the capital treatment follows the
substitution approach. The credit risk factor substituted is the factor corresponding to the
reinsurer’s claims-paying ability rating and the maturity of the covered asset, rather than 2.5%.
For assets covered under the risk transfer that are subject to market risk factors, the factor
substituted should be the reinsurer’s credit risk factor corresponding to a 10-year maturity. If the

Life A LICAT
October 2018 195
term of the modified coinsurance arrangement is shorter than the maturity of a covered fixed-
income asset, then the maturity mismatch adjustment in section 3.3.7 should be applied.

Example: Asset risk requirements for business ceded under modified coinsurance

If, in example 2) in the previous section, the reinsurance arrangement is modified coinsurance
instead of funds withheld, the term of the reinsurance is 20 years, the reinsurer has an AA
claims-paying ability rating, the return on the asset portfolio is included in the modified
coinsurance adjustment, and the reinsurance meets all the requirements of section 3.3
(including that the reinsurer is an eligible guarantor per section 3.3.4), then the credit and
market risk requirements for the asset portfolio go down from $10.56 to $1.31, based on the
following substituted asset factors:

Substituted
Asset Value
Factor
AA-rated bond, 2 year maturity $25 0.50%
A-rated bond, 5 year maturity $25 1.25%
BBB-rated bond, 10 year maturity $25 1.75%
Common stock $25 1.75%

10.5.4. Unregistered reinsurance

Collateral and letters of credit that are used to obtain credit for unregistered reinsurance or for
insurance risk capital requirements give rise to additional capital requirements for credit and
market risks (section 10.4.3).

If an unregistered reinsurance arrangement transfers on-balance sheet asset risks to the reinsurer,
the ceding insurer does not receive any credit for these requirements, as the credit risk factor
assigned to the unregistered reinsurer is effectively 100% and does not lead to a credit under the
substitution approach.

An “excess deposit” is the difference, if positive, between the credit available for an unregistered
reinsurer under section 10.4.1, and the credit that has been applied towards the requirements for
liabilities ceded to the reinsurer under section 10.4.2. If an unregistered reinsurer has placed an
excess deposit, all or a portion of the deposit may be included in Eligible Deposits in the
calculation of the Core and Total Ratios. Refer to section 6.8.1, which specifies the limit on the
amount of the excess deposits that may be recognized.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 196
Chapter 11 Aggregation and Diversification of Risks
Risk aggregation is the approach used to calculate the total of each and all of the risk elements. A
diversification credit or benefit results when the aggregation of risks produces results that are
less than the total of the individual risk elements.

11.1. Within-risk diversification

Diversification credits are applied to specific components of the mortality and morbidity
requirements calculated in Chapter 6. The credit in section 11.1.1 is calculated net of registered
reinsurance. Within the calculation of the Base Solvency Buffer used to determine the LICAT
ratios, the statistical fluctuation factors in section 11.1.2 are calculated net of registered
reinsurance. For the solvency buffers SB1, SB2 and SB3 defined in section 6.8, statistical
fluctuation factors are calculated net of registered reinsurance and additional elements specific to
the calculation. Since the requirements for participating business are calculated on a standalone
basis (q.v. section 9.1.2), there are no within-risk diversification benefits between similar risks in
participating blocks and non-participating blocks.

11.1.1 Mortality level and trend risk - diversification credit between life supported and
death supported business

A diversification credit is calculated between individually underwritten life supported and

individually underwritten death supported business. The diversification credit is determined by
first calculating mortality level and trend risk components for individually underwritten life
supported business and death supported business in aggregate. The aggregate component for
level and trend mortality risk assumes a correlation factor of -75% between life and death
supported business and is calculated as:

𝑅𝐶𝑎𝑔𝑔𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑎𝑡𝑒 = √𝑅𝐶2 + 𝑅𝐶2 − 1.5 × 𝑅𝐶𝐿 × 𝑅𝐶𝐷

𝐿 𝐷

where:
 𝑅𝐶𝑎𝑔𝑔𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑎𝑡𝑒 is the aggregate component for mortality level and trend risk (after
diversification) for all life and death supported business;
 𝑅𝐶𝐿 is the sum of the individual risk charges for mortality level risk and mortality
trend risk for life supported business as determined in sections 6.2.2 and 6.2.3,
respectively;
 𝑅𝐶𝐷 is the sum of the individual risk charges for mortality level risk and mortality
trend risk for death supported business as determined in sections 6.2.2 and 6.2.3,
respectively.

The diversification credit is the difference between the sum of the individual mortality level and
trend risk components for life supported and death supported business (qq.v. sections 6.2.2 and
6.2.3) and the aggregate component for mortality level and trend risk calculated using the
formula above:

Life A LICAT
October 2018 197
 Diversification credit = 𝑅𝐶𝐿 + 𝑅𝐶𝐷 − 𝑅𝐶𝑎𝑔𝑔𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑎𝑡𝑒

11.1.2 Morbidity risk credits

The capital requirements for morbidity risk determined in section 6.4 for certain products are
reduced by multiplying the requirement by a statistical fluctuation factor (SFF). For each SFF,
exposures are aggregated by product within each geographic region before the SFF is applied.
For example, all disability exposures within a geographic region are aggregated (individual
active DI, individual active WP, individual disabled DI, group disabled LTD, individual and
group disabled WP and group active and disabled STD) before the SFF is applied.

11.1.2.1 Credit for level risk

Morbidity SFFs for level risk are calculated as follows:

Disability

1 , if 𝑅𝐶 ≤ $42,000,000
𝑆𝐹𝐹(𝑅𝐶) = { 648

0.9 + , if 𝑅𝐶 > $42,000,000

√𝑅𝐶

where RC is the capital requirement for level risk.

CI

𝑆𝐹𝐹(𝐹𝐴) = { 1 , if 𝐹𝐴 ≤ $300,000,000
14,722

0.15 + , if 𝐹𝐴 > $300,000,000

√𝐹𝐴

where FA is the total face amount.

LTC

1 , if 𝑅𝐶 ≤ $75,000,000
𝑆𝐹𝐹(𝑅𝐶) = { 4,330
0.5 + , if 𝑅𝐶 > $75,000,000
√𝑅𝐶

where RC is the capital requirement for level risk.

11.1.2.2 Credit for volatility risk

Morbidity SFFs for volatility risk are calculated as follows:

Life A LICAT
October 2018 198
Disability
1 , if 𝑅𝐶 ≤ $6,000,000
𝑆𝐹𝐹(𝑅𝐶) = { 734
0.7 + , if 𝑅𝐶 > $6,000,000
√𝑅𝐶

where RC is the capital requirement for volatility risk.

CI

𝑆𝐹𝐹(𝐹𝐴) = { 1 , if 𝐹𝐴 ≤ $300,000,000
14,722

0.15 + , if 𝐹𝐴 > $300,000,000

√𝐹𝐴

where FA is the total face amount.

LTC

1 , if 𝑅𝐶 ≤ $3,000,000
𝑆𝐹𝐹(𝑅𝐶) = { 1,212
0.3 + , if 𝑅𝐶 > $3,000,000
√𝑅𝐶

where RC is the capital requirement for volatility risk.

Travel and credit

1 , if 𝑅𝐶 ≤ $5,000,000
𝑆𝐹𝐹(𝑅𝐶) = { 1,788
0.2 + , if 𝑅𝐶 > $5,000,000
√𝑅𝐶

where RC is the capital requirement for volatility risk.

Medical/Dental (including other group A&S)

1 , if 𝑅𝐶 ≤ $3,000,000
𝑆𝐹𝐹(𝑅𝐶) = { 519
0.7 + , if 𝑅𝐶 > $3,000,000
√𝑅𝐶

where RC is the capital requirement for volatility risk.

11.1.3 Mortality and morbidity risks – portfolio volume credit

A credit is given for diversification across geographic regions in the level risk component of the
mortality and morbidity requirements. For each of the mortality, morbidity incidence, and
morbidity termination requirements for a block of business within a region, the component for
level risk may be reduced by:

0.5 × (𝐿0 − 𝐿1)

Life A LICAT
October 2018 199
where L0 is the level risk component for the block calculated using the volatility and statistical
fluctuation factors for its region, and L1 is the level risk component for the block calculated using
volatility and statistical fluctuation factors based on business volumes aggregated across all
geographic regions. Both L0 and L1 are calculated net of all reinsurance.

11.2 Between-risk diversification

After the individual risk components have been calculated, they are aggregated in three stages.
First, a post-diversification requirement for insurance risk (I) is calculated. Then, an unadjusted
diversified requirement for all risks (D) is calculated by aggregating the net requirement for
insurance risk with the requirements for credit risk and market risk. This unadjusted diversified
requirement is compared against the undiversified requirement (U) calculated as the sum of
individual risk components. The adjusted diversified requirement (K) is calculated based on D
and U.

If an insurer wishes to take credit for participating or adjustable products (q.v. Chapter 9), or for
unregistered reinsurance or reinsurance claims fluctuation reserves (q.v. section 6.8), it will be
necessary to calculate the quantities I, D, U and K for one or more subsets of the insurer’s book
of business.

11.2.1 Insurance Risk Requirement (I)

The requirement for insurance risk I is calculated by aggregating the components of insurance
risk using a correlation matrix. The formula for I is:

𝐼 = √ ∑ 𝜌𝑖𝑗 × (𝐼𝑅𝑖 − 0.5 × 𝐿𝑇𝑖) × (𝐼𝑅𝑗 − 0.5 × 𝐿𝑇𝑗) + 𝑃𝐶

𝑖,𝑗=1

where:
 𝐼𝑅𝑖 is the required capital for insurance risk i, before credit for participating and
adjustable products,
 𝐿𝑇𝑖 is the sum of the level and trend components for insurance risk i (𝐿𝑇7, the level
and trend component for expense risk, is zero)
 𝑃𝐶 is the requirement for any P&C risks arising from consolidated subsidiaries that
write both life and P&C business (q.v. section 6.7)
 𝜌𝑖𝑗 is the correlation factor between insurance risks i and j, as specified by the
following correlation matrix:

Life A LICAT
October 2018 200
 j Mortality Longevity Morbidity Morbidity Lapse Lapse Expense
i incidence termination sensitive supported
and claims
Mortality 1
Longevity -0.25 1
Morbidity
incidence 0.5 -0.25 1
and claims
Morbidity -0.25 0.5 0.25 1
termination
Lapse 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1
sensitive
Lapse 0 -0.25 0 -0.25 -0.5 1
supported
Expense 0.5 0.25 0.5 0. 5 0.5 -0.25 1

However, I may not be lower than the highest value of 𝐼𝑅𝑖 − 0.5 × 𝐿𝑇𝑖 + 𝑃𝐶 for any insurance
risk i included in the correlation matrix.

11.2.2 Diversified Risk Requirement (D)

The unadjusted diversified requirement D for all risks is calculated by aggregating the
requirements for credit and market risks with the insurance risk requirement. The correlation
assumed between the two classes of risks is 50%. Consequently:

𝐷 = √𝐴2 + 𝐴𝐼 + 𝐼2

where:
 A is the sum of the requirements for credit risk (for both on- and off-balance sheet
items) and market risk, and
 I is the insurance risk requirement from the previous section.

11.2.3 Undiversified Risk Requirement (U)

The undiversified risk requirement U is calculated as:

7

𝑈 = ∑ 𝐼𝑅𝑖 + 𝑃𝐶 + 𝐴
𝑖=1

where 𝐼𝑅𝑖, A and 𝑃𝐶 are as defined in sections 11.2.1 and 11.2.2.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 201
11.2.4 Adjusted Diversified Requirement (K)

After the diversified and undiversified risk requirements D and U have been computed, the
adjusted diversified requirement K for insurance, credit and market risk is calculated as:

𝐷2
𝐾 = 0.8 𝑈 + 0.1 𝐿𝑇 + max (0.233 𝑈 − 0.116 𝐿𝑇 − 1.033 𝐷 + , 0)
𝑈 − 0.5 𝐿𝑇
where:

𝐿𝑇 = ∑ 𝐿𝑇𝑖
𝑖=1

Example: Calculation of the Adjusted Diversified Requirement

Suppose that the life insurance risk requirements for a non-participating block of business in a
geographic regions, with corresponding level and trend components, are as follows:

Life insurance risk Gross component (𝑰𝑹𝒊) Level and trend components (𝑳𝑻𝒊)
Mortality 1,000,000 700,000
Longevity 3,000 3,000
Morbidity incidence 50,000 10,000
Morbidity termination 2,500 1,000
Lapse sensitive 300,000 150,000
Lapse supported 100,000 40,000
Expense 10,000 0
Totals 1,465,500 904,000

Suppose as well that the block’s other risk requirements are as follows:

Risk Component
Credit risk 200,000
Market risk 75,000
Property and casualty risk 25,000

In order to calculate the total requirement K for the block, it is first necessary to calculate the
quantities 𝐼𝑅𝑖 − 0.5 × 𝐿𝑇𝑖 for each of the life insurance risks:

Insurance risk 𝑰𝑹𝒊 − 𝟎. 𝟓 × 𝑳𝑻𝒊

Mortality 650,000
Longevity 1,500
Morbidity incidence 45,000
Morbidity termination 2,000

Life A LICAT
October 2018 202
 Lapse sensitive 225,000
Lapse supported 80,000
Expense 10,000

The insurance risk requirement I is calculated by aggregating the components of the above
using the correlation matrix specified in section 11.2.1, and adding the requirement for
property and casualty risks:

𝐼 = √ ∑ 𝜌𝑖𝑗 × (𝐼𝑅𝑖 − 0.5 × 𝐿𝑇𝑖) × (𝐼𝑅𝑗 − 0.5 × 𝐿𝑇𝑗) + 𝑃𝐶 = 764,421 + 25,000

𝑖,𝑗=1

= 789,421

Since the highest value of 𝐼𝑅𝑖 − 0.5 × 𝐿𝑇𝑖 + 𝑃𝐶 is 675,000, the value of I is not increased to
account for this minimum.

The requirements for credit and market risk are summed to obtain A:

𝐴 = 200,000 + 75,000 = 275,000

after which it is possible to compute the diversified risk requirement D:

𝐷 = √𝐴2 + 𝐴𝐼 + 𝐼2 = 957,027

The undiversified risk requirement U is:

𝑈 = ∑ 𝐼𝑅𝑖 + 𝑃𝐶 + 𝐴 = 1,465,500 + 25,000 + 275,000 = 1,765,500

𝑖=1

The last quantity needed to calculate K is LT, given by:

7

𝐿𝑇 = ∑ 𝐿𝑇𝑖 = 904,000
𝑖=1

With D, U and LT known, the final adjusted diversified requirement K is calculated as:

𝐷2
𝐾 = 0.8 𝑈 + 0.1 𝐿𝑇 + max (0.233 𝑈 − 0.116 𝐿𝑇 − 1.033 𝐷 + , 0) = 1,517,987
𝑈 − 0.5 𝐿𝑇

Life A LICAT
October 2018 203
11.3 Base Solvency Buffer
The Base Solvency Buffer is equal to:

𝛾 × (∑ 𝐾non-par + ∑(𝐾par 𝑖 − 𝐶𝑃𝑖 ) − ∑ 𝐶𝐴𝑗 − 𝐶𝐺 + 𝑆𝐹𝐺 + 𝑂𝑅)

𝑖 𝑗

where:

 𝛾 is the scalar defined in section 1.1.5

 ∑ 𝐾non-par is the sum of the requirements K calculated for the non-participating block
in each geographic region
 The second sum is taken over all qualifying participating blocks, and the third sum is
taken over all qualifying adjustable products
 𝐾par 𝑖 is the standalone adjusted diversified requirement K for qualifying participating
block i
 𝐶𝑃𝑖 is the par credit for participating block i calculated under section 9.1.2
 𝐶𝐴𝑗 is the adjustable credit for adjustable product j calculated under section 9.2.2
 𝐶𝐺 is the total of all credits for policyholder deposits and group business under
sections 6.8.2 and 6.8.3
 SFG is the capital requirement for segregated fund guarantee risk
 OR is the capital requirement for operational risk.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 204
Chapter 12 Life Insurers Operating in Canada on a
Branch Basis
The Life Insurance Margin Adequacy Test (LIMAT) set out in this guideline, along with
Guideline A-4: Regulatory Capital and Internal Capital Targets, provide the framework within
which the Superintendent assesses whether life insurers operating in Canada on a branch basis
(branches) maintain an adequate margin pursuant to subsection 608(1). Under subsection 608(1)
of the ICA, a foreign insurer is required to maintain in Canada an adequate margin of assets over
liabilities in respect of its insurance business in Canada.

In addition, foreign insurers are required to maintain assets in Canada, with respect to their life
insurance business in Canada, that are sufficient to cover:
1) reserves for actuarial and other policy liabilities;
2) unpaid claims; and
3) other liabilities and amounts related to the carrying on of their life insurance business in
Canada.

These requirements are prescribed in accordance with the Assets (Foreign Companies)
Regulations.

12.1. LIMAT Ratios

The LIMAT Total Ratio measures the adequacy of assets available to meet the margin
requirements, as determined in accordance with this guideline. The Total Ratio focuses on
policyholder and creditor protection. The formula used to calculate the Total Ratio is:

Available Margin + Surplus Allowance + Eligible Deposits

Required Margin

The LIMAT Core Ratio makes an adjustment to the Total Ratio calculation by excluding Other
Admitted Assets, and focuses on financial strength. The formula used to calculate the Core Ratio
is:

Available Margin + 70% of Surplus Allowance + 70% of Eligible Deposits − Other Admitted Assets
Required Margin

Life A LICAT
October 2018 205
12.2. Available Margin
The Available Margin is the difference between Assets Available and Assets Required.

12.2.1. Assets Available

Assets Available consists of:

1) Vested Assets;
2) investment income due and accrued on Vested Assets; and
3) Other Admitted Assets, as specified in section 12.2.3;
less:
4) Deductions/Adjustments per section 12.2.4

12.2.2. Vested Assets

Vested Assets are to be valued in accordance with the Insurance Companies Act.

12.2.3 Other Admitted Assets

The amount of Other Admitted Assets included in Assets Available is the lesser of:

A. The sum of:

i) balance sheet values of amounts due from federally or provincially regulated insurers
that are not in arrears, are unencumbered, are under the control of the Chief Agent,
and that have not been deducted from Assets Required;
ii) all amounts included in Assets Required on account of negative reserves;
iii) 75% of the cash surrender value deficiencies calculated on a grouped aggregate basis
(q.v. section 2.1.2.8);
iv) the adjustment amount to amortize the impact in the current period on Assets Required
on account of each net defined benefit pension plan recognized as a liability on the
branch’s balance sheet, net of any associated deferred tax assets; and
v) balance sheet values of right of use assets associated with owner-occupied leased
properties, as recognised on the branch’s balance sheet in accordance with relevant
accounting standards.
and
B. 50% of the difference between Required Margin and Surplus Allowance.

Assets under the control of the Chief Agent may be included in Other Admitted Assets only if
the following conditions are met:

Life A LICAT
October 2018 206
 1) records and record keeping facilities in Canada are satisfactory to OSFI119;
2) the branch has received an unqualified auditor's opinion; and
3) the Superintendent receives an undertaking from the head office of the insurer and the
Chief Agent specifying that the assets referred to in section i) above that are under the
control of the Chief Agent will be maintained in Canada.

12.2.4. Deductions/adjustments

The following amounts are deducted from Assets Available:

1) aggregate positive policy liabilities ceded under unregistered reinsurance, less the amount
of collateral and letters of credit applied toward these liabilities (q.v. Chapter 10);
2) accumulated net after tax revaluation losses in excess of gains on owner-occupied
properties vested in trust; and
3) net after tax revaluation gains on owner-occupied properties vested in trust.

12.2.5. Assets Required

Assets Required in respect of a branch’s insurance business in Canada consists of:

1) insurance contract liabilities and other policy liabilities120, net of all reinsurance ceded;
2) provisions for policyholder dividends, experience rating refunds, and discretionary
participation features121;
3) outstanding claims and adjustment expenses;
4) policyholder amounts on deposit;
5) accounts payable;
6) income taxes payable;
7) mortgage loans and other real estate encumbrances;
8) deferred income tax liabilities;
9) each net defined benefit pension plan recognized as a liability on the branch’s balance
sheet net of any associated deferred tax asset that would be extinguished if the liability
were otherwise derecognized under relevant accounting standards;
10) any and all other liabilities that pertain to Canadian creditors and that are associated with
the operations of the insurer in Canada122;

119
Refer to Guideline E-4 Foreign Entities Operating in Canada on a Branch Basis.
120
For LIMAT purposes, policy liabilities should include future income tax cash flows under valuation assumptions
as required by the Canadian Institute of Actuaries Standards, prior to any accounting adjustment for balance
sheet presentation.
121
These amounts must be included in assets required irrespective of whether they are classified as liabilities or
equity for financial reporting purposes.
122
Includes liabilities associated with leased properties, plant and equipment recognised as right of use assets on the
branch’s balance sheet in accordance with relevant accounting standards and OSFI instructions.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 207
 11) adjusted negative reserves calculated policy by policy (q.v. section 2.1.2.9) and negative
reserves ceded to unregistered reinsurers (qq.v. sections 10.3.2 and 10.3.4);
12) cash surrender value deficiencies calculated on a grouped aggregate basis (q.v. section
2.1.2.8);
less:
13) loans secured by policies in Canada;
14) agents’ debit balances and outstanding premiums; and
15) amounts due from federally regulated insurers and registered reinsurers (as defined in
section 10.1.1) that can be legally netted against the insurance contract liabilities of the
branch, as outlined below.

In order to deduct an amount due from a registered reinsurer from Assets Required, a branch
should, at a minimum, meet the following conditions:
1) The amount due is from an insurer to which the branch has a liability of an equal or
greater amount. (Amounts due in excess of the liability are not deducted from Assets
Required; they are included in Other Admitted Assets, below).
2) The branch has executed a written, bilateral netting contract or agreement with the insurer
to which the liability is owed that creates a single legal obligation. The result of such an
arrangement must be that the branch has only one obligation for payment or one claim to
receive funds based on the net sum of the liabilities and amounts due in the event the
counterparty to the agreement failed to perform due to default, bankruptcy, liquidation or
similar circumstances.
3) The netting arrangement specifies that only the liabilities to the counterparty arising out
of the Canadian operations of the foreign insurer may be taken into consideration in
determining the net amount owed. In particular, the counterparty must not be able to net
amounts due to the branch against any liabilities of the home office or affiliates of the
branch that are not liabilities arising out of the Canadian operations of the foreign insurer.
4) The branch should have written and reasoned legal opinions confirming that, in the event
of any legal challenge, the relevant courts or administrative authorities will find the
amount owed under the netting agreement to be the net amount under the laws of all
relevant jurisdictions. In reaching this conclusion, legal opinions must address the
validity and enforceability of the entire netting agreement under its terms.
a. The laws of “all relevant jurisdictions” are: a) the law of the jurisdiction where the
counterparty is incorporated and, if the foreign branch of a counterparty is
involved, the laws of the jurisdiction in which the branch is located; b) the law
governing the individual insurance transaction; and c) the law governing any
contracts or agreements required to effect the netting arrangement.
b. The legal opinions must be generally recognized as such by the legal community
in the firm’s home country or by a memorandum of law that addresses all relevant
issues in a reasoned manner.

Life A LICAT
October 2018 208
 5) The branch should have procedures in place to update legal opinions as necessary to
ensure continuing enforceability of the netting arrangement in light of possible changes in
relevant law.
6) The netting contract/agreements terms and conditions, and the quality and content of the
legal opinions, must meet the conditions of this guideline, and must be submitted to OSFI
for review prior to the branch deducting the amount due from Assets Required.

12.3. Surplus Allowance and Eligible Deposits

The amount of the Surplus Allowance included in the calculation of the Total Ratio is based on
PfADs that are calculated under CALM or any other method prescribed under the Standards of
Practice of the Canadian Institute of Actuaries that is used to calculate insurance contract
liabilities in respect of insurance business in Canada123. The specific PfADs included in the
Surplus Allowance are outlined in section 1.1.3.

Eligible Deposits, as described in section 1.1.4, may be recognized in the calculation of the Total
Ratio and Core Ratio.

12.4. Required Margin

A branch’s Required Margin is calculated in the same way as the Base Solvency Buffer
described in section 1.1.5, and applies to:
1) Vested Assets;
2) liabilities in respect of insurance business in Canada; and
3) balance sheet values of assets under the control of the Chief Agent, if these are taken into
consideration in determining Other Admitted Assets above.

The Required Margin forms part of the vesting requirements for foreign insurers.

123
If approximations are permitted by the CIA Standards of Practice and used to calculate the PfADs those
approximations should continue to be used for LICAT purposes

Life A LICAT
October 2018 209